BN 302 ABS - Workshop Manual (En)

BN302/TNT300 Service Manual
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 1
P
CO
Preface
This maintenance manual which is prepared by Benelli·QJ Company is intended
for the use by Benelli·QJ dealers and professional maintenance personnel. Not all the
information related to motorcycles is included in this manual, so it is used only for
repairing and maintaining Benelli·QJ motorcycles, so as to learn principles,
maintenance procedures and maintenance technologies of motorcycles. It is hoped
that the person who uses this manual for repairing and maintaining Benelli·QJ
motorcycles has basic knowledge of motorcycle in machinery and necessary
procedures for repair and maintenance of motorcycles. The assembly may be
conducted improperly when repairing motorcycles and dangers may be caused after
assembly without these knowledges.
This manual is only for reference during repair and maintenance of BJ300GS
motorcycles.
Benelli·QJ Company will continue to promote and improve this type of
motorcycle. Modifications or major changes in product specifications will be told to
all the Benelli·QJ authorized dealers, and compiled in the later version of
maintenance manual.
Notes
Designs and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
o @
c nic
Important Information in This Maintenance e
e p.t
Manual - d
ins
r t
The following important items are included in this manual:
Ma
re
Warning: If there is this symbol, failure to follow the instructions may cause severe injuries and even death
d
to cyclists, people nearby or the one who is repairing the motorcycle.
xan
A le
Important: “Important” means specific preventive measures to avoid damaging motorcycles.
-
SAsimpler and more accurate.
Note: “Note” means important information which can make procedures much
l
g a
rt u
P o
t o r
M o
o t o
lt i m
M u
-
PY 2
CO
User Guide
This manual is a practical reference guide which is easy to operate and use by
technicians. Instruction, assembly, removal, disassembly, repair and check of all the
procedures are in sequence, one step for each time.
1. Each chapter is divided into several sections. And the headline of current part
is included on the top of each page.
2. In order to better identify parts and make different processes clearer,
breakdown drawings are offered at the start of each section involving in parts
disassembly.
3. Operating sequences are listed on breakdown drawings, and the sequences are
numbered one by one. Each number means each step during the disassembly.
4. Parts that need to be lubricated and changed should be symbolized. Please
refer to the section “Symbol”.
5. Breakdown drawings are equipped with a table with serial numbers, including
operating sequence, parts name, precaution for work, etc. @

o
6. Describe any other required information (such as special tools and technical
c nic
e
data) in sequence.
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 3
P
CO
Exhaust Emission Control Information
In order to protect our environment, Benelli·QJ Company has introduced the provisions that conform to
environmental protection regulations of China, European countries and other countries. This motorcycle is
equipped with (1) crankcase blow-by gas filtering system, (2) exhaust emission control system and (3) fuel
evaporation recovery system.
1. Crankcase blow-by gas filtering system
This system can prevent gas in crankcases from being discharged into the environment. The gas in
crankcases is pressed into air inlet sides of engines by oil separator. When the engine is running, the gas is put into
combustion chambers, and then combusts with air and fuel pushed out of fuel injection system.
2. Exhaust emission control system
This system can reduce the number of pollutants of exhaust gas from this type of motorcycle into the
environment. Fuel injection system, ignition system and exhaust system of this type of motorcycle have been
carefully designed and assembled to have efficient engines and low quantity of pollutants discharged.
A catalytic converter system is included in this type of motorcycle.
3. Fuel evaporation recovery system
Fuel vapor in fuel injection systems will not be discharged into the environment, but be pressed into the
working engine to be combusted. If the engine is not started, the vapor will be stored in charcoal canisters. If it is
liquid fuel, it will be inhaled into oil separators, and then come back to fuel tanks.
Warning
1. Before final buyers purchase or receive any motorcycle or motorcycle engine, no one shall disassemble or
destroy any parts mounted on the motorcycle or motorcycle engine based on the provisions of this manual; any
manufacturer or dealer shall not deliberately disassemble or destroy any parts after any motorcycle or motorcycle
engine is sold or delivered to the final buyers.
2. After any motorcycle or motorcycle engine is sold or delivered to final buyers, any one who is engaged in
repairing, maintaining, selling, leasing or trading motorcycles or motorcycle engines, or managing motorcycle
teams shall not disassemble or destroy any parts mounted on the motorcycles or motorcycle engines based on the
o @
provisions of this manual…”
c nic
e
e p.t
Remarks
- d
“Disassembling or destroying any parts” is generally defined as follows:
ins
1. Temporarily disassembling any parts or the situation in which the parts cannot temporarily run for the repairing r t
purpose does not belong to “refit”. Ma
2. The following situations belong to “refit”:
d re
an
a) Improperly adjust motorcycle parts to make its exhaust gas discharged exceed emission standards.
c) Add parts or accessories to make motorcycles exceed standards. le x

b) Use Replacement of parts or accessories to impact the performance or durability of motorcycles.
- A
d) Permanently disassemble, separate or destroy any parts on exhaust emission control systems.
A
Sprovisions
a l
It is suggested that all the dealers should abide by the abovementioned of local laws.
g
o rtu
r P
o t o
o M
o t
lt i m
M u
Y - 4
O P
C
Symbols
Specific Symbols
General Information
Specifications
Check and Regular
adjustment
Motorcycle
Engine
Cooling System
Fuel System o @
c nic
e
e p.t
Electrical System
- d
ins
r t
Fault and
Ma
Troubleshooting d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 5
P
CO
Symbol Interpretation
Wear Limit
Special Tool
Tightening Torque
Lubricating Point
Lubricating Grease
Sealant
New parts to use
o @
c nic
e
p.t
Thread Sealant
de
s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 6
P
CO
Content
General Information Chapter I
Specification Chapter II
Check and Regular

Chapter III
adjustment
Motorcycle Chapter IV
Engine Chapter V
Cooling System Chapter VI
Fuel System Chapter VII
o @
c nic
Electrical System Chapter VIII e
e p.t
- d
Fault and
ins
Chapter IX
r t
Troubleshooting
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 7
P
CO
Contents
Preface .................................................................................................................................................................. 2
User Guide ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
Exhaust Emission Control Information ................................................................................................................ 4
Symbols ................................................................................................................................................................ 5
Specific Symbols ..........................................................................................................................................5
Symbol Interpretation ................................................................................................................................... 6
Chapter I General Information............................................................................................................................ 14
General safety ............................................................................................................................................. 15
Identification ............................................................................................................................................... 16
Motorcycle identification.................................................................................................................... 16
Important parts .................................................................................................................................... 17
Features....................................................................................................................................................... 18
Instruments and lights ......................................................................................................................... 18
Important information................................................................................................................................. 20
Preparation for disassembly and disassembling operation ................................................................. 20
Gasket, O-ring, seal ring and bearing ................................................................................................. 21
Lock washer/locking plate, bolt and thread sealant ............................................................................ 22
Circlip ................................................................................................................................................. 22
Cable-to-cable connector check .......................................................................................................... 23
Special tool ................................................................................................................................................. 25
Chapter II Specification ...................................................................................................................................... 30
Basic specifications .................................................................................................................................... 31
Technical data of engine ............................................................................................................................. 32
Technical details of engine ......................................................................................................................... 35
Technical data of motorcycle ...................................................................................................................... 38
Electrical data ............................................................................................................................................. 41
Technical data of nut locking ...................................................................................................................... 45
o @
Technical data of bolt and screw locking.................................................................................................... 46
Chapter III Check and Regular adjustment......................................................................................................... 49 c nic
e
Regular maintenance and lubrication interval ............................................................................................ 50
Regular maintenance and lubrication interval schedule ............................................................................. 51 e p.t
Air filter ...................................................................................................................................................... 54 - d
Fuel oil hose................................................................................................................................................ 57
ins
Control ........................................................................................................................................................ 58 r t
Throttle cable .............................................................................................................................................. 59 Ma
re
Clutch cable ................................................................................................................................................ 60
d
an
Rearview mirror .......................................................................................................................................... 61
le x
Engine oil .................................................................................................................................................... 62
Engine oil filter ........................................................................................................................................... 65
- A
Coolant........................................................................................................................................................ 66
A
Radiator pipe............................................................................................................................................... 67
a lS
Spark plug ................................................................................................................................................... 68
ug
Valve clearance ........................................................................................................................................... 72
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 8
P
CO
Brake adjustment ........................................................................................................................................ 76
Check of brake fluid ................................................................................................................................... 78
Check of brake shoes .................................................................................................................................. 83
Check of brake hoses .................................................................................................................................. 84
Adjustment of drive chain .......................................................................................................................... 85
Check and adjustment of steering gear ....................................................................................................... 87
Check of front fork ..................................................................................................................................... 90
Check of rear shock absorber...................................................................................................................... 91
Check of front and rear tyres ...................................................................................................................... 92
Check and battery charging ........................................................................................................................ 93
Check of fuse .............................................................................................................................................. 99
Replacement of headlight bulb ................................................................................................................. 101
Adjustment of headlight ........................................................................................................................... 103
Replacement of front signal light bulb ..................................................................................................... 104
Replacement of rear license plate light ..................................................................................................... 105
Section IV Motorcycle ...................................................................................................................................... 107
Front wheel and front brake disc .............................................................................................................. 108
Rear wheel and rear brake disc ................................................................................................................. 117
Front and rear brakes ................................................................................................................................ 126
Front and rear brakes / front brake shoe ........................................................................................... 128
Front and rear brakes / rear brake shoe ............................................................................................. 129
Front and rear brakes / front brake.................................................................................................... 130
Front and rear brakes / rear brake ..................................................................................................... 135
Anti-lock Brake System （Equipped Models）......................................................................................... 146
Front suspension ....................................................................................................................................... 175
Front suspension/front fork....................................................................................................................... 176
Front suspension/front shock absorber ..................................................................................................... 177
Control ...................................................................................................................................................... 187
Control/control.................................................................................................................................. 188
Control/handlebar ............................................................................................................................. 191
o @
nic
Rear shock absorber .................................................................................................................................. 195
Drive chain and rear swing arm ................................................................................................................ 199
ec
p.t
Drive chain and rear swing arm ........................................................................................................ 200
Drive chain and rear swing arm/ rear swing arm .............................................................................. 203
de
Frame ........................................................................................................................................................ 206
Frame ........................................................................................................................................................ 206 s -
Frame / engine assembly................................................................................................................... 207
r tin
Frame / rear license plate support ..................................................................................................... 211
Ma
d re
Frame / single stay ............................................................................................................................ 214
Frame / left foot pedal....................................................................................................................... 217
an
Frame / right foot pedal .................................................................................................................... 220
x
le
Muffler ...................................................................................................................................................... 223
A
A -
Covering parts........................................................................................................................................... 228
Covering parts / front fender ............................................................................................................. 230
lS
Covering parts / rear fender .............................................................................................................. 233
a
g
Assembly of covering parts / rear lower fender and chain cover ...................................................... 237
u
rt
Covering parts / fuel tank guard and power bottom cover ................................................................ 240
o
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 9
P
CO
Covering parts / backplate ................................................................................................................ 244
Covering parts / fairing .....................................................................................................................249
Lights ........................................................................................................................................................ 252
Lights/rear taillight ........................................................................................................................... 253
Lights/front steering light ................................................................................................................. 254
Lights/rear steering light ................................................................................................................... 255
Chapter V Engine ............................................................................................................................................. 256
Cylinder head and cylinder head cover of engine ..................................................................................... 258
Exploded view .................................................................................................................................. 258
Technical parameters ........................................................................................................................ 261
Special tools and sealants ................................................................................................................. 262
Special tools and sealants ................................................................................................................. 263
Cylinder head cover .......................................................................................................................... 264
Camshaft timing chain tensioner ...................................................................................................... 267
Camshaft and camshaft timing chain ................................................................................................ 269
Cylinder cover .................................................................................................................................. 275
Valve ................................................................................................................................................. 280
Fixator of throttle valve body ........................................................................................................... 291
Clutch........................................................................................................................................................ 292
Breakdown drawing .......................................................................................................................... 292
Special tools and fastening adhesives ............................................................................................... 294
Right cover ....................................................................................................................................... 295
Clutch................................................................................................................................................ 297
Engine lubrication system......................................................................................................................... 303
Breakdown drawing .......................................................................................................................... 303
Engine oil flow diagram ................................................................................................................... 305
Special tools and fastening adhesives ............................................................................................... 307
Engine oil and engine oil filter ......................................................................................................... 308
o @
Oil pan .............................................................................................................................................. 309
Engine oil pump .............................................................................................................................. 311 c nic
e
Engine oil pressure relief valve ........................................................................................................ 313
Measurement of engine oil pressure .................................................................................................314 e p.t
Engine oil pressure switch ................................................................................................................ 315 - d
Crankshaft / transmission gear .................................................................................................................. 317
ins
Breakdown drawing ..........................................................................................................................317 r t
Technical parameters ........................................................................................................................ 320 Ma
re
Special tools and fastening adhesives ...............................................................................................323
d
an
Crankcase.......................................................................................................................................... 324
le x
Crankshaft and connecting rod ..................................................................................................... 331
Piston ................................................................................................................................................344
- A
Electric start .................................................................................................................................... 350
A
Variable gear ................................................................................................................................... 354
a lS
Chapter VI Cooling system ............................................................................................................................ 365
ug
Water pump............................................................................................................................................. 368
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 10
P
CO
Thermostat .............................................................................................................................................. 372
Water pipe connector.............................................................................................................................. 374
Disassemble the radiator ................................................................................................................... 376
Dismantle the radiator....................................................................................................................... 378
Radiator ............................................................................................................................................ 379
Fan .................................................................................................................................................... 381
Radiator cover................................................................................................................................... 383
Water temperature switch ................................................................................................................. 384
Radiator assembly............................................................................................................................. 385
Cooling liquid filling ........................................................................................................................ 386
Chapter VII Fuel system ................................................................................................................................... 387
Fuel system ............................................................................................................................................... 388
Fuel tank ................................................................................................................................................... 389
Fuel pump ................................................................................................................................................. 395
Operating principle of fuel pump...................................................................................................... 395
Fuel pump appearance ...................................................................................................................... 395
Fuel pump composition .................................................................................................................... 396
Tag and identification label of fuel pump ......................................................................................... 396
Work environment of fuel pump ...................................................................................................... 397
Fuel pump maintenance procedure ................................................................................................... 398
Operation precaution: ....................................................................................................................... 401
Throttle body ............................................................................................................................................ 402
Operating principle of throttle body: ................................................................................................ 402
Appearance of throttle body: ............................................................................................................ 402
Working environment of throttle valve............................................................................................. 403
Disassemble of throttle body ............................................................................................................ 403
Negative pressure balance of throttle valve regulation ..................................................................... 404
Throttle valve cleaning method ........................................................................................................404
Assembly of throttle body................................................................................................................. 404
o @
Installation cautions for throttle valve .............................................................................................. 404
Operation cautions for throttle valve ................................................................................................ 404 c nic
e
Fuel injector .............................................................................................................................................. 405
Operating principle of fuel injector ..................................................................................................405 e p.t
Appearance of fuel injector...............................................................................................................405 - d
Sealing ring of fuel injector .............................................................................................................. 406
ins
Overvoltage effects of fuel injector .................................................................................................. 407 r t
Temperature range of fuel injector ................................................................................................... 407 Ma
re
Fuel oil pollutants of fuel injector..................................................................................................... 407
d
an
Wiring harness layout of fuel injector .............................................................................................. 407
le x
Operation cautions for fuel injector .................................................................................................. 408
Installation requirements for fuel injector......................................................................................... 409
- A
Fuel injector replacement method.....................................................................................................409
A
Replaceability of fuel injector........................................................................................................... 409
a lS
Blocking of fuel injector ................................................................................................................... 410
ug
Chapter VIII Electrical system ......................................................................................................................... 411
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 11
P
CO
Charging system ....................................................................................................................................... 412
Rechargeable battery ........................................................................................................................ 413
Magnetoelectric generator ................................................................................................................ 418
Rectifier ............................................................................................................................................ 423
Ignition system ......................................................................................................................................... 425
Ignition coil....................................................................................................................................... 426
Position sensor of crankshaft ............................................................................................................ 434
ECU .................................................................................................................................................. 435
Sparking plug .................................................................................................................................... 436
Ignition system troubleshooting........................................................................................................ 438
Start-up system ......................................................................................................................................... 439
Motor start-up ................................................................................................................................... 440
Relay start-up .................................................................................................................................... 446
Instrument ................................................................................................................................................. 449
Instrument disassembly .................................................................................................................... 449
Instrument and indicator light ........................................................................................................... 449
Master switch disassembly ............................................................................................................... 452
Check the master switch ................................................................................................................... 452
Loudspeaker.............................................................................................................................................. 453
Disassemble: ..................................................................................................................................... 453
Inspection.......................................................................................................................................... 453
Handlebar switch (sell on domestic market) ............................................................................................. 454
Handlebar switch (EURO-STANDARD state) ......................................................................................... 455
Velocity sensor .......................................................................................................................................... 456
Disassemble velocity sensor ............................................................................................................. 456
Check the velocity sensor ................................................................................................................. 456
Velocity sensor assembly.................................................................................................................. 456
Relay and fuse-base block ........................................................................................................................ 457
Relay ................................................................................................................................................. 457
Fuse-base block ................................................................................................................................ 459
o @
Electro-jet system ..................................................................................................................................... 460
Electro-jet system/ECU .................................................................................................................... 461 c nic
e
Electro-jet system/water temperature sensor of engine .................................................................... 467
Electro-jet system/intake air temperature sensor .............................................................................. 468 e p.t
Electro-jet system/Intake manifold pressure ..................................................................................... 470 - d
Electro-jet system/oxygen sensor ..................................................................................................... 472
ins
Electro-jet system/idle speed stepper motor ..................................................................................... 474 r t
Electro-jet system/ECP ..................................................................................................................... 476 Ma
d re
Chapter IX Faults and Troubleshooting............................................................................................................ 478
Difficulty in starting or starting failure ..................................................................................................... 479
xan
Poor rotation (Especial at low speed) ....................................................................................................... 480
le
Poor rotation (High speed)........................................................................................................................ 481
A
A -
Charging defect (Over discharging or over charging of battery voltage) ................................................. 482
Spark plug jump........................................................................................................................................ 483
lS
Diagnosis breakdown maintenance of electro-jet system ......................................................................... 484
a
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 12
P
CO
Directly use the fault indicating light flashing diagnosis (FI) on the instrument .............................. 485
Use diagnostic apparatus on fault diagnosing ................................................................................... 488
Check the faults with diagnostic software PCHUD .......................................................................... 489
Common trouble shooting methods of electro-jet system ........................................................................ 497
Repair kit .......................................................................................................................................... 497
Engine working data flow indicated on the diagnostic apparatus ..................................................... 498
Simple troubleshooting methods ...................................................................................................... 498
Chapter X Appendices ...................................................................................................................................... 502
Wire wrapping method of cables, wires and hoses ...................................................................................503
BJ300GS circuit diagram (sale in domestic market) ................................................................................ 525
BJ300GS circuit diagram (EURO-STANDARD)..................................................................................... 526
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 13
P
CO
Chapter I General Information
General safety .................................................................................................................................................... 15

Identification ...................................................................................................................................................... 16
Motorcycle identification........................................................................................................................... 16
Important parts ........................................................................................................................................... 17
Features .............................................................................................................................................................. 18
Instruments and lights ................................................................................................................................ 18
Important information ........................................................................................................................................ 20
Preparation for disassembly and disassembling operation ........................................................................ 20
Gasket, O-ring, seal ring and bearing ........................................................................................................ 21
Lock washer/locking plate, bolt and thread sealant ................................................................................... 22
Circlip ........................................................................................................................................................ 22
Cable-to-cable connector check ................................................................................................................. 23
Special tool ........................................................................................................................................................ 25
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
in s
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 14
P
CO
General safety
Carbon monoxide
If engines must be started, the workplaces should be well-ventilated. The engines are not allowed to run in
enclosed places.
Notes
A poisonous gas-carbon monoxide included in exhaust gas can make us lose consciousness and may cause
death.
Engines are required to run in open places. Scavenging systems should be used in enclosed places.
Gasoline
Gasoline must be used in well-ventilated places. Smoking is strictly prohibited in workplaces or the places where
gasoline is stored.
Storage battery
Since storage battery may emit explosive gas, it must stay away from sparks, open flames and smoking areas.
Keep the areas well-ventilated while it is charging.
Storage battery contains sulfuric acid (electrolyte). Since it may cause burns once exposed to skin or eyes, we
must wear protection suits and masks.
——Flush skin immediately with running water once electrolyte is splashed on it.
——Flush eyes immediately with running water for more than 15min and ask doctors for examinations once
electrolyte is splashed on them.
Electrolyte is poisonous. Drink a large of water, milk, milk of magnesium oxide (a kind of laxative antacid) or
vegetable oil immediately and ask doctors for examinations once electrolyte is accidentally drunk by mistake.
Therefore, it should be put beyond the reach of children.
Engine oil
Skin exposure to engine oil and then to the air for a long time again and again may cause canceration to human
body. Although you may not be exposed to engine oil in daily life, you should flush yourself with water and soap o @
immediately once it happens. Therefore, engine oil should be put beyond the reach of children.
c nic
e
p.t
Used oil contains carcinogenic, mutagenic and teratogenic substances along with waste acid and heavy metal
which are extremely harmful to human health. Aromatic compounds and other organic compounds among them
are quite harmful to body. These substances not only stay in lungs but also go into blood and the whole body to de
disturb our hematopoietic system, nervous system and other systems, which result in anemia, thrombocytopenia
s -
and other blood diseases, dizziness, nausea, anorexia and weakness and even cancer for a long time. Lead,
r tin
Ma
cadmium and other heavy metals which are difficult to be discharged out of body and may accumulate in human
body have severe impacts on nervous system resulting in oral ulcer, gingival and other diseases and symptoms.
re
Since iron is an active metal, it will cause chronic inflammation in respiratory tracts and lungs further resulting in
d
an
pulmonary fibrosis, emphysema and other diseases.
Thermal energy section le x

- A
At start-up, engines and heat-removal system sections may generate heat, and then start to cool down after the
A
lS
heat lasts for some time at shut-down. These sections should be handled with heat insulating gloves or after the
engines or heat-removal systems cool down.
g a
rt u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 15
P
CO
Identification
Motorcycle identification
Identification data are as follows:
1. Serial number of frame (at the right side of steering tube on the frame)
2. Serial number of engine (at the lower right side of the engine)
3. Motorcycle nameplate (at the left side of steering tube on the frame)
Trademark
Registered
Benelli
Motorcycle
model:
model
Two-wheeled Unladen
Kerbmass:
mass
motorcycles 欧规款
3 Engine model Displacement:
Delivery
capacity
ZHEJIANG QIANJIANG Manufacturing
201__
date
date:
MOTORCYCLE CO., LTD, China
Model complying with European Regulations
o @
c nic
e
1
ep.t
2
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 16
P
CO
Important parts
(1) Left rearview mirror
(2) Clutch handle
(3) Left handle switch
(4) Ignition switch
(5) Instrument
(6) Right handle switch
(7) Right rearview mirror
(8) Front brake handle
(9) Throttle control grip
(10) Fuel tank
(11) Engine oil filler
(12) Rear brake foot lever
(13) Front foot pedal
(14) Rear foot pedal
(15) Rear brake
(16) Front brake
(17) Side stay
(18) Shift foot lever
(19) Seat cushion lock
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 17
P
CO
Features
Instruments and lights
When the ignition key is rotated to “ON”, instruments and lights may be turned on.
After preliminary inspections, information will correspond to the overall conditions of motorcycle at that
time.
The following indicator lights are included in dashboards.
Status indicator lights
1A: Direction indicator light (green)
This flickering indicator light means that the direction light is on.
1B: Neutral indicator light (green)
When this indicator light is on, it means that the motorcycle is in a neutral state.
1C: High beam indicator light (blue)
When this indicator light is on, it means that the high beam light is on.
1D: Oil pressure warning light (red)
When the engine is not started after the power is turned on, the engine oil indicator light is always on; if the
oil pressure is normal after the engine is started, the engine oil indicator light will be off; if the engine oil indicator
light is not off, the oil pressure may be abnormal, which means that it is required to shut down the engine for
inspection;
If there is fuel oil or water in oil circuits, the indicator light will be always on, which means that it is required to
shut down the engine for inspection.
FI: “FI” means fault code diagnosis of EFI system (orange)
When a key turn on the EFI indicator light, it will be on, the oil pump is running for 3sec, and the motorcycle
is started. If the indicator light is off after the motorcycle is started, the motorcycle is normally running without
faults; if the indicator light is on, it means that there are some faults on the motorcycle. In the same driving
process, if the indicator light is off, the motorcycle is normally running; if the indicator light is on, it means that
there are some faults on the motorcycle, which means that it is required to shut down the engine for inspection,
and please contact dealerships of Benelli& QJ which will use special motorcycle fault diagnosis tester to check
your motorcycles.
Function button (2)
Function button (3)
Button Function Table

o @
nic
Function Power supply Current interface display Left button Right button Display interface after
switching
Function switching ON <3sec
ec
Function switching
Function switching
ON
ON
<3sec
>3sec
e p.t
Function switching ON >3sec
- d
Function switching ON
ins
r t
Ma
Clock setting ON >3sec Hour bit flickering
re
ON <3sec Hour bit+1 (0-23)
ON <3sec
d
Switch to ten-of-minute
ON <3sec an
flickering
x
Tens of minutes+1 (0-5)
ON <3sec
A le
Switch to unit-of-minute
flickering
ON
A - <3sec Units of minutes+1 (0-9)
lS
ON <3sec Exit clock menu
Note In the adjusting state of clock, automatically exit the menu with no button being pressed in 5sec.
g a
rt u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 18
P
CO
Tachometer (4):
It indicates the rotations per minute of the engine at that time.
Coolant temperature measurement (5):
It indicates the coolant temperature in °F (Fahrenheit) or ℃ (Centigrade).

Counter of whole/part of km (6)
You can choose the functions of relative mileage (TRIP) or total mileage (TOTAL) on the odometer, and
choose the units of mph (miles) or km (km) according to your needs.
Relative mileage (TRIP): It is an odometer that can be reset for recording the driving mileage in a certain
period. Pressing and holding function button 2 can reset the odometer in the state of relative mileage (TRIP).
Total mileage (TOTAL): It is used for recording the whole driving mileage.
An odometer is used for recording the km of total driving distance.
Speedometer (7):
A speedometer indicates the driving speed. Short press function buttons (2) and (3) simultaneously to choose
whether the unit is mph (miles/hour) or km/h (km/hour) according to your needs.
Digital clock (8):
The time is shown in hours and minutes. See the following function button (3) if time is necessarily adjusted.
Fuel meter (9):
It indicates how much fuel is stored in the fuel tank. It will indicate 7 fuel levels with full fuel; when the fuel
level is 1 or less than 1, the fuel indicator will be flickering without enough fuel.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 19
P
CO
Important information
Preparation for disassembly and disassembling operation
Please get rid of dirt, mud, dust or foreign matters before
any disassembly and disassembling operation.
Only use appropriate cleaning tools and products. See
the section “Special Equipment”.
When the motorcycle is disassembled, we suggest
putting fit parts together. These parts include gear,
cylinder, piston and other items. Their surfaces may “run
in” during normal wear. Fitting pieces must be used or
changed in pairs. During disassembling operation, clean
all the parts, and put removed parts in order according to
various sections in case of mix or loss, which will make
it easy to assemble parts and make all the parts be
accurately assembled.
All the parts should keep away from any heat source.
Replacement of parts
Only use original Benelli·QJ Replacement of parts. And
only use oil and grease recommended by Benelli·QJ to
o @
lubricate parts.
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
The parts with multiple assembling units should be Ma
loosened from outside to inside and small assembling
d re
an
units should be loosened first.
Gearbox and other complicated assembling units should
be stored in a proper assembly sequence for future le x
assembly. - A
A
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 20
P
CO
Pay special attention to important assembly positions
before disassembly. Prepare for the parts which are
no longer used before disassembly, and change the
parts in time after disassembly.
Different assembling units and backplates have

different bolts or screws which must be mounted in
accurate positions. If they are mixed, put the bolts
into holes to check whether they are fitted.
The end of rubber hose (fuel pipe, vacuum tube or

coolant pipe) should be inserted at the bottom of joint Trough
so that hose clights have enough space to clight the
joint. Rubber or plastic dirt-proof boots should be
assembled to their original design positions. Clight
Joint
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
Gasket, O-ring, seal ring and s
r tin
bearing
Ma
Change all the gaskets, oil seals and O-rings when
d re
an
engines are repaired.
Clean the surface of gaskets, oil seal lips and O-rings.
le x
- A
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 21
P
CO
Assemble bearings and oil seals so that trademarks
or manufacturer numbers are outwards and visible.
Assemble oil seals, and appropriately lubricate the
lubricating lips of oil seals.
Appropriately lubricate bearings during assembly.
a. Oil seal
b. Bearing
Important Note
Never use compressed air to dry bearings,
which may damage their surfaces.
Lock washer/locking plate, bolt

and thread sealant
Replace all the lock washers or locking plates “A”
after lock washers, locking plates, bolts or nuts are
disassembled.
After bolts or nuts are locked with specified torques,
lock washers or locking plates are opposite to the
planes of bolts or nuts; use locking marks and lock washers in case of the curved tail end of locking plates.
Degrease the both sides of bolts or nuts with solvents

before the use of thread sealants.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
Circlip - d
Carefully check all the circlips, and change all the ins
r t
Ma
damaged or deformed closing rings before
reassembly. And all the used circlips of piston pins
should be also changed.
d re
The sharp edge “B” of circlip should be on the
opposite of thrust “C” felt by this circlip when the xan
circlip “A” is assembled. And “D” is an axle.
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 22
P
CO
Cable-to-cable connector check
Ensure that there is no mark, rust, water, wiring and
other items on connectors.
1. Disconnect
Wire
Connector
Joint
2. Check
Wire
Connector
Joint
Use compressed air to dry water if any.
Connect and insert connecting parts for several
times if there is rust.
3. Check
All the connecting parts
Properly reconnect any joint if it is loose.
Notes o @
Please bend foot “A” on terminals if it becomes flat.
c nic
e
e p.t
4. Check - d
Wire ins
r t
Ma
Connector
Joint
d re
Notes
Ensure that all the joints are firmly assembled. xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 23
P
CO
5. Check
Continuity (using multimeters)
Notes
Clean terminals if there is no item that needs to be
checked.
Wire sleeves should be checked according to steps
1-3.
Please use [contact rehabilitating agents] which are
sold in the most of parts stores for quick correction.
Loose cables are the hidden danger of electrical

safety. Check the next cable after the cable is
clighted to ensure the electrical safety;
Cable clights are not allowed to bend towards
welding spots;
Bind cables at specified positions;
Cables are not allowed to be at the end of frame or
at sharp corners;
Cables are not allowed to be at the end of bolts or
screws;
Cables should keep away from heat sources or from
the positions in which cables may be clighted during
movement;
Cables along faucet handles should be prevented
from being too tight or too loose, and should not
interfere with their adjacent parts in any turning
position;
o @
Cables should be smooth without any twist or knot;
Confirm whether connector jackets are damaged, c nic
e
and connectors are excessively stretched before
connectors are oppositely jointed. e p.t
Please protect cables with tapes or hoses if they are - d
at sharp corners or in turning positions;
ins
Bind up exposed cables with tapes after cables are r t
repaired; Ma
Control cables should not be bent or twisted.
d re
an
Damaged control cables will result in poor control;
le x
- A
A
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 24
P
CO
Special tool
The following special tools are the ones necessary to conduct complete and correct adjustment and assembly.
The use of correct special tools can avoid damage caused by improper tools or non-professional technologies.
Required special tools may be different in different countries. Please refer to the following data when tools are
ordered in case of any error.
Special tools for engine
Quantity Name Image
Valve stem oil seal tools
1 are used for inserting
valve oil seals.
Clutch disassembling
tools are used for
1 preventing clutch drums
from turning and for
loosening nuts.
Sprocket locking tools

are used for locking
1 sprockets easy to mount
or disassemble output
sprocket nuts.
Piston pin removers are

1 used for taking out
piston pins.
Camshaft sprocket
adjustment tools are
1
used for adjusting the
tension of chains.
o @
c nic
e
Valve stem oil seal
e p.t
1
removers are used for
taking oil seals out of - d
cylinder heads.
ins
r t
Breather pipe Ma
installation tools for are
used for mounting d re
1
breather pipes on
cylinder head covers xan
and cylinder heads.
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 25
P
CO
Ring clight tools are
used for assembling
1 closing rings on pistons
and inserting them into
cylinders.
Gearshift lever drum

assembling tools are
1
used for assembling
gearshift lever drums.
Flywheel extractors are

used for removing
1
flywheels from
crankshafts.
Engine adjusting tools

1 for are used for setting
TDC positions.
Oil filter tools are used

for tightening or
1
disassembling oil filters
on engines.
o @
Chain tensioner locking
tools are used for c nic
e
1 locking tensioners when
chain tensioners are
e p.t
assembled.
- d
Bearing shell
ins
compression tools are r t
used for mounting
bearing shells. Lock the Ma
1
either end of bearing
shell into the trough, put d re
the tool on it, and press
xan
the tool by hand to
make the bearing shell
A le
stuck into the trough.
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 26
P
CO
Tools for disassembling
/ fastening clutch
component clight nuts
1 are used for
disassembling /
fastening clutch
component clight nuts.
Valve spring
disassembling tools are
1
used for disassembling
springs from valves.
Valve removal adapters

1 are used for removing
valves.
Gauges are used for

1 measuring internal
dimensions of holes.
Gauges are used for

1 measuring external
dimensions of parts.
o @
c nic
e
Feeler gauges are used
e p.t
1 for measuring
clearances. - d
ins
r t
Ma
Magnetic stands and d re
1
V-blocks are used for
xan
aiding in measuring
dimensions.
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 27
P
CO
Dial gauges are used for
1
measuring dimensions.
Vernier calipers are used

1 for measuring
dimensions.
Flywheel locking tools

are used for
1 disassembling the
flywheels on
crankshafts.
Locking tools for lock

nut at steering head are
1 used for locking lock
nut and fastening
steering heads..
Locking tools for o @

1
fastening screw on
upper connecting plate
c nic
e
p.t
are used for locking
fastening screws on
upper connecting plates.
de
s -
r tin
Clight pliers are used Ma
1 for locking tubing
clights. d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 28
P
CO
Multimeters are used for
measuring the voltage,
1
current and resistance of
electrical parts.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 29
P
CO
Chapter II Specification
Basic specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 31
Technical data of engine ......................................................................................................................................32
Technical details of engine .................................................................................................................................. 35
Technical data of motorcycle ............................................................................................................................... 38
Electrical data ...................................................................................................................................................... 41
Technical data of nut locking ............................................................................................................................... 45
Technical data of bolt and screw locking............................................................................................................. 46
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
in s
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 30
P
CO
Basic specifications
Dimension Standard
Total length (A) 2130mm
Total width (B) 775mm
Total height (C) 1120mm
Wheelbase (D) 1410mm
Weight Standard
Kerb weight (with full oil and fuel oil) 196Kg
Empty motorcycle (with no oil and empty fuel tank) ……
Maximum allowable load capacity (with cyclists and
160Kg
load)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 31
P
CO
Technical data of engine
Engine specifications
Engine Standard
Four-stroke, inline double-cylinder, water cooling,
Engine four-valve for each cylinder, and double overhead
camshaft (DOHC)
Total displacement 299.82CC
Quantity of cylinders 2
Inside diameter × stroke 65.0×45.2
Compression ratio 12: 1
Low free speed ……
High free speed ……
Double overhead camshaft, chain-controlled, and
Distribution
four-valve for each cylinder
Maximum net power 26.0kW/12000rpm
Maximum net torque 27.0N.m/9000rpm
Fuel consumption limit ≤5.2L/100km
Start-up mode Electrical starting
Fuel oil
Recommended fuel oil Lead-free 93 and above
Engine oil
Lubricating mode Force and splash lubrication
Total quantity 3.0L
Total quantity without replaced engine oil filter 2.8L
Total quantity with replaced engine oil filter 3.0L
o @
Type: API SH, SJ or SL, JASO MA c nic
e
e p.t
- d
Viscosity: SAE 10W-40
ins
r t
Recommende engine oil
Ma
Air filter d re
xan
Sponge le
Type of air filter
Intake resistance
A
1 .2 ±0-.12 KPa
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 32
P
CO
Technical data for engine
Oil pump
Type of oil pump Rotor pump
Radial clearance of internal and external rotor 0.03-0.13mm
Ignition device
Ignition mode TLI
Spark plug
Type of spark plug NGK CR8E
Spark plug clearance 0.6-0.7mm
Cylinder head
Maximum curvature of cylinder gasket 0.03 mm
Camshaft
Control system Chain transmission
Diameter of camshaft support Ø23 (0，+0.021) mm
Clearance between support and camshaft follower 0.03-0.064 mm
Camshaft lobe dimension, intake side
Measurement A= 32.495 mm
Measurement B= 25 mm
o @
c nic
e
Camshaft lobe dimension, exhaust side
e p.t
Measurement A= 32.495 mm - d
Measurement B= 25 mm
ins
r t
Ma
Maximum bounce of camshaft
d re
0.03 mm xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 33
P
CO
Technical data of engine
Valve, valve seat and valve guide

Intake valve clearance (cold) 0.13-0.19 mm
Exhaust valve clearance (cold) 0.19-0.25 mm
Valve dimension
Intake Ø 25 mm
Exhaust Ø 22 mm
Valve head diameter
Intake 1.9-2.1 mm
Exhaust 1.75 ~ 1.95 mm

Valve face width
Intake 1 ~ 1.1 mm
Exhaust 1 ~ 1.1 mm
Valve seat amplitude
1.9 ~ 2.1 mm
Intake
Exhaust 1.75 ~ 1.95 mm

Valve seat width
Intake 3.965 ~ 3.98 mm
Valve stem diameter
Exhaust 3.965 ~ 3.98 mm
Clearance between valve Intake 0.04 ~ 0.065 mm
stem and valve guide
Exhaust 0.05 ~ 0.075 mm
o @
c nic
e
p.t
0.05 mm
de
Bounce of valve stem
s -
Valve spring
Intake
Exhaust
37.2 mm
40.5 mm r tin
Effective pressure of Intake 895MPa～1024MPa Ma
intake/exhaust Exhaust
re
Lower end 751≥1000MPa, stem end 895-1042MPa
d
Intake 0.5mm
xan
A le
Exhaust
A - 0.5mm
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 34
P
CO
Technical details of engine
Timing chain
Link number/type 92RH2015
Automatic tensioning Self-adjusting type
Cylinder
Cylinder layout Vertical inline
Stroke ratio 65.0: 45.2
Compression ratio 12: 1
Stroke 45.2 mm
/O/ 0.008 mm
Largest oval
/O/ 0.006 mm
Piston
Clearance between piston and cylinder 0.035~0045mm
Piston diameter “A” 65（-0.03，-0.025）/65（-0.025，-0.02）
Piston height “B” 11 mm
Piston pin boss diameter
16（0.002，0.008）mm
“C”
External diameter of piston pin 16（-0.008，0）mm
Clearance between top piston ring and ring trough 0.05-0.09 mm
Type of piston ring Drum type
o @
Dimension A*B 2.3 × 0.8 mm
c nic
e
Clearance between the second piston ring and ring
trough
0.04-0.08 mm
e p.t
- d
Type of piston ring Ladder type
ins
r t
Ma
Dimension A*B 2.3 × 0.8 mm
Clearance between oil scraping ring and ring trough 0.04-0.14mm

d re
a n
2.25 × 1.5 mme x
Dimension A*B
- Al
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 35
P
CO
Piston stem
Color code of bearing A=red, B=blue, C=yellow
K1=black, K2=green, K3=white, K4=brown,
Stem weight code
K5=orange
Crankshaft
Width A 131mm
Maximum centrifugal force 22.6 ± 0.01 mm
Side clearance C at the large end C of connecting 0.1-0.25 mm
stem
Color code of main bearing A=red, B=blue, C=yellow
Clutch
Clutch mode Oil-bath clutch with multiple plates
Clutch release mode Cable and spring
Clutch control action Cable action
Action Use left handles. o @
Position of clutch disengaging lever Align slotting positions with scribed lines on right
c nic
e
p.t
covers.
Free clearance of clutch disengaging lever Unadjustable
de
Clutch cable clearance (at the end of clutch lever) 2 ~ 3 mm
s -
Thickness of friction plate
Quantity of friction plate
3.0± 0.1mm
7 r tin
Thickness of steel plate 2.0± 0.1mm Ma
Effective length of spring 36.7（0~0.2）mm
d re
Quantity of spring 4
xan
Throttle body A le
Diameter
A - 34mm
Switch mode of throttle
a l SRotating type
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 36
P
CO
Transmission device
Type of transmission device 6-speed, constant mesh
Final ratio 2.645
The second decelerating system 3.071
Level 1 2.846
Level 2 1.947
Level 3 1.556
Transmission ratio
Level 4 1.333
Level 5 1.190
Level 6 1
Maximum speed 140km/h
Gear control mechanism

Type of gear control mechanism Sequence driven selector and preselector
Straightness 0.02mm
Maximum deformation of gear-shift guide rod
Roundness 0.005mm
Coolant
Recommended type Permanent antifreezing agent
Color Green
Mixed ratio 50% soft water, 50% coolant
o @
nic
Freezing point –35°C (–31°F)
Total quantity 2L
ec
Fuel oil pump e p.t
Type of fuel oil pump Electric type - d
Model (manufacturer) Delphi ins
r t
Ma
Output pressure 250KPa
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 37
P
CO
Technical data of motorcycle
Motorcycle specifications
Motorcycle
Frame type Steel pipe truss
Gradient 25°
Castor 86mm
Front wheel
Wheel type 6-spoke aluminum alloy
Wheel disc (dimension) 17×MT3.50
Wheel disc (material) Aluminum alloy
Wheel disc (diameter) 17 inches
Rear wheel
Wheel type 6-spoke aluminum alloy
Wheel disc (dimension) 17×MT4.50
Wheel disc (material) Aluminum alloy
Wheel disc (diameter) 17 inches
Front tyre
Tyre type 120/70-17 M/C
Model (trademark) Pirelli
Tyre pressure 230±5kPa
Rear tyre o @
Tyre type 160/60-17 M/C
c nic
e
p.t
Model (trademark) Pirelli
Tyre pressure 250±5kPa
de
s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 38
P
CO
Front hydraulic brake Limit

Brake type Floating disc double-brake
Action Use right hand
Recommended liquid DOT04
Brake disc
Φ260×4
Diameter×thickness
Maximum thickness 4mm 3 mm
Maximum deformation 0.1mm
Thickness of worn brake pad 1mm
Diameter of pump cylinder 16mm (0.62 in)
Diameter of clight cylinder 34 (1.33in)
Rear hydraulic brake

Brake type Single disc brake
Action Use right foot
Recommended liquid DOT04
Brake disc
o @
Φ260×5
c nic
e
Diameter×thickness
Maximum thickness 5mm 4 mm e p.t
Maximum deformation 0.1mm - d
Thickness of worn brake pad 1mm ins
r t
Ma
Diameter of pump cylinder 12.9mm
Diameter of clight cylinder 32 mm
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 39
P
CO
Front suspension
Suspension type Extension sleeve type
Maximum stroke 135mm
Free length 310 mm
Gasket length 80 mm
Spring
Elasticity 8.9 N/mm
Spring stroke 0 ~ 135 mm
Damping oil
Recommended oil SAE 7.5 32#
Each amount of each damping oil 400ml
Horizon (pipes are fully compressed without fork 130 mm
spring from the top of lateral pipes)
Steering
Type of steering bearing Ball bearing
Left steering angle 30°
Right steering angle 30°
Rear suspension
Suspension type Rocker arm type with adjustable gas shock
Maximum stroke 42 mm
Free length 170±1，5 mm
Gasket length No gaske o @
nic
Spring
Elasticity 180 N/mm
ec
p.t
Spring stroke 42±1 mm
Standard pressure of preloading gas/air of spring 1.5Mpa
de
Adjustment location of
Minimum location 0
s -
spring preloading
Standard
Maximum location
9 mm
20 mm r tin
Adjustment location of
Minimum location 500N Ma
rebound damping
Standard 1900N
d re
Maximum location 5000N V=0.1m/s
xan
Drive chain A le
Model (trademark)
A - 525HO
Chain pitch quantity
a l S 108
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 40
P
CO
Electrical data
Electrical specifications
System voltage
System voltage 12V
Ignition coil
Model (trademark) Delphi
Resistance of primary coil 0.6Ω
Resistance of secondary coil 10kΩ
Choke of primary coil 2.5 mH (1 kHz 0.3V)
Choke of secondary coil 23.5 mH (1kHz)
Maximum endurable current 7.6 A
Charging system
System type Magnetic AC (between white and white: 0.1～0.2Ω)
Model (trademark) 5-101211-502-1 (DENSO)
Rated output 13.5 V 48 A at 5000 rpm
Voltage regulator (in AC generator) Three-phase full wave
Voltage setting 14.5 + 0.3 V (5000 rpm 10 A 25 C°)
Starting relay
Model (trademark) ……
Amperage 100 A
Coil resistance 4.4Ω at 20 C°
Starting motor o @
Model (trademark) ……
c nic
e
p.t
Brush length of starting motor 12.5mm/5.5mm (limit of usage)
Bushing of starting idler shaft 8.3mm (limit of usage)
de
Outside diameter of starting idler shaft 7.94mm (limit of usage)
s -
Battery r tin
Model (trademark) YTX9-BS Ma
Voltage of battery capacity 12V/8Ah
d re
Relative density of electrolyte 1.280±0.01
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 41
P
CO
Electrical data
Horn
Horn type Low pitch
Model (trademark) DL122 K.X.D
Maximum amperage 3A
Performance 105 ~ 118 db (A)
Headlight
Headlight type Halogen
Headlight H7(12V 55W)
Front position indicator light W5W
Rear position indicator LED
light/brake light
Steering light LED
Light bulb
License plate light W5W
(watt×quantity)
Neutral indicator light LED
High beam indicator light LED
Oil level warning light LED
Steering indicator light LED
Engine fault indicator light LED
Flasher
Model (trademark) Lihua 355 E10
Flasher type Digital controlled flasher
Flicker frequency of steering light Normal: 80±10 times/min; variable frequency:
o @
nic
160±10 times/min
Power 10W×4
ec
Engine oil pressure sensor e p.t
Model (trademark) Delphi - d
Alarm 55KPa
ins
r t
Throttle body position sensor Ma
d re
Resistance 3k~12kΩ
xan
Throttle body barometric sensor A le
Model (trademark)
A -
Smart
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 42
P
CO
Electrical data
Fuse (amperage×quantity)
Fuse ECU (control unit) 15A (blue)
Headlight fuse 15A (blue)
Hot wire fuse 10A (red)
Radiator-fan fuse 15A (blue)
Backup fuse 15A (blue)+ 10A (red)
Oil pump fuse 15A (blue)
Charging fuse 40A (orange)
Fuel oil pump

Model Delphi
Working voltage 12V～14V
Maximum amperage 1.8A

Output oil pressure 250kPa
Fuel oil sensor

E end (resistance value) 100Ω
F end (resistance value) 10Ω
Air temperature sensor

Model (trademark) HAIHUA
Structure Resistance type
o @
Cylinder head temperature sensor
c nic
e
Model (trademark)
Structure
HAIHUA
Resistance type e p.t
- d
Crankshaft position sensor ins
r t
Ma
Model (trademark) CHONGQING LIJIAN
Outlet water temperature switch

d re
Working temperature 98℃
xan
A le
Model (trademark)
Velocity sensor
A -
CHONGQING SANMU
Type
a l SInduction type
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 43
P
CO
Electrical data
Oxygen sensor
Resistance 9.6±1.5Ω (measured at 21°C)
Fuel injector
Relay unit
Model (trademark) Panasonic
Stepping motor
Model (trademark) Smart
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 44
P
CO
Technical data of nut locking
Basic locking specifications
Locking torques of parts or specific components are
offered in each chapter of this manual.
In order to avoid the risk of deforming the
components with several fasteners, cross locking
parts in proper orders until required torques are
achieved.
Locking torques are specified, and the thread of
parts is clean and dry, unless otherwise specified.
Parts must be fastened at room temperature.
Basic fastening torque

Nut
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 45
P
CO
Technical data of bolt and screw locking
Basic locking specifications
Fastening torque of bolt and screw and relevant parameters
Basic fastening torque
Bolt/screw Level 8.8 Level 10.9 Level 12.9
N.m Kg.f N.m Kg.f N.m Kg.f
M4×0.7 3 0.31 4.2 0.43 5.2 0.53
M5×0.8 6 0.61 7.5 0.77 9 0.92
M6×1 10 1.02 13 1.33 16 1.63
M8×1.25 22 2.24 30 3.06 40 4.08
M8×1(*) 25 2.55 36 3.67 45 4.59
M10×1.5 45 4.59 65 6.63 80 8.16
M10×1.25(*) 50 5.10 70 7.14 85 8.67
M12×1.75 80 8.16 110 11.22 135 13.78
M12×1.5(*) 85 8.67 120 12.24 145 14.80
M12×1.25(*) 90 9.18 130 13.27 150 15.31
M14×2 130 13.27 185 18.88 220 22.45
M14×1.5(*) 150 15.31 205 20.92 245 25.00
M16×2 200 20.41 280 28.57 335 34.18
M16×1.5(*) 225 22.96 310 31.63 360 36.73
M18×2.5 265 27.04 370 37.76 450 45.92
M18×1.5(*) 320 32.65 450 45.92 550 56.12
M20×2.5 390 39.80 550 56.12 650 66.33
M20×1.5(*) 440 44.90 630 64.29 750 76.53
M22×2.5 540 55.10 750 76.53 900 91.84
M22×1.5(*) 600 61.22 850 86.73 1000 102.04 o @
M24×3 670 68.37 950 96.94 1130 115.31
c nic
e
p.t
M24×2(*) 750 76.53 1050 107.14 1250 127.55
*: It refers to fine thread.
de
s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 46
P
CO
Locking torque
Engine
Torque
Fastener Remarks
N·m kgf·m ft·lb
Cooling system
Coolant drain bole 10 1.0 89 in·lb
Cylinder fitting fixing bolt 9.8 1.0 87 in·lb
Radiator fixing bolt 9.8 1.0 87 in·lb
Radiator (water pipe) hose fastening screws 2.0 0.20 18 in·lb
Expansion kettle fixing bolt 6.9 0.70 61 in·lb
Bolt on the housing cover of thermostat 5.9 0.60 52 in·lb
Thermostat shell fixing bolt 9.8 1.0 87 in·lb
Water pump cover bolt 9.8 1.0 87 in·lb
水泵叶轮紧固 9.8 1.0 87 in·lb 批注 [001]: 此处可能少词
Water pump impeller fastening bolt
Cylinder head and cylinder head cover of engine
Camshaft sprocket fixing bolt 20 20 14.75 L
Camshaft cover bolt 12 1.2 106 in·lb S
Camshaft timing chain fairleader bolt 12 1.2 106 in·lb
Camshaft timing chain tensioner fixing bolt 12 1.2 106in·lb
Cylinder cover bolt (M10) 55 5.5 40.56 MO、S
Cylinder cover bolt (M6) 12 1.2 106 in·lb S
Cylinder head cover bolt 12 1.2 106 in·lb S
Spark plug 13 1.3 115 in·lb
Throttle body assembly fixing bolt 12 1.2 106 in·lb S
Clutch
Right cover bolt 12 1.2 106 in·lb Tighten
Hexagon head bolt 12 1.2 106 in·lb them
Engine oil filler plug screw — — manually
Clutch spring bolt 10 1.0 89 in·lb
Sprocket mounting bolt 8 0.8 71 in·lb
o @
nic
Balance shaft driving gear lock nut 60 6.1 44 L
Clutch lock nut 95 9.7 70
Clutch driving sprocket screw 8 0.8 71 in·lb
e c
Engine lubrication system
Oil pan drain magnetic bolt 20 2.0 15
ep.t
Oil pan bolt
Engine oil pump mounting bolt
10
10
1.0
1.0
89 in·lb
89 in·lb - d
Engine oil pump cover bolt 10 1.0 89 in·lb
ins
Sprocket mounting bolt 8 0.8 71 in·lb r t
Engine oil pressure switch bolt
Engine oil filter bolt
24.5
17
2.5
1.7
18 ft·lb
13 ft·lb
L
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 47
P
CO
Locking torque
Torque
Fastener N·m kgf·m ft·lb Remarks
Crankshaft/transmission mechanism
Balance shaft driven gear lock nut 100 10.2 73.7 L
Connecting rod big end nut See the text.
Crankshaft flywheel nut 105 10.7 77.4 L
Balance shaft driving gear lock nut 60 6 44 L
Follower bolt (M6, L = 14 mm) 10 1 89 in·lb L
Oil passage plug (M16, L = 15 mm) 24.5 2.5 18.1 L
Follower screw (M6, L = 16 mm) 7 0.71 62 in·lb L
Support bolt (M6, L = 20 mm) 10 1 89 in·lb L
Crankcase bolt (M8, L = 85 mm) 24.5 2.5 18.1 MO、S
Crankcase bolt (M6, L = 40 mm) 10 1 89 in·lb S

Crankcase bolt (M10, L = 60mm) 45 4.6 33.3 MO、S
Crankcase bolt (M8, L = 75 mm) 24.5 2.5 18.1 S
Crankcase bolt (M10, L = 100mm) 45 4.6 33.3 MO、S
Flywheel lock nut 100 10.2 73.7
Overrunning clutch bolt 20 2.04 15 L
Positioning roller rocker arm bolt 12 1.22 106.49 in·lb L
Shift positioning star wheel fixing bolt 12 1.22 106.49 in·lb
Left cover bolt 12 1.22 106.49 in·lb
Locking torques of main fasteners that need thread fastening adhesive, silicone sealant and other adhesives
are listed in the above table. And the letters in the column of “Remark” are defined as follows: o @
AL: Alternatively tighten fastening bolts twice according to higher locking torques.
c nic
G: Coat lubricating grease. e
L: Coat thread fastening adhesive.
e p.t
M: Coat lubricating grease containing molybdenum disulfide.
- d
MO: Coat oil solvent containing molybdenum disulfide.
ins
(Mixture of engine oil and lubricating grease containing molybdenum disulfide prepared at the weight ratio
r t
Ma
of 10:1)
R: Replace parts.
S: Follow the specified tightening sequences.
d re
Si: Coat silicone grease.
SS: Coat silicone sealants. xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 48
P
CO
Chapter III Check and Regular adjustment
Regular maintenance and lubrication interval ....................................................................................... 50
Regular maintenance and lubrication interval schedule ........................................................................ 51
Air filter ................................................................................................................................................. 54
Fuel oil hose........................................................................................................................................... 57
Control ................................................................................................................................................... 58
Throttle cable ......................................................................................................................................... 59
Clutch cable ........................................................................................................................................... 60
Rearview mirror ..................................................................................................................................... 61
Engine oil ............................................................................................................................................... 62
Engine oil filter ...................................................................................................................................... 65
Coolant...................................................................................................................................................66
Radiator pipe.......................................................................................................................................... 67
Spark plug .............................................................................................................................................. 68
Valve clearance ...................................................................................................................................... 72
Brake adjustment ................................................................................................................................... 76
Check of brake fluid .............................................................................................................................. 78
Check of brake shoes ............................................................................................................................. 83
Check of brake hoses ............................................................................................................................. 84
Adjustment of drive chain ..................................................................................................................... 85
Check and adjustment of steering gear .................................................................................................. 87
Check of front fork ................................................................................................................................ 90
Check of rear shock absorber................................................................................................................. 91
Check of front and rear tyres ................................................................................................................. 92
Check and battery charging ................................................................................................................... 93
o @
Check of fuse ......................................................................................................................................... 99
Replacement of headlight bulb .............................................................................................................. 101 c nic
e
Adjustment of headlight ........................................................................................................................ 103
Replacement of front signal light bulb .................................................................................................. 104 e p.t
Replacement of rear license plate light .................................................................................................. 105 - d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 49
P
CO
Regular maintenance and lubrication interval
The specified time interval in the scheduled maintenance form is just a general guide in normal use. It is
necessary to reduce the time interval according to weather, topography, geographical position and personal usage
condition. If users have necessary skills, some operations can be completed by themselves; if it is explicitly
mentioned in this manual, they also can be completed by users.
In brief, these operations should be completed in an authorized Benelli·QJ repair shop. The list of authorized
repair shops is available on the websites of www.qjmotor.com and www.benelli.com or from our after-sales
service centers.
Generally, motorcycles are erected by a rear support, engines are shut down, and switches are turned to OFF
when maintenance is conducted for the motorcycles:
Preferably, motorcycles should be on a level surface, and front and rear tyres should be on the ground and
vertical to the ground without rear support when liquid levels are under check.
Notes:
Annual check should be conducted unless motorcycles have been maintained according to set time intervals
(according to mileage in Britain).
At 36000km, for example, start to repeat maintenance services at 12000km.
For marked time intervals , we suggest contacting with Benelli·QJ dealers because of some special
equipment, professional information and experience of professional skills needed.
The following part shows all maintenance operations.
Notes: @
o
Air filter
c nic
e
Air filter elements should be often replaced if motorcycles are used in a particularly humid or dusty
environment. e p.t
- d
Hydraulic brake maintenance
ins
Regularally check brake fluid levels and complement brake fluids. r t
Replace brake pumps and the oil seals in calipers every two years; and replace brake fluids. Ma
re
Replace brake hoses every four years; or replace them in time if they are found broken or damaged.
d
Symbol interpretation x an
A le
Check, adjustment, cleaning, lubrication or replacement as required
Replacement
A -
Tightening
Dealer a lS
r t ug
P o
t o r
M o
oto
lt im
M u
Y - 50
P
CO
Regular maintenance and lubrication interval schedule
Frequency
Annual
0 1000 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000
Item Content inspectio
km km km km km km
n
I R R R R R R
1 Engine oil Check / add / replace
Check engine oil level before using the motorcycle
Engine oil Replace R R R R R R
2
filter or when replacing oil engine
Fuel oil Check / replace I I R I
3
filter
Check / replace I R I R
4 Air filter Repair and maintenance must be conducted after 3000 km; the cycle
may be shortened appropriately under special environment
Check / add / replace I I I I R I I
5 Coolant
Replace Every two years, or 18000km (11184mi)
Check the cooling liquid I I I I I I I
Cooling level, and ensure three is
6
system no liquid leakage in
motorcycle
Check / replace I R I R I
7 Spark plug
Check the situation, wash and restore spark plug clearance
I I I I I I
Check chain tensioner,
ensure that the rear wheel After a new motorcycle has run for 1000km, adjust the chain extension,
8 Drive chain
has been correctly aligned, paste the correct chain oil after every cleaning; later, adjust the chain
clean and luburicate extension once every 3000km; under special use conditions, the
adjustment cycle can be shortened according to the actual situation
Large chain Check / lubricate I I I I I I
9
wheel Replace it when replacing chain
Small chain Check / replace I I I I I I
10 wheel /
gasket
Replace it when replacing chain
o @
nic
Fault / leakage check I I I R
Fuel oil
11
pipe
Replace it every 24000km (14912mi); or under any circumstances,
ec
p.t
replace it every three years
Check / add I I I I I I I
12
Brake
liquid Replace
Replace it every 15000km (9320mi), or under any circumstances,
de
Check operation and I I
replace it every two years
I I R I I s -
13
Front / rear liquid level, and ensure
r tin
Ma
brakes there is no liquid leakage
in motorcycle
re
Brake Check / replace I I I I I
14
shoes
d
If the wear reaches the limit, please replace
15
Drive chain
protector
Check / replace I I I I
xan
I
Check operation; if I I I I le
I I I
16
Throttle
possible, adjust throttle
cable clearance, lubricate -A
SA
grip
throttle grip enclosure and
throttle cable
a l
rt ug
P o
t o r
M o
oto
lt im
M u
Y - 51
P
CO
Continued
Frequency
Annual
0 1000 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000
Item Contents inspectio
km km km km km km
n
Check/adjust I I I I I I I
17 Clutch
Check operation/ adjust the

Valve I
18 clearance
clearance
Every 24000km (14912mi), check the clearance
Timing Check / replace R
19
chain Every 24000km (14912mi)
Timing Check / replace R
20 chain
When replace timing chain every time
leading plate
Chain Check / replace R
21 tensioner
When replace timing chain every time
distribution
Steering Check / replace T T
22
bearing Every 18000km (11184mi), lubricate it with lithium base grease
Front / rear Check / replace I
23 wheel
Every 24000km (14912mi)
bearing
Swing arm Check / replace I I I R
24
bearing Every 24000km (14912mi)
Check operation and I I I I
25 Rocker arm ensure that there is no too
much clearance/lubrication
Check operation and
Front ensure that there is no I I I I I I
26
suspension leakage
Front Replace R
27 suspension
oil
Every 24000km (14912mi)
o @
28
挂 Rear
Check / adjust and ensure
that there is no leakage
I I I I
c nic
suspension
e
p.t
Before use the motorcycle
Ensure that there is no I I I
29 Wheel
eccentricity or damage Every 18000km (11184mi)
de
Check the tyre tread pattern
depth and whether the tyre
I I I I I I
s -
has been damaged, and
r tin
Ma
30 Tyre replace it when necessary;
check the tyre pressure, and
re
fill the tyre with air when
necessary
d
31 Single stay
Check operation I I I I I
xan I I
Single stay Check operation I I I I I

le I I
-A
32
switch
Instrument Check operation I I I
A I I I I
lS
33 light signal
and switch
g a
rt u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 52
P
CO
Continued
Frequency
Annual
0 1000 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000
Item Contents inspectio
km km km km km km
n
Check operation I I I I I I
34 Headlight
Adjust
Audible Check operation I I I I I I I
35
alarm
Check operation I I I I I I I
36 Instrument
Connecting Check operation I I I I I I I

37
battery
Electrical Check operation I I I I I I I
38
system
Ignition Check operation I I I I I I I
39
system
Check operation I I I I I I I
40 Fan
Fuel oil Check / replace I I I I I I I

41 filter
Every 18000km (11184mi)
element
Fastening T T T T T T
Ensure that all nuts, bolts
of
42 and screws have been
motorcycle
accurately fastened
parts
Check / replace I I I I R
Catalytic
43 Without maintenance requirements, do not replace it unless there is
converter Fault
fault
Check / replace I I I I R
Charcoal
44 Without maintenance requirements, do not replace it unless there is
canister Fault
fault
Fault/leakage check I I I I I I I
45
Brake /
clutch hose
Every four years
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 53
P
CO
Air filter
Disassembly / installation of air filter
No. Name and specifications Quantity No. Name and specifications Quantity
1 Clight components 2 10 Charcoal canister solenoid valve 1 o @
2 Intake air temperature sensor 1 11
Solenoid valve and throttle valve
1 c nic
e
p.t
connecting pipe
3 Air filter assembly 1 12 Screw M6×12-8.8-ZG 2
de
4 Charcoal canister mounting plate 1 13 Waste gas recovery pipe 1
s -
5
Oil tank and check valve connecting
pipe
1 14 Plate clight 2
r tin
6 Check valve components 1 15 Plate clight 4
Ma
7
Check valve and charcoal canister
connecting pipe
1 16 Plate clight
d re 4
8 Charcoal canister combination 1 17 Rubber bushing II

xan 2
9
Charcoal canister and solenoid valve
1 A le
connecting pipe
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 54
P
CO
Air filter
Replacement of air filter

Remove the fuel tank guard, and see (the chapter of
motorcycle covering parts/fuel tank guards).
Open the seat cushion lock, and take off the seat
cushion.
Remove the fuel tank fixing bolt (1), and take off the
fuel tank.
Remove the air filter cover.

Take off the air filter element. o @
Check: c nic
e
Whether the filter element is polluted or damaged.
e p.t
Please replace the filter element, if any.
- d
Cleaning:
ins
r t
Ma
 Rinse gently and thoroughly the filter element
with cleaning agents.
 Do not use gasoline so as not to cause fires.
d re
 Do not distort or wring the filter element so
as not to damage foam materials. xan
 Then, coat engine oil on the filter element, and
Ale
squeeze out the extra oil to make it moist without oil dripping.
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 55
P
CO
Air filter
Time replacement
Air filter elements should be often replaced if motorcycles are used in a particularly humid or dusty
environment.
*Notes
When disassembling the air filter
element, do not start the engine; otherwise,
the unfiltered air will enter the engine
resulting in sharp wear on parts or possible
damage on the engine.
Additionally, operation without the filter
element may impact the engine and then the
engine may function improperly, and
overheat.
Assembly should be conducted in inverse order to disassembly.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 56
P
CO
Fuel oil hose
Fuel oil hose check
Check:
Fuel oil hose (fuel oil leakage, hose crack and hose
installation)
Notes:
If the motorcycle is improperly handled,
high pressure from fuel pipe will cause fuel
oil leakage [A] or fuel oil pipe crack.
Disassembly:
Remove the fuel oil tank (see Section “Air filter” of
Chapter III “Check and Regular adjustment”).
Check: fuel oil pipe

If any wear, crack [B] or expansion [C] is found, the fuel oil pipe must be replaced.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 57
P
CO
Control
Control cable
1 Rearview mirror component 1 14 Right rearview mirror 1 o @
2 Throttle grip 1 15 Left rearview mirror 1
c nic
e
p.t
3 Throttle cable back cover 1 16 Socket head screw M6×35 2
4 Throttle cable front cover 1 17 Spring washer 6 2
de
5 Right combined switch 1 18 Gasket 6 2
s -
6
7
Balance block
Handlebar
2
1
19
20
Balance block assembling stand
Balance block
2
2 r tin
8 Left combined switch 1 21 Cable clight 1 Ma
9 Left grip 1 22 Globe valve soft cable clight
d re 3
10 Clutch handle 1 23
an
Handlebar soft cable clight
x
2
11
12
Clutch cable component
Throttle cable component I
1
1
24
25
Cotter pin 2×18
A
Hinge pin 6×14
le 1
1
13 Throttle cable component II 1 26
A -Clutch handle 1
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 58
P
CO
Throttle cable
Throttle cable adjustment
Check:
Throttle cable clearance (A)
Ensure that the throttle control grip works properly,
and can reach the maximum open position and
automatically closed position in all the control
positions. Make some adjustments if needed, as
shown in Fig. A.
*Notes
The engine idling speed should be
properly adjusted before the throttle steel
rope stroke is adjusted.
Check the free stroke of throttle steel rope which is 3-5mm.

Make some adjustments if it does not conform to specified values. Adjust the free stroke of throttle steel rope.
Adjustment:
The motorcycle is equipped with double-cable
throttle steel rope. Throttle steel rope A is refueling
door cable, and throttle steel rope B is oil return
cable. Please adjust the free stroke of throttle grip
according to the following steps:
(1) Remove the dirt-proof boot of throttle
cable. o @
(2) Loosen the lock nut ③.
(3) Completely screw in and adjust the nut ④. c nic
e
(4) Loosen the lock nut ①.
(5) Rtoate the adjusting nut ② to make the e p.t
free stroke of throttle control grip be 10°～15°.
- d
(6) Tighten the lock nut ①.
ins
(7) Adjusting nut ④; and check whether the
r t
Ma
throttle grip turns flexibly.
(8) Tighten the lock nut ③.
After the free stroke is adjusted, the handbar should
d re
an
be turned to the left or right to make sure that there is
no change in the engine idling speed.
le x
- A
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 59
P
CO
Clutch cable
Adjustment of clutch cable clearance
Check:
Free stroke of clutch handle (A)
Make some adjustments if needed:
Measure the free stroke of clutch handle at the tip of
clutch handle.
Free stroke: 10-20mm
Adjustment:
1. Loosen the ring nut C.
2. Rotate and adjust the device B clockwise or
anticlockwise to set the clutch cable clearance as
specified, as shown in Fig. B.
Increase clearance in clockwise direction.
Reduce clearance in anticlockwise direction.
o @
c nic
Notes
e
Use the adjusting nut at E side of engine
e p.t
if the clutch cable does not reach the
specified clearance from one side of handle, - d
as shown in Fig. C. ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 60
P
CO
Rearview mirror
Adjustment of rearview mirror
The following steps are applicable to the adjustment
of two rearview mirrors.
Adjustment
Fasten the rearview mirror on the handle, check the
nut B and fasten and press it to its base, as shown in
Fig. A.
1. Unscrew the nut C.
2. Rotate the rearview mirror rod to the proper
position, and adjust the mirror position.
3. Fasten the nut C.
Notes
Adjust the right rearview mirror in the
same way.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 61
P
CO
Engine oil
Check of engine oil level
Recommended engine oil

Model: API SE, SF or SG
API SH, SJ or SL, JASO MA, MA1 or MA2
Viscosity: SAE 10W-40
Capacity: 2.8 L (during oil change)
3.0 L (during disassembly)
Notes
○ It is forbidden to add any chemical additive
in engine oil! The engine oil that meets the
above requirement is carefully prepared,
which can adequately lubricate the engine
and clutch.
○ Make corresponding changes according to
the atmospheric conditions of specific areas,
although it is recommended to use the engine
oil with viscosity of 10W-40 in most cases。
Parking: Park the motorcycle on a horizontal ground.

Notes
During parking, the motorcycle body
should be in a vertical position on the flat.
Start:
View the oil lens at B after the motorcycle body is in a o @
vertical position, the engine is running at idling speed for
c nic
2-3min, and then stops for 2-3min, as shown in Fig. A. e
Warning
e p.t
Please do not start the engine if the oil
- d
level is less than the lowest value (L).
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 62
P
CO
Engine oil
Check of engine oil level
Check
Engine oil level
Add the recommended engine oil to make the oil
level lay between the lowest value (L) and the
highest value (H) if it is less than the lowest value
(L).
Engine oil adding:

1. Shut down the engine, and unscrew the oil cover
B.
2. Pour enough proper engine oil into the place
between “H” and “L”, as shown in Fig. B.
3. Turn the oil cover back to its original position.
4.
Note:
When checking the engine oil level,
restart the engine to preheat it for several
minutes, and then shut it down. Wait for a
while to have enough time for the engine oil
to flow down.
Important:
 Since engine oil also lubricates the clutch, the engine oil in wrong types or containing additives may cause o @
clutch slipping. Therefore, we recommend you to use the engine oil without any chemical additive or other
c nic
types of engine oil not listed in the list of engine technical specification. e
 People or pets that swallow the engine oil will be poisoned. In case of swallowing, send the poisoned people
e p.t
or pets to the hospital; do not force them to vomit to prevent the items from being inhaled. The short
- d
exposure to engine oil may cause skin irritation.
ins
 Put the engine oil beyond reach of children and pets.
r t
Ma
 Please wear long-sleeved clothes and waterproof gloves every time adding the engine oil.
 Please flush the skin that is exposed to the engine oil with soap or water.
 Please recycle or properly handle the used engine oil.
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 63
P
CO
Engine oil
Replacement of engine oil
Start: engine, and preheat it for several

minutes before shutdown.
Take off: oil pan drain plug.
Place: an appropriate container under the

magnetic bolt A to collect the engine oil, as
shown in Fig. A.
Disassemble: magnetic bolt A (with the

copper gasket).
Drain: engine oil in the crankcase.
Note:
Replace: sealing gasket of magnetic bolt.
Assemble
New sealing gasket
Magnetic bolt
Fasten the magnetic bolt according to the following torque.
o @
Torque: 22N*m
c nic
e
p.t
Filling: the specified amount of recommended
engine oil to crankcase filling port.
de
Assemble: oil cover B, as shown in Fig. B. s -
r tin
Start: engine.
Ma
Preheat the engine for several minutes before
d re
shutdown.
xan
Note:
A le
Ensure that the oil level is between the symbols “H”
A -
and “L” on the oil lens, as shown in Fig. B.
Add the engine oil if needed. alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 64
P
CO
Engine oil filter
Replacement of engine oil filter
Replacement of engine oil filter

● Drain the engine oil (see “Replacement of engine oil”).
● Remove the engine oil filter [A] with the oil filter
wrench.
Special tool-engine oil filter wrench

● Change the engine oil filter into a new one.
● Tighten the engine oil filter with the engine oil filter
wrench.
Tightening torque:
Locking torque of engine oil filter:
Torque: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 ft·lb)
Note:
○ Please do not tighten the engine oil filter manually, because it cannot reach the specified locking torque.
● Pour the engine oil in the specified type according to the specified amount (see “Replacement of engine oil”).
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 65
P
CO
Coolant
Coolant liquid level check
Parking: Park the motorcycle on a flat ground.
Note:
During parking, the motorcycle body should be in a
vertical position on the flat.
Remarks
○ Check the liquid level during engine cooling (at
room temperature or ambient temperature).
● Place the motorcycle vertically (do not use the
single stay), and check the coolant liquid level in the
auxiliary radiator [A], as shown in Fig. A.
★ Unscrew the cover of auxiliary radiator, and add
the coolant until the liquid level reaches the liquid
level “H” [C] if the coolant liquid level is less than
the liquid level “L” [B].
“L”: Lowest level
“H”: Highest level
Notes
When adding the coolant, add the specified
mixture of coolant and soft water. Adding water
separately will dilute the coolant and reduce its
anticorrosive property. The diluted coolant may
corrode aluminum engine parts. It is allowed to
add soft water separately in case of emergency,
but it is required to use the proper ratio again o @
within a few days.
c nic
If it is required to frequently add the coolant e
or completely dry the auxiliary radiator, leak
e p.t
problems may exist in the cooling system. Check
- d
whether the cooling system leaks, since the
ins
coolant may corrode the painted surface.
r t
Ma
Immediately flush with water if the frame,
engine, wheel or other painted parts are spattered
with the coolant.
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 66
P
CO
Radiator pipe
Check of radiator pipe
Check: radiator pipe (coolant leakage, radiator pipe
damage and installation of radiator pipe)
Warning:
If the radiator pipe is improperly repaired, high
pressure from water pipe will cause coolant leakage
[A] or water pipe crack.
Check:
Check whether the soft hose is corroded. After the
soft hose is squeezed, it is shown that it is corroded if
it becomes hard, fragile, soft or swelling.
Note:
If any wear, crack [B] or expansion [C] is found, the soft pipe must be replaced.
Check:
Check whether the soft pipe is firmly linked, and the clight is properly tightened.
Tightening torque of radiator (water) pipe fastening screw: 2.0 N·m (0.20 kgf·m, 18 in·lb).
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 67
P
CO
Spark plug
Disassembly of spark plug
The following steps are applicable to all the spark plugs.
Warning:
The engine must be cooled during check and
replacement of spark plug.
Disassembly:
Follow the instructions of the abovementioned chapters
“Air filter” and “Disassembly / assembly of air filter”
during disassembly of air filter.
Important:
Before disassembly of spark plug, wipe out the dust
from cylinder cover with a stream of compressed air to
prevent the dust from falling into the cylinder.
Disassemble:
Screw (6)
Support (8)
Rubber gasket (2)
O-ring (3)
Disconnection:
Disconnect the connector (X) from the coil (29), as
shown in Fig. A.
o @
nic
Take out: coil (29)
ec
p.t
Disassemble: spark plug (30) below, as shown in Fig. B.
Note: de
s -
During disassembly of spark plug, do not make impurities enter the engine through the spark plug hole.
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 68
P
CO
Spark plug
Spark plug check
The following steps are applicable to all spark plugs.
Check the model of spark plug.
Check:
1. Replace the spark plug if there is any damage /
wear on the electrode (A), as shown in Fig. C.
2. Insulated part (B), as shown in Fig. C.
If the color is abnormal,
Replace the spark plug.
The normal color is medium-light brown.
Spark plug clearance

Check:
Check spark plug clearance.
Clearance: 0.6-0.7mm
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 69
P
CO
Spark plug
Spark plug check
The following table contains typical damages on spark plug due to different causes and their solutions.
Overheated spark
Polluted spark plug
plug
Cause Solution Cause Solution

Over-rich fuel mixture Ignition advance Adjust ignition
Vaporization setting error Adjust fuel / timing.
vaporization Inadequate air / fuel mixing
systems. Adjust air / fuel
Electrical failure ratio.
Poor coil connection Lack of coolant / or lubricating
Check coil oil Add coolant and / or
Special cycling connection and lubricating oil.
Long-term low speed relevant impedance Too low torque of spark plug Fasten it to the
proper torque.
Too cold spark plug The speed of Use of hot spark plug Use colder spark
motorcycle needs to plug as specified.
be 80km/h.
Use hotter spark
plug as specified.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 70
P
CO
Spark plug
Assembly of spark plug
The following steps are applicable to all spark plugs.
Warning: Lubricate the spark plug thread with

copper-based grease.
Note: Before assembly of spark plug, clean the parts

and the side contacting with the gasket.
Assembly:
Assemble the spark plug on the cylinder head. At first,
put the spark plug in the spark plug socket by hand
and tighten it, and then fasten it with the spark plug
wrench to the proper torque.
Torque: 12N*m
Note:
The spark plug should not be too tight or threads are staggered to prevent the threads on cylinder cover from being
damaged.
During assembly of spark plug, do not make impurities enter the engine through the spark plug hole.
Assemble:
Coil (29) o @
Rubber end (2) and O-ring gasket, as shown in Fig. D.
c nic
e
p.t
Connect:
Coil connector
de
Assemble: s -
r tin
Ma
Coil (6)
Support (8)
Fasten them to the proper torque.
d re
xan
Torque: 8N*m
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 71
P
CO
Valve clearance
Check of valve clearance
Note:
○Valve clearance can only be checked and adjusted when the engine has cooled down (indoor temperature).
Disassembly:
Disassemble cylinder cover of the engine (see
“engine/cylinder head cover” section of Chapter V)
Check:
● Measure the valve clearance between the cam and
the valve tappet with thickness gauge.
Valve clearance
Standards:
Exhaust valve: 0.19∼ 0.25 mm (0.0075 ∼ 0.0099
in.)
Intake valve: 0.13 ∼ 0.19 mm (0.0051∼ 0.0075 in.)
Note:
○ Insert the thickness gauge on the valve tappet
horizontally.
Suitable: [A]
Unsuitable: [B]
Feeler gauge: [C]
Insert horizontally: [D]
Cam: [E]
Valve tappet: [F] o @
Clipping the front end of feeler gauge on the valve
c nic
tappet is the wrong way: [G]
e
★ If the valve clearance is not within the specified range, record the valve clearance first, and then adjust the
e p.t
clearance.
- d
Assembly:
ins
r t
Ma
Assembly should be conducted in the reverse sequence of disassembly (see “engine/cylinder head cover” section
of Chapter V)
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 72
P
CO
Valve clearance
Adjustment of valve clearance

●In order to change the valve clearance, remove the
camshaft chain tensioner, camshaft and valve tappet.
Replace the currently used valve shim with valve
shim of different thickness.
Note:
○To install the valve tappet and valve shim to the
original position, mark their locations before
removing them.
○ In addition to standard valve shims in the valve clearance adjustment table, the following valve shims can also
be used.
Adjustment of valve shims:
Thickness Thickness
1.325mm 1.825mm
1.375mm 1.875mm
1.425mm 1.925mm
1.475mm 1.975mm
1.525mm 2.025mm
1.575mm 2.075mm
1.625mm 2.125mm
1.675mm 2.175mm
1.725mm 2.225mm
1.775mm 2.275mm
o @
Check:
c nic
e
p.t
●Clean the dust or grease on the valve shims.
● Measure the thickness of the removed valve shim
de
[A].
s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 73
P
CO
Valve clearance
Valve clearance adjustment table of exhaust valve

Examples of the current valve shims
Thickness (mm) 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.00～0.02 — — — — — 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05
0.03～0.06 — — — — 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1
0.07～0.10 — — — 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15
0.11～0.14 — — 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2
0.15～0.18 — 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25
Examples of measured values (mm) of valve clearance
0.19～0.25 valve clearance/adjustment is unnecessary

0.26～0.30 1.35 1.4 1.45 1.5 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.31～0.35 1.4 1.45 1.5 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.36～0.40 1.45 1.5 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.41～0.45 1.5 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.46～0.50 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.51～0.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.56～0.60 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.61～0.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.66～0.70 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.71～0.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.76～0.80 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.81～0.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.86～0.90 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.91～0.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.96～1.00 2.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
1.01～1.05 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3 Thickness (mm) of valve shims to be installed
1.06～1.10 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
1.11～1.15 2.2 2.25 2.3
1.16～1.20 2.25 2.3
1.21～1.25 2.3
1. Measure the valve clearance (engine has cooled down).

2. Check the size of the current valve shims.
o @
nic
3. The valve clearance in vertical column corresponds to size of the current valve shim in horizontal column.
4. The values in the crossing blank spaces of vertical and horizontal columns are specified valves of shim size.
ec
p.t
When size of the valve shim is equal to the value in the blank space, size of the valve clearance is suitable.
Example: Thickness of the current valve shim is 1.60 mm.
The measured valve clearance is 0.33 mm. de
Replace the 1.60 mm gasket with 1.70 mm valve shim. s -
5. Re-measure the valve clearance, and re-adjust it if necessary.
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 74
P
CO
Valve clearance
Valve clearance adjustment table of exhaust valve

Examples of the current valve shims
Thickness (mm) 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.00～0.04 — — — 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215
0.05～0.08 — — 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2
0.09～0.12 — 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25
0.13～0.19 valve clearance/adjustment is unnecessary
0.20～0.24 1.35 1.4 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
Examples of measured values (mm) of valve clearance
0.25～0.29 1.4 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.301～0.34 1.45 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.35～0.39 15 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.40～0.44 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.45～0.49 1.6 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.50～0.54 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.55～0.59 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.60～0.64 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.65～0.69 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.70～0.74 1.85 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.75～0.79 1.9 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.80～0.84 1.95 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.85～0.89 2.0 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
0.90～0.94 2.05 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
Thickness (mm) of valve shims to be installed
0.95～0.99 2.1 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
1.00～1.04 215 2.2 2.25 2.3
1.05～1.09 2.2 2.25 2.3
1.10～1.14 2.25 2.3
1.15～1.19 2.3
1. Measure the valve clearance (engine has cooled down).

2. Check the size of the current valve shims.
3. The valve clearance in vertical column corresponds to size of the current valve shim in horizontal column.
o @
nic
4. The values in the crossing blank spaces of vertical and horizontal columns are specified valves of shim size.
When size of the valve shim is equal to the value in the blank space, size of the valve clearance is suitable.
ec
p.t
Example: Thickness of the current valve shim is 1.85 mm.
The measured valve clearance is 0.36 mm.
de
Replace the1.85 mm gasket with 2.05 mm valve shim.
5. Re-measure the valve clearance, and re-adjust it if necessary. s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 75
P
CO
Brake adjustment
Adjustment of front hydraulic brake
Adjustment
Position of the brake handle is shown in Fig. A
(“X” is the distance between the throttle and the
brake handle)
Note:
Push the brake handle forward, offset thrust of the
spring, at the same time, rotate the ring nut “y”, and
adjust its position clockwise or counterclockwise
until the brake handle is in the suitable position.
Position of the ring

Distance
nut
Away from the
1Position 1
handle
Position 4 Close to the handle
Warning:
If the brake handle feels soft when you hold it, there may be air in the brake system. Before using the motorcycle,
it is necessary to discharge air in the brake circuit. Air in brake circuit will reduce the brake performance, and may
even make the vehicle become out of control, and cause accidents. So, check the system and, if necessary, exhaust
air in the brake circuit.
Important:
o @
nic
After adjusting position of the brake handle, make sure that there is no braking drag.
ec
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 76
P
CO
Brake adjustment
Adjustment of rear hydraulic brake
Adjustment:
Adjust the position of the brake pedal with nuts and
ejector rob pin, as shown in Fig. A
Loosen the locknut B
Unscrew the ejector rob pin A
Position of the Position of the brake

ejector rob pin pedal
Clockwise The pedal goes up
The pedal goes
Anticlockwise down
Warning:
If the brake handle feels soft when you hold it, there may be air in the brake system. Before using the motorcycle,
it is necessary to discharge air in the brake circuit. Air in brake circuit will reduce the brake performance, and may
even cause the vehicle become out of control, and cause accidents. So, check the system and, if necessary, exhaust
air in the brake circuit.
Important: o @
After adjusting position of the brake pedal, make sure that there is no braking drag.
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 77
P
CO
Check of brake fluid
Check of front brake fluid level/filling
Parking: Park the vehicle on flat ground
NOTE: Prop the motorcycle up with parking rack and

make sure it is vertical
Check: the brake fluid level

If the brake fluid is below the minimum mark oil lens A
in Figure A, add the recommended brake fluid until it
reaches the right liquid level
Liquid adding procedure:

When parking the motorcycle on flat ground, unscrew
the oil brake fluid cylinder cover B from the brake pump, as shown in Fig. A
Check:
Check the brake fluid cylinder diaphragm on the cover.
If there is any damage/wear, replace the brake fluid
cylinder diaphragm
Important:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces or plastic parts.
Thus, wrap the pump with absorbent paper, and clean up
the spilled brake fluid immediately.
Add liquid, until the liquid level is above the
observation hole of the pump, as shown in Fig. C o @
Warning c nic
e
Use only the specified brake fluid. Other brake fluids may
e p.t
cause deterioration of the rubber gasket, leakage, and
improper operation of the braking system. - d
Use the same brake fluid in the system when adding brake ins
r t
Ma
fluid. Different brake fluid mixture may cause adverse
chemical reactions, which can lead to degradation of the
brake system.
d re
Be careful not to let water flow into the oil cup when
adding brake fluid. Water will significantly reduce the xan
boiling point of the brake fluid and will produce vapor
A le
-
bubbles when it is heated, which will cause degradation of the brake system.
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 78
P
CO
Check of front brake fluid level/filling
Replacement of brake fluid:
1. Place the master cylinder horizontally, and remove
brake fluid cylinder cover.
2. Mount a tube on the front end of the oil drain
screw, and prepare a drip pan at the front end of the
tube, as shown in Fig. B
3. Loosen the oil drain screw.
4. Repeat barking for several times until the oil
discharge screw no longer discharges brake fluid.
5. Tighten the oil drain screw.
6. Inject brake fluid until it is above the lower limit.
7. Pull the brake handle, and fill the tube with brake
fluid.
8. Operate the brake handle slowly, until bubbles no
longer come out of holes in the brake cylinder and
the brake handle feels powerful.
9. Release air.
10. After adjustment is completed, conduct assembly
in the reverse sequence of disassembly.
Note:
Add brake fluid at the same time. The brake fluid should not fall below the lower limit.
Tighten the drain screw to the following torque:
Torque: 6N*m
o @
Sequence of releasing air
c nic
e
p.t
1. Remove the brake fluid cylinder cover.
2. Remove the brake fluid cylinder diaphragm.
de
3. Mount a tube on the front end of the oil drain screw, and prepare a drip pan at the front end of the tube.
4. After braking for several times, seize the brake handle, loosen the oil drain screw about 1/2 circle, and tighten it s -
rapidly. r tin
5. Repeat the above action until bubbles has been completely discharged out of the oil drain screw.
Ma
6. Install the brake fluid cylinder diaphragm
7. Install the brake fluid cylinder cover d re
Note: xan
Do not loosen the brake handle before re-tightening the oil drain screw.
A le
Note: A -
Add brake fluid at the same time. The brake fluid should not fall belowltheSlower limit.
g a
rt u
P o
t o r
M o
o t o
lt i m
M u
-
PY 79
CO
Check of front brake fluid level/add brake liquid
Parking: Park the vehicle on flat ground
NOTE: Prop the motorcycle up with parking rack

and make sure it is vertical
Check: the brake fluid level

If the brake fluid is below the minimum mark oil lens
A in Figure A, add the recommended brake fluid
until it reaches the right liquid level
Important:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces or plastic
parts. Thus, wrap the pump with absorbent paper, and
clean up the spilled brake fluid immediately.
Liquid adding procedure:

When parking the motorcycle on flat ground,
unscrew the oil cup cap B from the oil cup, as shown
in Fig. B
Check:
Check the oil cup sealing gasket at C. If there is any
damage/wear, replace the oil cup sealing gasket, as
shown in Fig. C
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 80
P
CO
Add liquid, until it is above lower limit.
Warning
Use only the specified brake fluid. Other brake fluids
may cause deterioration of the rubber gasket, leakage,
and improper operation of the braking system.
Use the same brake fluid in the system when adding
brake fluid. Different brake fluid mixture may cause
adverse chemical reactions, which can lead to
degradation of the brake system.
Be careful not to let water flow into the oil cup when
adding brake fluid. Water will significantly reduce the
boiling point of the brake fluid and will produce vapor
bubbles when it is heated, which will cause degradation of the brake system.
Sequence of releasing air
1. Remove the oil cup cap.
2. Remove the oil cup sealing gasket.
3. Mount a tube on the front end of the oil drain
screw D, and prepare a drip pan at the front end
of the tube.
4. Disassemble bolt E fastening outside rear brake
caliper to lift the brake cylinder
5. After braking for several times, press on the brake
pedal, loosen the oil drain screw about 1/2 circle,
and tighten it rapidly.
6. Repeat the above action until bubbles has been o @
completely discharged out of the oil drain screw.
c nic
7. Install the oil cup sealing gasket. e
8. Install the oil cup cap.
e p.t
Note:
- d
Do not loosen the brake pedal before re-tightening the oil drain screw.
ins
Note: r t
Add brake fluid at the same time. The brake fluid should not fall below the lower limit. Ma
d re
xan
Torque 6N*m
A le
torque: A -
Upon completion of the liquid adding procedure, lower the caliper, and tighten fastening bolt D to the following
a lS
Torque 30N*m ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 81
P
CO
Replacement of brake fluid:

1. Place the oil cup horizontally, and remove the oil cup cap.
2. Mount a tube on the front end of the oil drain screw, and prepare a drip pan at the front end of the tube.
3. Loosen the oil drain screw.
4. Repeat barking for several times until the oil discharge screw no longer discharges brake fluid.
5. Tighten the oil drain screw.
6. Inject brake fluid until it is above the lower limit.
7. Press on the brake pedal, and fill the tube with brake fluid.
8. Operate the brake handle slowly, until bubbles no longer come out of holes in the brake cylinder and the brake
handle feels powerful.
9. Release air.
10. After adjustment is completed, conduct assembly in the reverse sequence of disassembly.
Note:
Add brake fluid at the same time. The brake fluid should not fall below the lower limit.
Torque 6N*m
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 82
P
CO
Check of brake shoes
Check of front and rear brake shoes
The following procedures are applicable to all brake shoes.
Check:
Front brake shoe/rear brake shoe
Wear limit of front and rear brake shoes
If the wear limit has been reached, replace the brake
in pairs
Brake shoe Standard Wear limit

Front shake shoe 7.8mm 3.8mm
Rear shake shoe 7.0mm 3.7mm
Note:
For replacing brake shoes, see “Front brake shoe / rear brake shoe” “Front and rear brake / rear brake shoe” in the
chapter “Motorcycle”.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 83
P
CO
Check of brake hoses
Check of brake hoses
The following procedures are applicable to all brake
hose and brake hose clights.
Check:
Front /rear brake hose
If there are any signs of cracks / wear or damage,

please replace it.
Check:
Clight A of front brake hose, shown in Fig. A. If the

front brake hose is loosened, tighten the clighting
screw.
Check
Clight A of rear brake hose, shown in Fig. B. If the
front brake hose is loosened, tighten it using cable
clight.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 84
P
CO
Adjustment of drive chain
Note: When the engine is running, do not check or

adjust drive chain.
Note: When checking drive chain, conduct the

operations at the point which looks loosest.
Warning: If the drive chain is too tight, overload
may be caused to engine or other key parts; if the

drive chain is too loose, it may fall and damage lifter
or cause an accident. We recommend keeping the
chain sag within the specified range.
Parking: Park the motorcycle on flat ground.
Warning: Support the motorcycle using parking
rack, so as to avoid tipping and lift the rear wheel.

Rotate the rear wheel several times to find the
position where the drive chain is loosest.
Check: If the sag of drive chain is not within the
specified value, adjust it. Fig. A
o @
nic
Sag of drive chain 10-20mm
ec
p.t
Adjustment: Tension of drive chain. Fig. B
1. Loosen the rear wheel shaft.
de
2. Loosen lock nut using open-ended wrench.
s -
3. Screw into or out the adjusting bolt, until the specified slackness has been reached.
4. Tighten the lock nut. r tin
5. Fasten the rear wheel shaft. Ma
Fasten the rear wheel shaft according to the following torque.
d re
xan
Torque 120N*m
A le
Screw into The slackness increases
A -
Screw out The slackness decreases
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 85
P
CO
Important:
If the drive chain slackness is too small, overload may
be caused to engine and other main parts and chain
may skid or break. To prevent these phenomena, the
chain slackness must be kept within the specified
range.
Note:
If the scale of right chain adjusting block is at the
Left Right
eighth slot E of the swing arm (count backwards), and
then the scale of left chain adjusting block is at the eighth slot D of the swing arm (count backwards). Fig. C
Lubrication of drive chain
Important:
Drive chain consists of many interacting chain rollers.
Chain needs proper maintenance to prevent rapid deterioration.
Therefore, we suggest maintaining the drive chain, especially when using it in the places with a lot of dust.
This motorcycle is equipped with drive, and rubber O-ring is installed between chain plate and roller. The drive
chain should not be cleaned using steam nozzle or high pressure water gun, corrosive solvent, or brush with too
stiff bristles, to avoid damaging the rubber O-ring.
We suggest using only the recommended methods to clean, dry and lubricate the drive chain, or conduct o @
lubrication using other lubricating oils specially designed for the chains with O-rings.
c nic
e
Note:
e p.t
After lubricating the drive chain, only a thin layer of lubricating oil is attached to the entire chain. Attention
- d
should be paid to not touching the surrounding parts, especially pneumatic tools.
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 86
P
CO
Check and adjustment of steering gear
Parking: Park the motorcycle on flat ground
Note:
Support the motorcycle using suitable bracket; the
front wheel can be lifted easily.
Check: Steering gear

Hold the end of faucet handle, gently swing the front
fork, and adjust the direction if there is any sticking
/catching point. Fig. A
Disassembly: Handle (see special section)
Disassembly: Upper holder block B, Fig. B
Loosening: Fasten the screw A of upper

connecting plate, Fig. B
o @
nic
Disassembly:
Remove the fastening screw G using special tool F,
ec
Fig. C
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 87
P
CO
Adjustment:
Faucet handle
1. Remove lock nut D from pillar, and loosen gland
nut E. Fig. D
Tighten gland nut E using the relevant wrench
Tighten gland nut E to reach the following value,
Torque 30～35N*m
2. Rotate the handlebar to left and right for 2-3 times, and ensure that there is no catching and the bearing race
is not loose;
3. Loosen the gland nut by 1/4 turn and then tighten it, and tighten gland nut E using the relevant wrench.
Tighten gland nut E to reach the following value,
Torque 20～24N*m
4. Tighten lock nut D using special tools,
o @
c nic
e
Tighten lock nut D to reach the following torque
e p.t
- d
ins
Torque 60N*m r t
Warning:
Ma
d re
Do not tighten lock nut D excessively
xan
Check:
A le
-
Ensure that the pillar is not loose, and rotate the front fork to the left and right to reach the end of stroke to ensure
A
upper and lower steering bearings. a lS
that there is no blocking point. If there is any blocking point, disassemble the connecting plate parts, and check the
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 88
P
CO
Assembly:
Conduct assembly in inverse order to disassembly.
Recheck: Steering gear

Hold the end of the pipe with faucet handle, rotate it to the left and right, repeat the operations to adjust the
steering gear if there is any sticking /catching point.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 89
P
CO
Check of front fork
Check
Parking: Park the motorcycle at flat ground.
Note: Support the motorcycle correctly, to avoid

tipping.
Check
Outer cylinder of shock absorber A, Fig. A
Outer cylinder of shock absorber B, Fig. A
If there is any damage, please replace
Oil seal
If there is any leakage, please replace
Keeping: The motorcycle is vertical
Enabling: Front brake
Check:
Front fork operation
Push down firmly on the handle a few times to ensure
that the front fork can quickly slip back into place.
Fig. B
If it cannot move smoothly, please repair it
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 90
P
CO
Check of rear shock absorber
Adjustment of rear shock absorber
Note: Support the motorcycle correctly, to avoid

tipping.
Adjustment: Adjust the preload of spring, Fig. A

The rear shock absorber is equipped with adjusting
O-ring nut A and return O-ring nut D for spring
preload
1. Loosen the above-mentioned lock O-ring nut D using shock absorber O-ring nut adjusting tool
2. Loosen the above-mentioned lock O-ring nut A using shock absorber O-ring nut adjusting tool, to adjust the
rear shock absorber to appropriate hardness.
 Rotate the adjusting O-ring nut A in the direction of B to increase the preload of spring, to make the rear
shock absorber become too hard.
 Rotate the adjusting O-ring nut A in the direction of C to reduce the preload of spring, to make the rear
shock absorber become too soft.
3. Upon completion of adjustment, tighten return O-ring nut D using shock absorber O-ring nut adjusting tool.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 91
P
CO
Check of front and rear tyres
Check
The following procedures are applicable to front and rear tyres.
Check
Adjust if the tyre pressure is not within the specified
value, Fig. A.
Warning:
When checking and adjusting tyre pressure, the wheel
must be at room temperature.
Tyre pressure and suspension should be adjusted
according to the total weight (including luggage, rider,
passenger and accessories), and assumed riding speed
should also be considered.
Tyres may be damaged when overloaded during riding,
causing the risk of accidents and injuries.
In any case, overload should be avoided.
Cold tyre pressure Front Rear
Load below 0-90Kg * 230kPa 250kPa
100Kg to the maximum 240kPa 260kPa
load*
Load includes luggage, rider, passenger and
accessories.
Specifications of front tyre 120/70-17 M/C

Specifications of rear tyre 160/60-17 M/C
Warning: It is very dangerous when the tread
pattern reaches the wear limit during riding.
If the tread reaches the wear limit, replace the tyre
immediately.
o @
Check: Tyre surface, Fig. B
c nic
e
Tire damage / wear → Replace
e p.t
- d
Minimum depth of tread pattern: 1mm
ins
r t
A. Depth of tread pattern
B. Sidewall Ma
C. Wear sign
d re
Warning:
x an
motorcycle at the speed of above 100Km/h only after riding it for 100km at the speedA lofebelow 100Km/h and
If the tyre is new, its road holding is not as good as that when slightly worn. Therefore, we suggest riding the
resulting in slight wear to tyre.

A -
a lS
r t ug
P o
t o r
M o
o to
u ltim
- M
PY 92
CO
Check and battery charging
Battery
Warning:
Battery will produce the explosive gas comprising hydrogen. Battery contains electrolyte composed of sulfuric
acid which is poisonous and highly corrosive substance. Therefore, the following precautions are required:
 When handling batteries or working on the side, please wear goggles.

 Battery must be charged at the appropriate place with good ventilation.
 Battery must be far away from fire, sparks or open flames (e.g., welding equipment, lighted cigarettes,
etc.).
 When charging or handling batteries, do not smoke.
 Batteries and electrolyte should be placed out of reach of children.
 Any parts of the body do not touch the electrolyte, because it may cause severe burns or cause
permanent eye damage.
Give first aid treatment if accidentally exposed:
Detoxification methods (external
contacts):
Skin: Wash with water
Eyes: Wash with plenty of water for 15 minutes and
seek immediate medical attention.
Detoxification methods (internal):

Drink plenty of water or milk, and then milk
containing magnesium oxide, egg juice or vegetable
oil, and seek immediate medical attention.
Important:
Battery is sealed. Do not disassemble sealed cover
o @
nic
under any circumstances, because this will damage
the balance between the batteries and affect battery
ec
p.t
performance.
The charging time, amperage and voltage of this
battery is different from that of traditional batteries. de
If the battery is overcharged, the electrolyte level will
s -
be relatively lowered. Therefore, please be very
r tin
Ma
careful when charging the battery.
Note: Inspect the electric quantity through
measuring the density of electrolyte.
d re
Therefore, check battery charging through measuring
the voltage on the endpoint of battery. xan
Disassembly: A le
Open the seat cushion using key, Fig. A
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 93
P
CO
Battery
Disconnection: Disconnect the cable from the end of cable, Fig. B
Important: First disconnect the negative cable
from battery A, and then disconnect the positive
cable B. Fig. B
Disconnection:
Battery
Disassemble the four screws C which are used to
tighten the lock bracket of battery, and then
disassemble battery D
Check: Battery voltage
Connect a multimeter to the endpoint of battery, Fig.
C
As shown in the following chart in Figure D, check battery charging
Note: Detect battery charging through measuring
the voltage in the loop (voltage when disconnecting
the positive terminal). If the open-circuit voltage is
equal to or exceeds 12.8V, charging is not required.
Example:
Open-circuit voltage = 12.0V
Charging time = 6.5 hours
Battery charge amount = 20 -30%
Charging
Battery (see the picture describing suitable charging
method)
Important: Do not use quick charging for battery.
Warning:
o @
Do not disassemble the cover which is used to seal Relationship between open-circuit
nic
Open-circuit voltage (V)
batteries. voltage and charging time at 20 degrees

ec
Do not use quick chargers, because they will send
high ampere current to battery at a very high speed; e p.t
this may cause overheating and damage to batteries.
- d
ins
If the charging current of battery cannot be adjusted,
r t
Ma
be careful not to overcharge Charging time (hour)
These values change with temperature variation, battery plate
Batteries should be disassembled from motorcycle
re
and electrolyte level
when charging. (If batteries can be charged on the
d
motorcycle, disconnect the negative cable from battery terminal)
xan
To reduce the possibility of generating sparks, connect the battery charger to power only l
A e connecting cable to
after
battery.
A -
a lS
r t ug
P o
t o r
M o
o to
u ltim
- M
PY 94
CO
Battery
Cut off the power before disassembling clight from

battery terminal.
Ensure that the clight at battery charger cable has
fully contacted with battery terminal, and here is no
short circuit. The corroded endpoint will generate
heat in the contact area, and sparks will be produced room
temperature
at invalid endpoint.
If battery is overheated during charging, please battery charging state

immediately disconnect charger and fully cooling
the battery before continuing to charge. Overheated battery will explode!
Recharge
As shown in Fig. F, the voltage is table after
charging the open-circuit voltage of battery for 30
minutes and completing charging, or before

measuring open-circuit voltage.
Test open-circuit voltage
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 95
P
CO
Battery
Charging method: use the charger with variable current (voltage)
Battery charging
Note:
Ammeter
Measure the open-circuit voltage of battery 30 minutes after completing
charging
Set the charging voltage to 16-17V (low setting may cause insufficient
charging, while high setting may cause overload of battery)
Connect one battery charger and one ammeter to battery, and then start
charging
Before charging, measure

open-circuit voltage
Connect one battery charger and one

ammeter to battery, and then start
charging
Check whether the voltage is higher

than the standard value marked on the
battery
Set the charging voltage to be 20-24V

by setting the voltage of charger
o @
nic
Set the voltage, and thus make the Monitor the ammeter for 3 to 5
current is equal to standard charging minutes, confirm whether the
standard charging current has been ec
p.t
amount
reached
de
Set time based on the charging time
suitable for open-circuit voltage. Refer
If battery does not exceed the
standard charging current after 5 s -
to the descriptions provided with minutes, replace the battery
r tin
Ma
battery
If the charging time is more than five hours, it is recommended to check the
d re
charging current after five hours. If amperage changes, set again the voltage
to obtain the standard charging current.
xan
A le
-
Measure the open-circuit voltage of battery 30 minutes after stopping
A
lS
charging
12.8V or higher> charging is completed
12.7V or lower> must be charged g a
rt u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 96
P
CO
Battery
Charging method: Use the charger with variable current (voltage)
Note:
Measure the voltage of battery 30 minutes after completing charging
Set the maximum charging time to be 20 hours
Note:
To ensure the maximum performance and durability of battery, we recommend using electronic charger which can
provide stable charging voltage and current, and thus achieve the desired charging technology of battery
Before charging, measure

open-circuit voltage
Connect one battery charger and one ammeter

to battery, and then start charging
Check whether the voltage is higher than

the standard value marked on the battery
N
o @
This kind of charger cannot be c nic
e
Charge the battery, until the used to charge these batteries. It is
recommended to use chargers
e p.t
charging voltage reaches 15V with variable voltage.
- d
ins
r t
Measure the open-circuit voltage of battery 30 minutes after stopping
Ma
charging
d re
12.8V or higher> charging is completed
12.7V or lower> must be charged
xan
Lower than 12.0V > replace battery
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 97
P
CO
Battery
Disassembly:
Battery
Tighten 4 screws C, and fasten battery rack.
Connection: Connect cable to the battery
terminal
Important: First connect the positive cable B of
battery D, and then negative cable A, Fig. G
Check: Battery terminal

If it is dirty, remove the dirt using a metal brush
Re-tighten if there is any loosened connector.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 98
P
CO
Check of fuse
Fuse
丝 The following procedures are applicable to all
fuses.
Important: To prevent short circuit, the fuse is
always set to OFF to close the main switch.

Open the seat cushion using key, Fig. A
Open fuse box B, Fig. B
Check: Fuse
Connect a multimeter to fuse and check whether it is o @
in good condition.
c nic
e
Note: Set the selection key to the function of ohm
e p.t
If the reading of multimeter is “∞”, replace fuse.
- d
Replacement: Burned-out fuse
ins
r t
Ma
Rotate the main switch to OFF
Assemble a new fuse, and ensure the correction of

d re
amperage
Turn on the switch, ensure the working of circuit xan
If fuse is immediately burned out, check power circuit.
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 99
P
CO
Check of fuse
Fuse
Warning:
Do not use the fuse whose amperage is not specified. The makeshift fuse or the one with mistaken amperage may
cause irreversible damages to electrical system, affect the normal working of lights and ignition, and even result in
fire.
Lines of fuse
Reference drawing C
A. Fuel pump: 15A (blue)
B. Fan: 15A (blue)
C. ECU: 15A (blue)
D. Empty
E. Power lock: 10A (red)
F. Empty
G. Spare fuse 10A (red)
H. Spare fuse 15A (blue)
I. Spare fuse 15A (blue)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 100
P
CO
Replacement of headlight bulb
The following procedures are applicable to
headlight.
Disassembly:
Disassemble headlight support fastening bolt (1).
Turn the combination of headlight and fairing.

Disassemble self-tapping screw (2)
Take down the rear decorative plate of fairing
o @
Disassemble self-tapping screw (3)
c nic
Take down headlight dust cover.
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 101
P
CO
Unplug the socket connector of headlight (4), taken
down socket seat, release clight spring and taken
down bulb.
In the following figure, 4 is low-beam light and 5 is

high-beam light. Respectively disassemble the power
cord socket, bulb bayonet-socket fixing screw and
bulb bayonet-socket, and finally taken down the
damaged bulb.
Align the position of bulb bayonet socket, replace it

with a new light.
Bulb type: H7 (12V / 55W)
* Note
When the light is on and it is hot at this time, do not touch it before it cools down.
Assembly:
Install the headlight in inverse order to disassembly.
Note:
Avoid directly touching the glass part of bulb and do not make it oily; otherwise, the transparency, service life and
luminous flux of bulb will be affected.
If it is stained with oil, completely wipe it with a damp cloth with alcohol or other solvents.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 102
P
CO
Adjustment of headlight
Adjustment of headlight
Correctly adjust the beam of headlight according to
the following steps:
Park the motorcycle at the place which is about 10 m
away from the upright wall, and park it at perfectly
flat surface. Fig. A
Ride in the motorcycle and sit in the position of rider.
Ensure the highest point of beam; if the beam falls on
the wall, make it 1/10 lower than the horizontal axis of
headlight.
If the beam does not fall within these ranges, make
adjustment and keep it at the correct position.
Adjustment:
Use the adjusting screw A at the back of light to
adjust the beam of headlight, Fig. B
Rotary screw at upper left corner

Rotate the screw counterclockwise to lower the
beam
Rotate the screw clockwise to raise the beam
Rotary screw at lower left corner

Rotate the screw counterclockwise to move the
beam towards the left
Rotate the screw clockwise to move the beam
o @
nic
towards the right
ec
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 103
P
CO
Replacement of front signal light bulb
Replacement of front signal light bulb
Replacement of front signal light

Front signal light and headlight are designed in the
same light body. As shown in the figure, there is one
front signal bulb ① at left and right respectively.
(1) Conduct operations according to the prompts in
the section “Replacement of headlight bulb”.
(2) Take down the damaged bulb, and replace it by
the new bulb with the same specifications and
model.
Bulb specifications: W5W （12V/5W）
Assembly:
Install the light in inverse order to disassembly.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 104
P
CO
Replacement of rear license plate light

1. Disassemble the fixing screw of rear license
plate light (1), and then disassemble the rear
license plate light.
2. Take down the damaged bulb, and replace it by

the new bulb with the same specifications and
model.
Bulb specifications: W5W （12V/5W）
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 105
P
CO
(1) After replacing bulb, install the light in inverse

order to disassembly.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 106
P
CO
Section IV Motorcycle
Front wheel and front brake disc .................................................................................................. 108
Rear wheel and rear brake disc ..................................................................................................... 117
Front and rear brakes .................................................................................................................... 126
Front and rear brakes / front brake shoe ............................................................................... 128
Front and rear brakes / rear brake shoe ................................................................................. 129
Front and rear brakes / front brake........................................................................................ 130
Front and rear brakes / rear brake ......................................................................................... 135
Anti-lock Brake System (Equipped Modle)............................................................................ 141
Front suspension ........................................................................................................................... 175
Front suspension/front fork........................................................................................................... 176
Front suspension/front shock absorber ......................................................................................... 177
Control .......................................................................................................................................... 187
Control/control...................................................................................................................... 188
Control/handlebar ................................................................................................................. 191
Rear shock absorber ...................................................................................................................... 195
Drive chain and rear swing arm .................................................................................................... 199
Drive chain and rear swing arm ............................................................................................ 200
Drive chain and rear swing arm/ rear swing arm .................................................................. 203
Frame ............................................................................................................................................ 206
Frame /engine assembly......................................................................................................... 207
Frame /rear license plate support ............................................................................................ 211
Frame /single stay................................................................................................................... 214
Frame /left foot pedal.............................................................................................................. 217
o @
nic
Frame / right foot pedal ...................................................................................................... 220
Muffer............................................................................................................................................. 223
ec
Covering parts............................................................................................................................... 228
Covering parts / front fender ................................................................................................. 230 e p.t
Covering parts / rear fender .................................................................................................. 233 - d
Assembly of covering parts / rear lower fender and chain cover .......................................... 237
ins
Covering parts / fuel tank guard and power bottom cover .................................................... 240 r t
Covering parts / backplate .................................................................................................... 244
Ma
d re
Covering parts / fairing ......................................................................................................... 249
Lights ............................................................................................................................................ 252
an
Lights/rear taillight ............................................................................................................... 253
x
le
Lights/front steering light ..................................................................................................... 254
A
-
Lights/rear steering light ....................................................................................................... 255
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 107
P
CO
Front wheel and front brake disc
Disassembly of front wheel
Parking: Park the motorcycle at flat ground
Note:
Support the motorcycle using suitable bracket, to lift
the front wheel easily.
Disassembly: Disassemble the fastening screw A

from two brake cylinders, Fig. A
Separation: Right front caliper
Note
Repeat the above operations for left front caliper.
Note
When disassembling caliper, do not pull front brake
handle.
Loosening: Fixing screw B, Fig. B
o @
c nic
e
Disassembly:
e p.t
Front wheel shaft, Fig. C
Front wheel - d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 108
P
CO
Disassembly and assembly of front wheel
No. Name Quantity

1 Bolt M8×16 12
Front brake disc /disc chuck
2 2
ф260×4
3 Left bushing of front wheel 1
o @
nic
4 Vacuum tyre120/70-17 1
5 Front wheel rim 1
ec
6
7
Front wheel shaft
Valve
1
1 e p.t
8 Right bushing of front wheel 1 - d
9 Intermediate sleeve of front wheel 1
ins
r t
Ma
10 Dust ring components 2
11 Rolling bearing 6204-2RS 2

d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 109
P
CO
Disassembly:
After disassembling the wheel from the front fork,
disassemble the 6 screws (1) used for fastening two
discs (2), Fig. A
If two discs need to be replaced, please conduct the
operations as follows:
Assembly:
Insert the front brake disc (2) into the edge of wheel
rim (5).
After dripping one drop of thread sealant at the end of thread, insert 6 fastening screws (1)
Note
Repeat the above steps for the front right brake disc.
The following procedures are applicable to two brake discs.
Tighten the bolts to the brake disc in the form of cross step by step, Fig. A
Fasten 6 screws according to the following torque:
Torque 22N *m
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 110
P
CO
The following procedures are applicable to all brake
discs.
Check: Brake disc
If there is any damage / wear, please replace
Brake discs Deformation limit

Front brake disc 0.1mm
Rear brake disc 0.15mm
Park the motorcycle at the suitable bracket, to lift the
wheel easily.
Before measuring the bending of front brake disc, turn
the handle to the right, and then to the left to ensure that
the front wheels is stopped.
Disassemble brake cylinder.
Place the gauge at the surface of brake disc at a right
angle.
Measure bending 1.5mm (0.05in) below the edge of
brake disc. Fig. A
Note
Tighten bolt to the brake disc step by step in the form of
cross, Fig. C
Tightening torque @
o
nic
Brake discs Tightening torque
Front brake disc 22N.m
ec
p.t
Rear brake disc 10N.m
Measurement:
de
Brake disc thickness
s -
Measure the brake disc thickness at several different
points, Fig. D r tin
If it exceeds the specifications, please replace.
Ma
Brake discs Standard Lower wear d re
limit
xan
Front brake disc 4.0mm 3.0mm
A le
Rear brake disc 5.0mm 4.0mm
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 111
P
CO
Check / replacement of front wheel bearing
Check
Wheel shaft bearing
If the front wheel rotates irregularly or it is loosened,
please replace wheel bearing
Replacement:
Wheel shaft bearing
Disassemble wheel A using conventional bearing
remover. Fig. B
Install new wheel bearing in inverse order to
disassembly.
Important
When pressing bearing, do not touch inner seat B or

the ball bearing C of wheel. Only contact the outer
seat D of bearing, Fig. C
o @
Note c nic
e
The tools should be suitable for the diameter of the
e p.t
side D of wheel bearing, Fig. C
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 112
P
CO
Check / replacement of front wheel and front wheel shaft
Check:
Front wheel shaft
Roll front wheel shaft A at flat surface, Fig. A
If there is any bending, please replace.
Warning
If the front wheel shaft is bent, do not try to
straighten it in a forced way
Check:
Front wheel
Please refer to “Chapter III Check of front and rear
tyres”
Front wheel rim
If there is any bending, please replace
Measurement:
Radial run-out of wheel B. Fig. B
Axial run-out of wheel C. Fig. B
If it exceeds the specified limit, please replace
o @
c nic
Run-out Limit e
Longitudinal 0.05mm
e p.t
Lateral 0.05mm
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 113
P
CO
Static balance adjustment of front wheel
Note:
 After replacing outer tyre, wheel rim or the both, regulate the static balance of front wheel.
 When adjusting the static balance of front wheel, the brake disc should be installed properly.
Disassembly:
Balance weight
Searching:
 Gravity point of front wheel
Note:
Place the front wheel at the proper balance stand
1. Rotate front wheel; Fig. A
2. When the front wheel stops rotating, make “X1”

mark at the bottom of front wheel; Fig. B
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
3. Rotate the front wheel by 90° to make “X1” Ma
mark stop at the position shown in the figure;
d re
4.
Fig. C
Release front wheel; xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 114
P
CO
Static balance adjustment of front wheel
5. When the front wheel stops rotating, make “X2”
mark at the bottom of front wheel; Fig. D
6. Repeat the above steps for 3 to 5 times, until all
marks stop at the same position;
7. The position where all marks stop is the gravity
point of front wheel “X”.
Adjustment:
 Static balance of front wheel
1. Install “balance weight” 1 at the lower opposite
side of hard point “X” at wheel rim, Fig. E
Note:
Start from the lightest balance weight.
2. Rotate the front wheel by 90° to make the gravity

point at the position shown in the figure. Fig. F o @
3. If the gravity point does not stop at the position,
c nic
please use heavy balance weight; e
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until the front wheel
e p.t
becomes balanced.
- d
ins
r t
Check Ma
 Static balance of front wheel
d re
Rotate front wheel, and ensure that it will stop at
each position shown in the figure. Fig. G xan
If front wheel will remain still at each position,
A le
please re-balance it.
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 115
P
CO
Front wheel assembly
Assembly:
Put the shaft sleeve of front wheel to the oil seal of
front wheel, and apply the oil seal of front wheel with
appropriate amount of grease;
Insert the entire front wheel between two front shock
absorbers to drive the brake disc.
First apply grease for the front wheel shaft (C) and
then insert.
Fasten front wheel shaft using special tools.
The tools used for tightening the front wheel shaft are
shown in the list of special tools
Tightening torque100N*m
Assembly:
Insert two screws B and tighten them with hands.
Press the front force downward for two to three times
to place the front wheel shaft (6), Fig. B
Fasten two screws B using the following torque:
o @
Tightening torque 8N*m c nic
e
e p.t
Assembly: - d
Right brake cylinder, insert fastening screw A. Fig. C ins
r t
Ma
Use the following torque to fasten two screws A:
Fastening torque 45N*m d re

xan
Note
A le
For left brake cylinder, please repeat the above steps.
A -
Put the calipers between brake discs, and ensure that
there is an enough gap between brake shoes. alS
Check whether the arrangement of brake hose is correct. ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 116
P
CO
Rear wheel and rear brake disc
Disassembly of rear wheel
1 Rear wheel shaft 1 13 Rolling bearing 6204-2RS 2 o @
2 Right bushing of rear wheel 1 14 Dust ring components 1
c nic
e
p.t
3 Screw M6×20-10.9-ZG 6 15 Chain wheel fixing bolt M10×1.25×41 5
4 Rear brake disc 1 16 Chain wheel hub 1
de
5 Valve 1 17 Chain wheel 1
s -
6
7
Rear wheel rim
Intermediate shaft sleeve of rear wheel
1
1
18
19
Self-locking nut M10×1.25
Chain drive shaft sleeve
5
1 r tin
8 Vacuum tyre 160/60-17 1 20 Bearing 30×62×23.8 1 Ma
9 Self-locking nut M20×1.5 1 21 Closing ring Φ62
d re 1
10 Cushion cover of rear wheel 5 22 Chain 108 sections
xan 1
11
12
Left shaft sleeve of rear wheel
O-ring φ53×φ3.55
1
1
23 Lip seal components
A le 1
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 117
P
CO
Disassembly of rear wheel
Parking: Park the motorcycle at flat ground

the front wheel easily.
Disassembly: Disassemble the fastening screw A
from two brake cylinders, Fig. A
Note
the rear wheel easily.
Disassembly: Disassemble the tightening screw

A from rear brake cylinder. Fig. A
Separation: Brake cylinder.
Disassembly: Self-locking nut (9) and rear wheel

shaft (1)
Note
During this process, note that the following parts may
be separated:
Mounting plate of brake cylinder, Fig. A.
Chain adjusting block B, Fig. B.
Right shaft sleeve at the edge of brake disc, Fig. C
Right shaft sleeve at the edge of chain wheel, Fig. D
o @
c nic
e
p.t
Disassembly:
Side of brake disc of right shaft sleeve (9) (Fig. C),
de
side of chain wheel of left shaft sleeve (11) (Fig. D).
s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 118
P
CO
Disassembly of rear brake disc of chain wheel
Disassembly of brake disc

After removing rear wheel, take down the brake disc.
Loosen 6 fastening screws (3), and take down brake
disc (4)
Fig. A
Disassembly of chain wheel:

After removing rear wheel, disassemble chain wheel
(17), Fig. B
Disassemble 5 fastening nuts, and separate chain
wheel from chain wheel hub (16).
Separate chain wheel hub (16) from screw (15) and
rear wheel cushion cover (10).
Check:
Chain wheel hub
If there is crack / damage, please replace
Rear wheel cushion cover o @
If there is crack / damage, please replace
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 119
P
CO
Check of rear wheel and rear wheel shaft
Check:
Rear wheel shaft

Roll rear wheel shaft A at flat surface, Fig. A
If there is any bending, please replace.
Warning
If the rear wheel shaft is bent, do not try to straighten
it in a forced way
Check:
Rear wheel
Please refer to “Chapter III Check of front and rear
tyres”
Rear wheel
If there is any bending, please replace
Measurement:
Radial run-out of wheel B. Fig. B
Axial run-out of wheel C. Fig. B
If it exceeds the specified limit, please replace o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
Run-out Limit
ins
Longitudinal 0.05mm
r t
Lateral 0.05mm
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 120
P
CO
Check / replacement of rear wheel bearing
Check:
Wheel bearing
If the rear wheel rotates irregularly or it is loosened,
please replace wheel bearing
Replacement:
Wheel bearing
Disassemble the bearing from wheel A using general
bearing remover. Fig. B
Install new wheel bearing in inverse order to
disassembly.
Important
o @
When pressing bearing, do not touch inner ring B or the
c nic
ball bearing C of wheel. Only contact the outer seat D of
e
bearing, Fig. C
e p.t
Note - d
The wrench should be suitable for the diameter of the ins
r t
Ma
outer side D of wheel bearing, Fig. C
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 121
P
CO
Static balance adjustment of rear wheel
Note:
 After replacing outer tyre, wheel rim or the both, regulate the static balance of front wheel.
 When adjusting the static balance of front wheel, the brake disc should be installed properly. 批注 [微软用户2]: 此处原文为“前
轮”
，但是这部分讲的是“后轮”
，请
Adjustment
客户确认是否有误
Please refer to “Static balance adjustment of front wheel”
o @
c nic
e
ep.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 122
P
CO
Check and replacement of chain wheel
Check: Chain wheel

If more than 1/4 of each tooth has been worn, replace
chain wheel.
If the tooth is bent, replace chain wheel.
Replacement of chain wheel:

After disassembling rear wheel, take down chain
wheel, as described in the above section.
Replacement:
Wipe the dust at the surface of chain wheel seat (16)
with clean cloth, especially the surface in contact
with chain wheel.
Insert 5 fastening bolts (15), and tighten the

self-locking nuts to the following torque.
Torque 45N*m
o @
Note c nic
e
Fasten self-locking nuts in steps by crossed sequence.
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 123
P
CO
Assembly of rear brake disc
Brake disc:
After disassembling rear wheel, take down brake disc,
as described in the above section.
Wipe the dust at the surface of wheel hub with clean
cloth, especially the surface in contact with brake
disc.
Assembly:
Brake disc (17) and 6 screws (6), Fig. A
Use thread sealant at the end of thread
Tighten the fastening screws to the following torque:
Torque 10N*m
Note
Fasten screws in steps by crossed sequence.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 124
P
CO
Assembly of rear wheel
Assembly:
Preassemble support, connecting plate (3), and
install speed sensor (4) and screws (5).
Insert the shaft sleeve (11) into the side of chain

wheel, and insert the shaft sleeve (2) to brake disc,
Fig. B
Insert the chain tensioner adjusting device to the side

of chain wheel, and insert the rear wheel to the side
of brake disc, Fig. C
Assembly: Rear wheel
Lubricate and assemble:
Rear wheel shaft (14)

Fasten nut (1) to the following torque, Fig. D
o @
c nic
Torque 140N*m e
Assembly: Brake cylinder, and respectively
Left Right
e p.t
fasten screws to the following torque:
- d
ins
r t
Ma
Torque 25N*m
Note
Install the calipers on the relevant brake disc, ensure
d re
that there is enough space between two brake shoes.
xan
Important
Ale
Ensure that the path of brake hose is correct.
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 125
P
CO
Front and rear brakes
Front brake
No. Name Quantity No. Name Quantity

Front hydraulic brake
1 1 12 Nut M6 1
components
o @
nic
2 Front brake hose assembly 1 13 Button head screw M4×12 1
Front right brake cylinder
3 1 14 Gasket 4 1
ec
p.t
components
4
Front left brake cylinder
1 15
Front hydraulic brake handle
1
de
5
components
Gasket 6 16
components
Brake switch components 1 s -
6 Valve 2 17 Fixing cover 1 r tin
7 Dust cover of valve 2 18
Brake shoe components
4 Ma
(including two)
d re
an 4
8 Bolt M6×23 2 19 Oil pipe mounting bolt 2
9 Hexagon flange bolt 1 20 Square seal ring A
le x
10 Handle screw 1 21
A
Square seal ring B
Socket head cap -
screw
4
11 Oil pump components 1 22

SA
M10×1.25×40
l
4
g a
rt u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 126
P
CO
Front and rear brakes
Rear brake
No. Name Quantity

1 Rear hydraulic brake components 1
2 Bolt M8×1.25×25 2
o @
nic
3 Spring gasket φ8 2
4 Screw M6×20 1
ec
p.t
5 Bolt M6×30 2
6 Rear brake pump 1
de
7 Rear brake hose 1
s -
8 Rear brake cylinder components 1
r tin
Ma
9 Sealing spacer 4
10 Bolt 1
11 Oil cup 1
d re
12
13
Oil pipe
1
1 ex
an
l
14 Brake light switch
- A1
l SA
a
rt ug
P o
t o r
M o
oto
ltim
M u
Y - 127
P
CO
Front and rear brakes / front brake shoe
Disassembly and assembly of front brake shoe
Disassembly
Disassemble closing ring C with circlip pliers and
then disassemble the locating pin A used for fixing
brake shoe, Fig. A
Note
When pulling out pin A, press safety spring B, Fig.
A
Disassemble worn brake shoe, Fig. B
Measurement:
Wear limit of brake shoe
If it exceeds the specifications, please replace the
brake shoes in pairs
Brake discs Standard Lower wear limit

Front brake disc 7.8mm 3.8mm o @
Assembly: Continue to assemble in inverse order to disassembly. c nic
e
e p.t
Check: Brake fluid level B, Fig. C - d
ins
If it is lower than the minimum notch, add a sufficient
r t
amount of recommended brake fluid, until it reaches
the correct fluid level. Ma
Check: d re
xan
Operation of brake handle
If brake handle is soft or light, exhaust the air in the A le
brake circuit.
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 128
P
CO
Front and rear brakes / rear brake shoe
Disassembly and assembly of rear brake shoe
Disassembly
Disassemble two fastening screws A from brake

cylinder, Fig. A.
Disassemble bolt B from brake caliper, and rotate
brake caliper E towards the direction C.
Taking out: Brake shoe D, Fig. B
Measurement: Wear limit of brake shoe.

If it exceeds the specifications, please replace the
brake shoes in pairs
Brake discs Standard Lower wear

limit
Rear brake 7.0mm
3.7mm
disc
Assembly: o @
Continue to assemble in inverse order to disassembly.
c nic
e
p.t
Fastening bolt B to the following torque:
de
Torque 25N*m
s -
Check: r tin
Brake fluid level B, Fig. C Ma
If it is lower than the minimum notch, add a
d re
sufficient amount of recommended brake fluid, until
xan
it reaches the correct fluid level.
A le
Check:
A -
Operation of brake pedal
If brake pedal is soft or light, exhaust the air in the alS
ug
brake circuit.
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 129
P
CO
Front and rear brakes / front brake
Front brake
No. Name Quantity No. Name Quantity

Front hydraulic brake
1 1 12 Nut M6 1
components
o @
nic
2 Front brake hose assembly 1 13 Button head screw M4×12 1
Front right brake cylinder
3 1 14 Gasket 4 1
ec
p.t
components
4
Front left brake cylinder
1 15
Front hydraulic brake handle
1
de
5
components
Gasket 6 16
components
Brake switch components 1 s -
6 Valve 2 17 Fixing cover 1 r tin
7 Dust cover of valve 2 18
4 Ma
(including two)
d re
an 4
8 Bolt M6×23 2 19 Oil pipe mounting bolt 2
9 Hexagon flange bolt 1 20 Square seal ring A
le x
10 Handle screw 1 21
A
Square seal ring B
Socket head cap -
screw
4
11 Oil pump components 1 22

SA
M10×1.25×40
l
4
g a
rt u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 130
P
CO
Assembly of front brake pump
Assembly:
Conduct the operations according to the following
steps
Warning
Before assembly, wash all internal parts of brake, and
lubricate using clean or new brake fluid.
Do not apply any solvent on the internal parts of
brake.
Assemble brake light switch by tightening screw (13)
and gasket (14) to pump. The torque is as follows:
Torque 1.5N*m
Insert the X connector of front brake switch (16), Fig. A
Assemble special screw (9) and related gasket (5) to front brake hose and connect it to pump.
Fasten screw to the following torque:
Torque 26N*m
Warning
To ensure the safety of motorcycle, the path of brake hose must be correct.
Tighten nut (12) and fastening screw (10) to the following torque, and assemble the front brake handle (15):
Torque 7N*m
Assemble support (17) to handle, and tighten two fastening screws (8) to the following torque, first upper one and
then lower one;
Note o @
Brake pump bracket assembly, "UP" toward the arrow, A, Figure B
c nic
Note e
Upon completion of these operations, add a little brake fluid. See Chapter 3, "checks and pre-maintenance", "front
e p.t
brake fluid check / add a little
- d
ins
Torque 8N*m
r t
Note Ma
Assemble brake pump support, make “UP” toward d re
the arrow, A, Fig. B
xan
Note
A le
Upon completion of these operations, add a sufficient
amount of brake fluid. See Chapter III “Checks and A -
early maintenance”, “Check / adding of front brake
a lS
fluid”.
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 131
P
CO
Fastening of front brake cylinder
Disassembly: The following procedures are

applicable to two brake cylinder.
Note
Before disassembling brake cylinder, drain the
brake fluid in the brake circuit. Before
disassembling brake cylinder, drain the brake fluid
in the brake circuit.
Separation:
Special screw (19) and seal gasket (5), Fig. A
Disassemble rear brake hose.
Note
Insert the end of brake hose into a container, and
then slowly pull it out to drain all brake fluid.
Disassemble two calipers, and release the fastening
screw A at front fork, Fig. B
Separation:
Brake cylinder piston B, Fig. C
Piston gasket E on brake cylinder (first the smallest
oil seal - washer, followed by the seal ring – large
o @
gasket)
c nic
e
Fix the piston at brake cylinder using a large piece e p.t
of wood, Fig. D - d
Blow the compressed air into brake cylinder
ins
connectors to extrude the piston of brake cylinder, r t
Fig. D Ma
Warning d re
Do not try to open the piston of calipers xan
Disassemble the seal ring of piston from brake
A le
cylinder.
A -
Repeat the same steps to extrude the piston at the
right of brake cylinder, Fig. D
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 132
P
CO
Assembly of front brake cylinder
Disassembly: The following steps are applicable to
two brake cylinders.
Warning
Before assembly, wash all internal parts of brake,
and lubricate using clean or new brake fluid.
Do not apply any solvent on the internal parts of
brake, because solvent may cause piston gasket to
swell or bend.
Replace piston gasket when disassembling brake
caliper each time.
Assembly:
Install piston gasket E on brake caliper, Fig. A (first
the smallest oil seal - washer, followed by the seal
ring – large gasket)
Brake caliper piston B, Fig. A
Assembly: Tighten fastening screws A to front fork
using two calipers, Fig. B, according to the
following torque:
Torque 45N*m
Front brake hose, Fig.
Seal gasket (5)
Special screw (19)
Note
Tighten the special screws, fasten them with a torque
wrench twice, and tighten it to the following torque
o @
Torque 26N*m c nic
e
Warning
e p.t
To ensure the safety of motorcycle, the path brake
hose must be correct. - d
Filling: brake fluid container ins
r t
Ma
Warning
Use only the specified brake fluid. Rubber seal ring may be damaged when using other types of brake fluid,
resulting in leakage and reducing brake performance.
d re
xan
Use the brake fluid with the same brand when filling brake fluid. The mixture of brake fluid with different brands
should not be used, because this may cause a dangerous chemical reaction, and reduce brake performance.
A le
When adding brake fluid, be careful not to let any water into the container. Water will significantly reduce the
boiling point of the fluid and lead to the formation of steam bubbles.
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 133
P
CO
Assembly of front brake cylinder
Important
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces and
plastic parts. Clean up spilled brake fluid.
Emptying:
Brake circuit
Check:
Check the brake fluid level, A, Fig. A
sufficient amount of recommended brake fluid.
Check:
Operation of brake handle
If brake handle is soft or light, exhaust the air in the brake circuit.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 134
P
CO
Front and rear brakes / rear brake
Assembly of rear brake pump
No. Name Quantity

1 Rear hydraulic brake components 1
o @
nic
2 Bolt M8×1.25×25 2
3 Spring washer φ8 2
ec
p.t
4 Screw M6×20 1
5 Bolt M6×30 2
de
6 Rear brake pump 1
s -
7
8
Rear brake hose
Rear brake cylinder components
1
1 r tin
9 Sealing spacer 4 Ma
10 Bolt 1
d re
11 Oil cup 1
xan
12
13
Oil pipe
1
A
1
le
14 Brake light switch
A - 1
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 135
P
CO
Assembly of rear brake pump
Assembly: Assemble according to the

following order:
Install connector (Y) at brake control lever (T),
fasten connector (Y) to brake foot lever, Fig. A
Tighten fastening screw (x) on brake pump (6), Fig.

B, to the following torque:
Torque 10N*m
o @
Connect rear brake caliper and related gaskets to
c nic
rear brake hose and brake pump. Tighten rear brake
e
caliper to the following torque:
e p.t
- d
Torque 26N*m
ins
r t
Warning
Ma
d re
To ensure the safety of motorcycle, the path brake hose must be correct.
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 136
P
CO
Rear brake cylinder
Disassembly
Note
Before disassembling brake cylinder, drain the
brake fluid in the brake circuit.
Separation
Special screw A and gasket B, Fig. A
Disassemble rear brake hose.
Note
Disassemble brake cylinder, and release the
fastening screw at the supporting plate of brake
cylinder
Separation:
Brake cylinder piston B, Fig. B
Spacer C
Piston gasket on brake cylinder (first the smallest
oil seal - washer, followed by the seal ring – large
gasket)
o @
c nic
e
Support the piston at brake cylinder using a piece of
e p.t
wood, Fig. D
Blow the compressed air into brake hose connectors - d
to extrude the piston at the right of brake cylinder, ins
r t
Ma
Fig. C
Warning
d re
Do not try to open the piston of brake cylinder
Disassemble the seal ring of piston from brake xan
cylinder. D
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 137
P
CO
Check of rear brake cylinder
Check:
Brake cylinder piston
If there is rust / patterns / sign of wear, replace the brake cylinder piston.
Brake cylinder
If there is pattern / sign of wear, replace the entire brake cylinder.
Main brake cylinder body
If there is crack / damage, replace the entire brake cylinder.
Brake fluid conveying pipe (main brake cylinder body)
If there is an obstacle, clean with a surge of compressed air.
Dust-proof boot
If there is any crack / sign of wear, replace the dust-proof boot.
Important
Replace piston gasket when disassembling brake cylinder.
Check:
Connectors at rear brake cylinder support and rear wheel fork.
If there is any rust / sign of wear, please replace.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 138
P
CO
Assembly of rear brake cylinder
Assembly:
Warning
Before assembly, wash all internal parts of brake, and lubricate using clean or new brake fluid.
Do not apply any solvent on the internal parts of brake, because solvent may cause piston gasket to swell or bend.
Replace piston gasket when disassembling brake caliper each time.
Assembly:
Install piston gasket D on brake caliper, Fig. A (first
the smallest oil seal - washer, followed by the seal
ring – large gasket)
Insulator C, Fig. A
Brake caliper piston B, Fig. A
Assembly: Tighten fastening screws A to caliper
supporting plate using caliper according to the
following torque:
Torque 22N*m
Front brake hose, Fig.

Seal gasket B, Fig. B
Special bolt A, Fig. B
Note
Tighten the special bolt, and restore the torque twice
after relaxing according to the following torque
o @
Warning
c nic
e
p.t
To ensure the safety of motorcycle, the path brake
hose must be correct.
Filling: Oil cup of brake pump de
s -
Warning
r tin
Ma
Use only the specified brake fluid. Rubber seal ring may be damaged when using other types of brake fluid,
resulting in leakage and reducing brake performance.
re
Use the brake fluid with the same brand when filling brake fluid. The mixture of brake fluid with different brands
d
an reduce the
should not be used, because this may cause a dangerous chemical reaction, and reduce brake performance.
x
boiling point of the fluid and lead to the formation of steam bubbles. A le
When adding brake fluid, be careful not to let any water into the container. Water will significantly
A -
a lS
rt ug
P o
t o r
M o
o to
u ltim
- M
PY 139
CO
Assembly of rear brake cylinder
Important
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces and plastic parts. Clean up spilled brake fluid.
Emptying:
Emptying:
Brake circuit
Check:
Check the brake fluid level, A, Fig. A
sufficient amount of recommended brake fluid.
Check:
Operation of brake pedal
If brake pedal is soft or light, exhaust the air in the brake circuit.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 140
P
CO
Anti-lock Brake System（Equipped Models）
Anti-lock Brake System ABS

Components Location
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
1. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Ma
2. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor d re
3. Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
xan
4. Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor
A le
5. ABS Indicator（LED）
A -
6. ABS Control Unit
alS
7. ABS Fuse Box ug
8. ABS Diagnostic Connector o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 141
P
CO

ABS System Wiring Diagram
1. ABS Switch
2. Main switch
o @
nic
3. Ground
5. Fuse
ec
6. ABS Fuse（40 A）
e p.t
7. Speedometer
- d
8. ABS Diagnostic System connecter
ins
r t
Ma
9. Front Wheel Speed Sensor
10. Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 142
P
CO

Pin Description
1. GND_ECU
2. CAN1P
3. WSS_F
4. WAU_IN1
5. DIAGK
6. BLS - input_PD -SW2H_NO
7. DIAGL
8. WSO_F
9. UB_VR
10. GND_MR
11. CAN1M
12. WSP_F
13. WSP_R
14. WSS_R
15. ABS_OFF -input_PU -
SW2L_NO
16. WSO_R
17. NABS_SLAMP
18. UB_MR
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 143
P
CO

There are several precautions that should be followed
when servicing ABS system.
○The power of ABS system should be supplied by 12V
sealed battery. Don’t use any other batteries.
○Don’t connect the batter cable reversely, or the ABS
hydraulic control unit system will be damaged.
○Don’t disconnect the batter cable or other electric
components when the main switch is on or engine is
working to avoid damaging of ABS components.
○Don’t short circuit the battery positive electrode（+）
with chassis ground.
○Don’t turn the main switch ON when ABS electric
components are disconnected. ABS control unit will
memorize the diagnostic trouble code.
○Don’t spray water to electric components, ABS
components, connecters, leads and wirings.
○Please make sure the ABS system will not be affected
by transceiver equipped in the motorcycle. The
antenna should be located as far as possible from
the ABS control unit.
○Turn off the main switch before disconnecting ABS
electric components.
○Never hit ABS components with hammer or let ABS
o @
nic
components fall on hard surface. These kinds of shock
may damage the ABS components.
ec
○Don’t disassemble or try to repair ABS components
e p.t
even the ABS is malfunctioning. Please replace the
- d
ABS components directly.
ins
○There are lots of brake tubes and wires in ABS r t
system. ABS system cannot detect the conventional Ma
brake system malfunction (bake disc worn out, uneven d re
brake shoes worn out, other mechanical problems).In
xan
order to avoid problems, please check the brake tube
A le
A -
for right connecting, the wiring for right layout, the
lS
brake system for normal brake performance. Please
a
ug
check if any leakage of brake fluid. Make sure air is
bled thoroughly. o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 144
P
CO
Warning
If any brake tube connecting parts including ABS
hydraulic control unit bolts or air bleeding bolts
are removed, the air in brake tube should be
bled then.
Caution
Don’t ride motorcycle before bleeding air
thoroughly, or ABS may malfunction.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 145
P
CO

○The ABS indicator (LED) will light when the tyre
pressure is wrong, non-recommended tyre is assembled
or rim deformed. Please repair the ABS system and
delete the diagnostic trouble code.
Warning
Equipping non-recommended tyres will resulting
in ABS malfunction and prolong braking
distance, accidents may occur in the worst
condition. Therefore, please use recommended
standard tyres in this motorcycle.
○If the engine is running and engaged in gear when the
motorcycle is supported by bike stand, the ABS
indicator (LED) will on. Please turn off the switch and
clear the ABS diagnostic trouble code.（Front Wheel
Speed Sensor malfunction）。
○ABS will make noise when it works, riders can feel
the reacting force of brake lever and brake pedal. This
normal condition is to inform the rider that the ABS is
operating normally.
○ABS hydraulic control unit will memorize the
diagnostic trouble code once any diagnostic trouble
code is detected. Delete the diagnostic trouble code
o @
nic
every time after the maintenance work finished. Do
not erase diagnostic trouble code in trouble shooting
ec
processing in order to avoid duplication of previous
e p.t
diagnostic trouble code or dispensable maintenance
- d
work.
ins
○Delete ABS system diagnostic trouble codes before r t
delivering vehicle to customers. Make sure ABS Ma
indicator will light by using self-diagnosis feature. d re
Fully charge the battery. Test if the ABS indicator will xan
go off when vehicle speed reached above 5km/h. You A le
should have the ABS checked if ABS indicator not go A -
a lS
off. At last, test if the vehicle can stop smoothly and the
ug
rt
ABS can operate normally by riding the vehicle above
o
5km/h and brake suddenly (riders can feel reacting
P
to r
force from brake lever and brake pedal). The inspection
finished.
M o
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 146
P
CO

ABS troubleshooting overview.
If ABS malfunction, the ABS indicator (LED) will
keep on after vehicle speed reached 5km/h to arouse
rider’s attention. In addition, the diagnostic trouble
code will be record in ABS hydraulic control unit [A].
Therefore, the trouble should be deleted after the
problems are solved. If the ABS indicator（LED） keep
on, figure the problem out thoroughly then repair it.
Consult the driver the condition when the problem
occurred [B], then try to figure the problem out[C].
Don’t rely on the ABS diagnostic system completely,
use common sense at the same time. Such as: check the
brake fluid level, check brake performance, check
brake fluid leakage, etc.
In below condition, ABS indicator（LED）will on
even the ABS operates well. Turn the main switch off
to stop the ABS indicator on.
Riding on rough road continually.
Keep the engine working and rear wheel rotating
when vehicle supported by bracket and engine engaged
in gear.
Accelerate abruptly and let front wheel leave
ground.
o @
nic
When ABS interfered by strong electric signal.
When the tyre pressure is incorrect. Please adjust
ec
the tyre pressure.
e p.t
When the vehicle equip non-standard tyre. Please
- d
use standard tyre.
ins
r t
Ma
When rims deformed. Please replace the rims.
Majority of ABS troubleshooting work need to
confirm if the electric circuit works well. It is d re
unnecessary to disassemble or repair ABS components
xan
as ABS components are assembled and adjusted well
A le
by suppliers. But sometimes may need replace ABS
A -
hydraulic control unit.
a lS
ug
Troubleshooting procedure are as follow:
●Preliminary inspection. o rt
r P
●Troubleshooting with ABS diagnostic tool.
o to
●Troubleshooting with multimeter to check ABS
M
to
hydraulic control unit connecter or wiring.
o
lt i m
Special tool：Multimeter：
M u
Y - 147
P
CO
●Visually check if any burning or worn out of wires.

★Replace the wire if any broken.
●Disconnect each connectors, check for rust,
contamination or broken.。
★Clean the connector if it is rusty or contaminated.
Replace the connector if it is broken.
●Check if the wiring is normal.
○Search for the two ends of suspected malfunctional
wire with wiring diagram.
○Connect multimeter with the two ends.
Special tool—Multimeter：
○Set the multimeter range in× 1 Ω and read the
multimeter reading.
★The wire is broken if the multimeter reading is not
0Ω. Replace the wiring harness if necessary.
●Reducing suspicious parts by checking wiring

repeatedly, check the ABS component then.
★The ABS components may malfunction if all wires
and connectors are normal. Need check one by one.
★Replace ABS components if any abnormal detected.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 148
P
CO

ABS Diagnosis flow chart.
Problems occurs
Confirm problems
Connect information from driver
Pre-diagnosis inspection 1,2
Diagnostic tool inspection
Inspection through other way Check with diagnostic tool
If wires or connectors have problems If ABS components have problems
Repair or replace Check ABS components
Replace
NG
Final inspection
o @
OK
c nic
e
Finish
ep.t
- d
in s
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 149
P
CO
Anti-lock brake system (Equipped model)
Anti-lock brake system

Gather info from rider
○ Check which problems the rider encountered.
○ Check in which conditions the problems happened?
○ Diagnosis chart can help to check any key points of the problems, so it is necessary to use diagnosis chart.
Diagnosis chart
Name of rider： License plate：
Register year： Model：
Engine NO.： VIN：
Date： Frequency：
Weather： Mileage：
□Brake
□ Brake level
□ Indicator level free
vibration or
blink play □ABS □ABS
Pheno noisy □ Brake □ABS
abnormal running, operation
nmen distance Malfunctio
□Brake pedal □ Indicator □ Brake indicator too
on too long n
vibration or always ON pedal free OFF frequency
nosiy play
abnormal
The engine statue when
□ When ignition □ After ignition □ RPM≥5 000 r/min
problem happened
□ Slippery (□ Snow、 □ Gravel road、 □ Others ) o @
Conditions of road surface □ Rocky road
cnic
e
□ Other conditions
e p.t
□ Corner at speed
- d
□ Vehicle speed≥10 km/h (6 mph) in s
r t
Driving conditions □ Vehicle speed＜10 km/h (6 mph)
Ma
□ Parking
d re
□ Turning
xan
Brake status
□Normal braking
A le
□Sudden braking
A -
l
□ Brake level excessive
Sfree play
Other conditions g a
rtuexcessive free play
□Brake pedal
o
r P
o t o
o M
o t
lt im
M u
Y - 150
P
CO
Anti-lock brake system (Equipped models)

Pre-diagnosis inspection 1
Check the brake level of brake reservoir NG Add brake fluid

OK
Check if there was leakage of brake fluid NG Repair brake hose
OK
Check if the brake lever and brake pedal malfunction NG Repair&replace master cylinder
OK
Check brake disc and brake pads NG Replace the defective parts
OK
Front and rear wheel should rotate smoothly NG Repair&replace caliper
OK
The free clearance of wheel and bearing must be in NG Replace bearing of rear wheel or wheel
standard scope. axle
The wheel axle without bent and brake disc without
vibration.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
in s
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 151
P
CO

Check before self-diagonsis (Phase 2)
Check ABS Indicator light (LED). N Check the power supply lines and dashboard
○Check if the ABS indicator light will on
when ignition on
Y
Ride with the speed 6km/h(3.7mph) and
last 1 or two minutes
When riding, if theindicator off? Y ABS Normal

N
Count the blink times under self-diagonsis mode, Check if the DTC detected again
detect the DTC
GL 14111B F
Self-diagnosis description
When a problem is detected in any of the signal systems, the ECU turns on the ABS indicator in the
speedometer to alert the driver that a malfunction has occurred. The code is stored in memory for
access at a later time. Diagnostic trouble codes can be read by ABS diagnostic tool. The ABS ECU will also
store the diagnostic trouble codes for any ABS malfunction.
ABS hydraulic system can record all the DTC (16TCs). If more DTCs detected, must delete all the stored DTCs
(16DTCs), Then the new DTC can be stored. If without DTC，ABS indicator will (LED)on, shows “ABS normal”.
Self-diagnosis system
o @
○ IF ABS malfunction, ABS indicator (LED)[A]ON
c nic
e
Remarks
e p.t
○ The battery must be with sufficient power during - d
self-diagnosis, or the indicator blink slowly, even in s
r t
without blink.
○ The ignition switch must be off
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 152
P
CO

Check ABS Indicator (LED)
● Turn the ignition switch ON
★If ABS Indicator (LED) [A]On, Normal.
★If ABS Indicator (LED) not on, go to the next step
“ABS indicator (LED) OFF (Turn the ignition switch ON)”.
●Turn the ignition switch OFF”.

★If ABS waring light (LED)[A]OFF, Normal
★If ABS waring light (LED)ON, Go to next step：“ABS
indicator (LED) ON, (When driving—No DTC)”.
ABS Indicator (LED) OFF (Turn the ignition switch ON)

● Step 1
o @
nic
○ Check the plug Black/white voltage of
speedometer[A]
ec
Special tool: Multimeter
e p.t
- d
○ Turn the ignition switch ON
ins
Voltage of pins r t
Standard：Around 10 V Ma
d re
★ If the voltage not in the scope, go to step2
xan
★ If the voltage normal, change the speedometer.
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 153
P
CO
● Step 2
○ Disconnected the speedometer cable plug
○ Check if the circuit route of main wire harness plug
[A] Black/White to GND is abnormal.
★ If circuit route is normal, repair or replace the main
wire harness.
★ If circuit route is abnormal, go to step 3
● Step 3.
○Disconnect the ABS hydraulic control unit plug
○Check if the ABS Black/white plug of main wire
harness and the main wire harness Black/white plug of
main wire harness circuit route is abnormal
★ If in normal condition, Replace ABS hydraulic
system
★ If abnormal, repair or replace main wire harness.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 154
P
CO

ABS indicator (LED) ON (When in running)
● Test
○ Disconnect the plugs of ABS hydraulic unit and
speedometer.
○ Check if the ABS Black/white plug of main wire

harness and the speed sensor Black/white plug of main
wire harness circuit route is abnormal
Check if rear/front speed sensor or teeth ring
malfunction&abnormal
Check if the ABS fuse of wire harness malfunction
Special tool—multimeter：
★If wire route, ABS fuse, rear&front speed sensor

normal, replace ABS control unit.
★If wire route, ABS fuse, rear&front speed sensor
abnormal, repair&replace.
Battery Voltage
Standard：Voltage≥12V
★ If the battery voltage is not in the scope, replace

battery.
o @
nic
★ If the battery voltage is normal, go to next step.
ec
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 155
P
CO

ABS ECU inner units malfunction (5055)
★Replace ABS.
Pump relay malfunction (5019)
★Replace ABS.
ABS solenoid relay short circuit (Front: 5017 Rear: 5013)

★Replace ABS.
ABS Solenoid Relay open circuit (Front: 5018 Rear: 5014)

★Replace ABS.
ABS High voltage ABS Lower voltage (High voltage: 5053 Lower voltage: 5052)
Standard: Battery voltage≥12V
★If the power of the battery not in the range of voltage, charge or replace the battery
ABS Hydraulic control unit or DC motor malfunction (5035)
★Replace ABS.
Varcode EEPROM Read error (5122)
★Replace ABS.
Varcode Invalid or beyond the scope (5223)
★Replace ABS.
Wheel speed sensor intermittent signal (Front: 5042 Rear: 5044)

○ Check if the clearance of speed sensor core to gear tooth tip 0.5~1.2mm.
o @
nic
○ Check if the wheel is rotating when vehicle is supported by brackets.
★ Adjust the clearance of speed sensor and sensor rotor.
ec
★ Sensor rotor defective.
e p.t
- d
●ABSwheel excessive speed difference.
ins
○ Check if change the specification of rim and tire. r t
○ If the wheel is rotating when vehicle is supported by brackets. Ma
★ Please use the specific rim and tire. d re
an
★ Turn the main switch off after rotation heels then turn the main switch ON.
x
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 156
P
CO
ABS system（Model with ABS）
ABS system
Front wheel speed sensor fault（diagnostic trouble code：5042）
●Trouble shooting step 1。
○Measure the clearance between the wheel speed
sensor and sensor rotor with feeler gauge[A]
Clearance
Standard：0.5 ∼ 1.2 mm
★If measurement result is out of standard range，

please check the related parts and readjust。
Measure the clearance after readjust。
★If the measurement result is up to standard, proceed
to the next step。

○Check If there is magnetic foreign parts between
wheel speed sensor[A]and sensor rotor[B]，if the
intervals of teeth are blocked。
○Check if the wheel speed sensor is loose。
○Check if the wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor is
deformed or damaged（For example：there is gap on
o @
nic
teeth）。
★Please adjust or replace the sensor rotor and wheel
ec
speed sensor if necessary 。
e p.t
★If all the parts are normal, proceed to the next step。
- d
ins
r t
Ma
●Trouble shooting step 3。 d re
○Recheck diagnostic trouble code；clear diagnostic
xan
trouble code，check before self-diagnostic （Step1 and
A le
step2），reread diagnostic trouble code。
A -
lS
★If ABS indicator（LED）[A] is on， diagnostic trouble
a
ug
code show ABS hydraulic control unit fault。Please
o rt
replace ABS hydraulic control unit fault。
r P
★If ABS indicator（LED）[A] is not on，it means ABS
o to
is normal（Diagnostic trouble code is nor recorded；
M
to
temporary fault）
o
。
lt i m
M u
Y - 157
P
CO
ABS system
Rear wheel speed sensor fault（diagnostic trouble code：5044）
○Measure the clearance between the wheel speed
sensor and sensor rotor with feeler gauge[A]
Clearance
Standard：0.5 ∼ 1.2 mm
★If measurement result is out of standard range，

please check the related parts and readjust。
Measure the clearance after readjust。
★If the measurement result is up to standard, proceed
to the next step。

○Check If there is magnetic foreign parts between
wheel speed sensor[A]and sensor rotor[B]，if the
intervals of teeth are blocked。
○Check if the wheel speed sensor is loose。
○Check if the wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor is
deformed or damaged（For example：there is gap on
teeth）。
o @
nic
★Please adjust or replace the sensor rotor and wheel
speed sensor if necessary 。
ec
★If all the parts are normal, proceed to the next step。
e p.t
- d
ins
●Trouble shooting step 3。 r t
○Recheck diagnostic trouble code；clear diagnostic Ma
trouble code，check before self-diagnostic （Step1 and d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
。 r P
temporary fault）
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 158
P
CO
ABS system

temporary fault）。
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 159
P
CO
ABS system

o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 160
P
CO
ABS system
Check ECU（diagnostic trouble code：5055）

o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 161
P
CO
ABS system
Remove ABS hydraulic control unit
Attention
Please prevent ABS hydraulic control unit from
knock, impact and dirty when removing.
●Darin the brake fluid out from front brake hose and
rear brake hose。
○Draining the brake fluid out from draining bolt by
pressing the brake lever/pedal。
●Remove：
Fuel tank[Check“Fuel system”—“Remove fuel tank”]、
Battery（Check“Electric system”—“Remove battery”）、
bolts
Fuel tank cover
●Clean ABS hydraulic control unit。
Attention
o @
nic
Clean all the joint on the ABS hydraulic
control unit，or the dirty around the joint may
ec
pollute the brake fluid。
e p.t
Protect the parts around the controller to
- d
prevent from brake liquid splash when removing
ins
r t
Ma
the brake hose。
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 162
P
CO
ABS system
●Remove brake hose nuts[A]、[B]、[C]、[D]。
●Cover the joint on ABS hydraulic control unit to
prevent from brake fluid leakage and dirty entering。
Attention
Brake fluid will corrode the parts, please
clean and flush the parts when it is stained by
brake fluid
●Disconnect the joint[A]。

○Please disconnect the joint by following the way as
the right picture[B]。
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 163
P
CO
ABS system
●Remove bolts[A]。
●Remove ABS hydraulic control unit and bracket[B]。
●Remove bolts and bracket。

Attention
ABS hydraulic control unit has been adjusted
and settled, please do not try to disassemble or
repair it
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 164
P
CO
Anti-lock brake system (for the vehicle with ABS)
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

Install the ABS hydraulic control unit
● Install the ABS hydraulic control unit on the bracket
Notice
The brake fluid is extremely destructive to
paints and plastics, with fiendishly corrosive
effects. If carelessly splash the brake fluids onto
any parts, must remove thoroughly immediately.
●Fix and tighten the bolt [A] onto the frame
● Rout the cable in proper location, and connect the

connector [A]
○ Fix the connector [B] as shown.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 165
P
CO
● Install the brake hoses properly as shown

●Tighten the nuts
The tightening torque of the fixing bolts：18 N·m
● Bleed air inside the brake hoses. (refer to the chapter
“Bleed air inside the brake hoses”)
● Check the brake performance whether normal or not,
and make sure there is no leakage.
● Install the removed parts.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 166
P
CO

Check the ABS hydraulic control unit
● Disassemble the ABS hydraulic mudulator. ( refer to
“Disassemble the ABS hydraulic control unit”)
● Visual check the ABS hydraulic control unit.
★ If any crack or damage, replace with a new one
● Visual check the connector pins [A].
★ If the pins are damaged or bent, replace with a new
one.
★ If the connector was blocked by mud or dust, clean
it with compressed air.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 167
P
CO

Remove the front speed sensor
Notice
Never hit the speed sensor with hammer and
keep it from falling on the ground as it is a very
precise component and must be cautiously
treated.
Do not disassemble or maintain the speed
sensor!
●Remove：
Bolt [A]、
Clamp、
Front speed sensor [B]
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 168
P
CO

Install the front speed sensor
●For installation, reverse the removal procedure
○Route the cable properly（Refer to
“appendix”—“cable, wire and hose routing”）
Remove the rear speed sensor

Notice
Never hit the speed sensor with hammer and
keep it from falling on the ground as it is a very
precise component and must be cautiously
treated.
Do not disassemble or maintain the speed
sensor!
●Remove：
Seat cushion
● Disconnect the connector [A]
o @
c nic
e
●Remove：
e p.t
Clamp
- d
Bolt [A]、
ins
r t
Ma
Rear speed sensor [B]
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 169
P
CO

Install the rear speed sensor
●For installation, reverse the removal procedure
○ Route the cable properly（Refer to
“appendix”—“cable, wire and hose routing”）
Speed sensor inspection
●Remove the front speed sensor [A]
● Remove the rear speed sensor [B]
●Visual check the sensors
★If any crack, deformation or damage, replace with a
new one.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 170
P
CO

Check the clearance between speed sensor and sensor rotor
● Lift the front/rear wheel away from the ground（Refer
to "wheel/tire”—“remove front wheel/rear wheel”）
● Slowly rotate the wheel, measure the clearance value
in several different position
Feeler gauge [A]
Standard clearance value：

Front 0.5 ∼ 1.2 mm
Rear 0.5 ∼ 1.2 mm
Remark
○The clearance is unadjustable
★ If the clearance is out of specification, check the

bearing of the rim ( Refer to “wheel/tire”—“check
the bearing of the rim”), speed sensor installation and
their function (Refer to “sensor rotor inspection”)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 171
P
CO

Sensor rotor inspection
●Remove：
Wheel（Refer to “wheel/tire”—“remove front
wheel/rear wheel”）
Bolts [A]、
Sensor rotor [B]
● Visual check the sensor rotor

★ If any deformation or broken (such as the tooth has a
notch [A]), replace with a new one
★ If any foreign material such as burr or other
magnetic deposits [B] sticking to the ring, clean it.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 172
P
CO
Exchange brake fluid and refill

The brake fluid suggested to be replace every two years.
Apply the vacuum pump to exhaust the air inside the
calipers, hoses and ABS hydraulic control unit when
exchanging brake fluid.
ABS brake fluid exchange procedure：

 Open the fluid reservoir cap
 Connect the vacuum pump with caliper bleeding
valve
 Start the vacuum pump
 Unscrew the bleeding valve nut
 Connect with diagnostic tool and press the
button on the tool to start bleeding brake fluid
until all brake fluid is bled out.
 Fill brake fluid into the reservoir continuously,
o @
nic
start the vacuum pump, make sure that the brake
fluid in the reservoir will not be exhausted.
ec
 Press the button on the diagnostic tool to start
e p.t
filling
- d
 Operate and release the brake lever/pedal
ins
r t
Ma
quickly for several times during the filling
process, tighten the bleeding valve nut after
finishing the filling. d re
 Operate and release the brake lever/pedal
xan
quickly for several times again until getting
A le
proper brake performances
A -
 lS
If the brake lever/pedal response soft, it means
a
ug
the air bleeding is not complete, should repeat
o rt
the work until getting proper brake performance.
 r P
o to
When exchanging the brake fluid for FL&FR
calipers, do the bleed & refill process from the
M
to
end of the fluid channel first, then do the same
o
lt i m
process on the other side, then return to the end
M u
Y - 173
P
CO
channel to repeat the process again.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 174
P
CO
Front suspension
Disassembly of front shock absorber
No. Name and specifications Quantity No. Name and specifications Quantity No. Name and specifications Quantity
o @
1
Front right shock absorber
components
1 11 Upper connecting plate 1 21
Left hydraulic brake
cable clight
1
c nic
e
p.t
Front left shock absorber Fastening nut of Right hydraulic brake
2 1 12 1 22 1
components upper connecting plate cable clight
3 Bolt M8×1.25×25 10 13 Gland nut 1 23 Screw M10×1.25×40 4
de
4
Fastening screw of
1 14 Dust ring 2 24 Bolt M6×30 2 s -
upper connecting plate
Lower connecting plate
r tin
Ma
5 Upper holder block 1 15 Steering bearing 2 25 1
components
6 Lower base of handlebar 2 16 Column 1
7 Silencer plug 4 17 Lock ring 1
d re
8 Handle positioning gasket
Handle positioning
2 18 Screw M6×14
Hydraulic brake cable
2
xan
9
double-end stud
10 Self-locking nut M10×1.25
2
2
19
clight
20 Lower connecting plate
1
1 A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 175
P
CO
Front suspension/front fork
Disassembly of front fork
The following procedures are applicable to two front shock components.
Parking: Park the motorcycle at the flat ground.
Note
Support the motorcycle using suitable bracket, to lift the front wheel easily.
Disassembly
Front brake caliper (see the steps in the section “front and rear brake”)
Front wheel (see the steps in the section “front wheel and front brake disc”)
Front fender (see the steps in the section “covering parts/front fender”)
Disassembly
Release fastening screw (3) from
upper connecting plate (11), Fig. A
Release fastening screw (3) from
lower connecting plate (20), Fig. B
Important
Before releasing the fastening screws on
lower connecting plates, first disassemble the o @
support on upper front shock absorber.
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 176
P
CO
Front suspension/front shock absorber
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Note: The following steps are applicable to two
Ma
front shock absorber
d re
Disassembly
xan
Release front shock absorbing bolt (1), Fig. A
A le
Important: Front shock absorbing spring is A -
compressed. alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 177
P
CO
Pushdown:
After pressing the spring using special tooling,
disassemble front shock absorbing bolt (1) and nut (B)
using wrench, Fig. B
Note:
This is right shock absorber, the left shock absorber
bolt is not equipped with adjustment lever (X), and
the disassembly method is the same.
Slide out from sleeve, Fig. C:

Buffer block and adjusting sleeve seat (L)
Adjusting sleeve (M)
Spring seat (N)
Shock absorbing spring (8)
o @
nic
Releasing:
Release rod from clight
ec
Pour shock absorbing oil into the container with
e p.t
proper volume, Fig. D Note - d
To help to drain the oil in shock absorber, push the ins
r t
Ma
pump lever (15) to move forwards and backwards,
Fig. D
d re
Important
xan
This operation can only be conducted after draining
A le
the oil in shock absorber.
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 178
P
CO
Lock support (A) in the clight, Fig. E
Disassembly
Screw (18), gasket (17), damping cylinder (15)
Important
This operation can only be conducted after draining
the oil in shock absorber.
Disassembly
Disassemble the dust ring (14) from base using one
small flathead screwdriver. Fig. F
Disassembly
Disassemble closing ring using the same
screwdriver, Fig. G
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
Sliding out:
- d
Slide the inner pipe B of shock absorber from the
ins
outer cylinder (10) of front shock absorber, Fig. H r t
Note Ma
To separate these two parts, pull them with a small d re
force
xan
Oil seal (12)
A le
Positioning ring (11)
Lower guide sleeve (8) A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 179
P
CO
Manual disassembly
Upper guide sleeve (6), Fig. I
Note
If it is difficult to operate, use flathead screwdriver in
the cylinder slot of shock absorber to make it easy.
Lower guide sleeve (8)
Oil seal (12)
Closing ring (13)
Dust ring (14)
Note
If oil seal and dust ring has been disassembled, they cannot be reused.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 180
P
CO
Check of front shock absorber
The following steps are applicable to two front shock
absorbers.
Check:
Shock absorber A, Fig. A
Outer cylinder of shock absorber (10)
If there is deformation / damage /wear, please replace
Warning
If the internal pipe of shock absorber is bent, do not
try to straighten it, because this may cause the internal
pipe of shock absorber become weak with time and
result in great danger.
Measurement: Full length (B) of spring (5)

(uncompressed state).
If it exceeds the specifications, please replace
Item Standard Lower

deformation limit
Front shock 310mm 300mm
absorbing spring
o @
Check: c nic
e
Damping cylinder (15), Fig. C
e p.t
If there is any damage or wear, please replace.
- d
If there is any block, blow out the entire oil passage with compressed air.
ins
Important r t
When disassembling or reinstalling front shock absorber, do not let foreign bodies enter the shock absorber. Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 181
P
CO
Assembly of front shock absorber
The following steps are applicable to two front shock
absorbers.
Important
After disassembly, oil seal and dust ring cannot be
reused.
Before reinstallation, check the situation of sleeve
and guide; check guide; if there is pattern or scratch,
replace it.
Cover the end of internal shock absorbing pipe with
tape, Fig. A
In this way, cover sleeve base.
Slightly lubricate lower oil seal and dust ring with
grease.
Insert dust ring, Fig. B
Dust ring (14)
Closing ring (13)
Oil seal (12)
Lower guide sleeve (8)
Important
Pay attention to the orientation of oil seal (12).
o @
Disassemble the tape at the end of internal shock
c nic
absorbing pipe, and remove the remaining mark.
e
Insert the following part with hands: upper guide
e p.t
sleeve (6), Fig. C
Insert the internal shock absorbing pipe into the - d
sleeve slowly, so as not to damage the guide sleeve. ins
r t
Ma
Inserting simultaneously d re
Lower guide sleeve, until the sleeve contacts with the xan
front fork, Fig. D
A le
Positioning ring
A -
Oil seal
And then install them in the base of outer shock absorbing pipe. alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 182
P
CO
Assembly:
Install the closing ring (13) on the oil seal with a small
flathead screwdriver, ensure that it is properly inserted
to the special rail, and pay attention to not damage the
front internal shock absorbing pipe, Fig. E
And then put the following parts into the base:

Install dust ring (14) through pulling with hands, Fig.
F
Inserting:
Insert the assembled damping cylinder (15) to outer

cylinder (10), Fig. G
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
Assembly: - d
ins
Install the internal shock absorbing pipe on support, r t
and clight the support with bench clight. Fig. H
Ma
Fasten shock absorbing tube and support with gasket
(17) and socket head screw (18), and fasten it to the d re
following torque using socket head wrench
xan
A le
Torque 22N*m
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 183
P
CO
Add 400mL of 32# shock absorbing oil with
graduated container, Fig. I
Lift the entire outer cylinder of shock absorber, use

graduated measuring container, prepare the correct
amount of oil and pour it into the rod, pour about 2/3 of
oil into fork cylinder (A), and then move the rod to
exhaust air. Fig. I
Continue to pour, until the required number is reached.
o @
c nic
e
Assembly: e p.t
Install the following components on the outer cylinder of - d
shock absorber, Fig. J ins
r t
Ma
Shock absorbing spring (8)
Spring seat (N)
Adjusting sleeve (M)
d re
Buffer block and adjusting sleeve seat (L)
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 184
P
CO
Assembly:
Press the spring with special tooling, apply a proper

amount of thread sealant (1261# glue), and lock it with
wrench, Fig. K
Fasten it to the following torque:
Torque 16-18N*m
Assembly:
Fasten upper bolt (1) using wrench, and lock it, Fig. M
Fasten it to the following torque:
Torque 18-20N*m
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 185
P
CO
Assembly: Outer cylinder of shock absorber

(A), Fig. A
Temporary fastening
Fasten anti-locking screw (3) to lower connecting
plate, Fig. A
Note
Check assembly position X, as shown in Fig. B
Assembly position (X)
204.5mm
Fastening: Fasten anti-locking screw (3) to lower
connecting plate (7); the torque is as follows:
Torque 22N*m
o @
Note c nic
e
The assembly is divided into three steps
e p.t
Assemble upper connecting plate, insert backing
- d
plate at the opening (Y), so as to simply insert front
ins
shock absorber, Fig. C
r t
Fasten: Install lock screw (3) to upper connecting
plate (9), and the torque is as follows: Ma
d re
Torque 22N*m xan
A le
Important
A -
Ensure that the path of brake hose is correct.
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 186
P
CO
Control
Control disassembly
1 Throttle cable assembling stand 1 13 Chrottle cable component II 1
2 Throttle grip 1 14 Right rearview mirror component 1
o @
nic
3 2×18 cotter pin 1 15 Left rearview mirror component 1
4 6×14 hinge pin 1 16 M6×35 socket head screw 2
ec
p.t
5 Right combined switch 1 17 Spring washer 6 2
6 Balance block 2 18 Washer 6 2
de
7 Handlebar 1 19 Balance block assembling stand 2
s -
8 Left combined switch 1 20 Balance weight 2
r tin
Ma
9 Left grip 1 21 Clutch handle 1
10 Clutch handle assembly 1 22 Globe valve soft clight 3
11 Clutch cable component 1 23 Soft clight
d re2
12 Chrottle cable component I 1 24 Release lever
xan 1
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 187
P
CO
Control/control
Control disassembly
Park the motorcycle on flat ground.
Important
Support the motorcycle with appropriate parking rack, so that it will not topple.
Remove the screw (16), gasket (18) and spring washer (17)
Remove the balance weight (20)
Remove the balance weight assembling stand (19) and the balance weight (6)
Removal: Remove the left grip (9) from the handle,

and blow compressed air into the handle with a
flathead screwdriver. Fig. A
Note
Blow compressed air directly between the left side of
the handle and its grip, so the handle can be slipped off
gently.
Remove the left combined switch
Remove the clutch cabe component
Remove the rearview mirror and the adjusting nut
Remove the fixed cap on the clutch handle assembly

by unscrewing the two fastening screws on the clutch
handle assembly, and then disassemble the clutch
handle assembly.
o @
Repeat the same procedures for the right-hand grip,
c nic
until the throttle grip is removed, and in this case,
e
screws on the throttle cable assembling stand must be
removed, so that the throttle grip can be removed. e p.t
- d
Remove the throttle cable component I and throttle
ins
cable component II r t
Ma
Remove the right combined switch
d re
Unscrew the two fastening screws (8), remove the
xan
fixed cap on the oil pump (17), and then remove the oil
pump component of the front dydraulic brake A le
component. Fig. B
A -
Loosen the four fastening screws (A) of the lock block a lS
on the handle (B), and remove the handle. Fig. C ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 188
P
CO
Control
Control check
Check:
Handlebar (7). Fig. D
If there is bend/ breakage/damage, please replace
it.
Warning
If the handle is bent, do not try to pull it straight,
because the handle will become weak and this
action is dangerous.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 189
P
CO
Control
Control assembly
Prepare for the assembly, and conduct it in the
reverse procedures of dissembly, but pay attention
to the following contents:
Assembly:
Install the switches on the right combined switch
(5) and left combined switch (8) handles. Align
them with the projectied part A of the switch. Hole
B is on the right and left handle. Fig. E
Tighten the two screws (8) on the fixed cap of the
oil pump (17), as shown in Fig. B, according to the
following torque.
Torque 8N*m
Note
Place the UP upwards when assembling the fixed
cap on the oil pump. Fig. F. Fasten the screws on
it.
There should be a clearance of 2mm between the
right handle switch and the pump.
Assembly:
When holding the left grip, apply a thin layer of
rubber adhesive at the end of the handlebar.
Slide the left grip to the handlebar. Ends of the left grip and the handlebar should be in a line.
Remove all traces of rubber adhesive with clean cloth.
Important @
o
nic
Do not touch the left grip until the rubber adhesive
is completely dry.
ec
Assemble:
e p.t
Handle
When assemble the handle, put the handle in the - d
correct position, as shown in Fig. G, on the fourth ins
r t
Ma
reference mark X.
Tighten the two screws (C) near the fuel tank at the
back first, and then tighten two screws (A) near the
d re
instrument in the front
Tighten the screws according to the following torque xan
A le
Torque 22N*m
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 190
P
CO
Control/handlebar
Disassembly of handlebar fixing stand
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
3 M8×1.25×25 blolt 4 10 M10×1.25 self-locking nut 2
ins
4
Tightening screw on the upper
1 11 Upper connecting plate 1 r t
connecting plate
Tightening nut on the upper
Ma
5 Upper holder block 1 12
connecting plate d re1
6 Lower base of the handlebar 2 13 Gland nut
x an 1
7 Silencer plug 4 14 le
Scraper seal
A 2
8 Locating washer of the handlebar 2 15 - bearing
Steering
A
2
9 Locating stud of the handlebar 2 25
S
Lower connecting
l
plate component 1
g a
rt u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 191
P
CO
Control/handlebar
Important
Support the motorcycle with appropriate parking
rack, so that it will not topple without the front
fork.
Diassemble:
Stop screws on the upper connecting plate (3). Fig.
A
Diassembly:
Disassemble the tightening screws on the upper
connecting plate with special tools. Fig. B
o @
nic
Loosen:
Tightening nut on the upper connecting plate
ec
Gland nut
e p.t
Locking tool used for locknuts of the steering head.
Fig. C - d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 192
P
CO
Control/handlebar
Check:
Steering bearing (13). Fig. A
Scraper seal (12). 图 A
If there is any damage, replace them.
Replace
Bearing
Bearing rail
Remove the bearing outer ring (A) from the
headstock tube of the motorcycle frame with a pole
and a hammer (B). Fig. B
Remove the bearing inner ring (C) from the pillar
with a chisel (D) and a hammer. Fig. B
Install a new rubber gasket and new bearing.
Important
If the bearing outer ring is not installed properly, the headstock tube will be damaged.
Note
o @
nic
Bearing ball and the bearing inner ring should be replaced together.
Each time the steering bearing is disassembled, a new rubber gasket should be installed.
ec
Check:
e p.t
Upper steering bearing
- d
Lower steering bearing (and the bushing)
ins
If there is any bend/crack/damage, replace them.
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 193
P
CO
Control/handlebar
Lubricate:
Bearing ball, Fig. A
Bearing outer ring, Fig. A
Bearing inner ring, Fig. A
Note: Use lithium base grease on the steering
bearing to prevent rust.
Assembly: assemble nuts on the steering ring
with special tools according to the following torque:
Torque 16N*m
Tighten the locknuts on the steering bushing.

Important
Do not over-tighten the steering ring nuts.
Tighten the steering ring nuts with special tools to the
following torque:
Torque 60N*m
Assembly: assemble the front shock absorber according to the above description.
Assembly: tighten the fastening screw on the upper connecting plate (4) with special tools to the following
torque:
o @
c nic
Torque 60N*m
e
e p.t
Steering head wench - d
Fasten the stop screw on the upper connecting plate
ins
(3), as shown in Fig. B, according to the following r t
torque: Ma
d re
Torque 22N*m
xan
Check: Steering sleeve, Fig. C
A le
Seize the end of the pipe, and rotate the front fork
A -
lS
gently. If it is stuck/loose, adjust the steering.
g a
rt u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 194
P
CO
Rear shock absorber
Disassembly of rear shock absorber
No. Name and specifications Quantity

Rear shock absorber
1 1
component
Lower fixing bolts of the rear
2 1
shock absorber
Lower decorating cushion of
3 1
the rear shock absorber
4
Fixing bolts of the shock
1
o @
nic
absorber
ec
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 195
P
CO
Rear shock absorber
Disassembly of rear shock absorber
Important
Support the motorcycle with appropriate
parking rack, so that it will not topple without
the rear shock absorber.
Disassemble:
Screw (16)
Bolt (18), Fig. A
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 196
P
CO
Rear shock absorber
Check of rear shock absorber
Check:
Rear shock absorber rod 9, Fig. B

If there is any bent/damage, replace the rear
shock absorber component.
Rear shock absorber cylinder 8, Fig.

B
If there is any gas/oil leakage, replace the rear
Rear shock absorber spring 7, Fig. B

If there is any damage/wear, replace the rear
Rear shock absorber scraper seal

If there is any damage or wear, replace it.
Bolt 4 and screw 2, Fig. B

If there is any bend/damage/wear, replace
them.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 197
P
CO
Rear shock absorber
Assembly of the rear shock absorber
Assembly:
Assemble the bolt (4), as shown in Fig C, and
tighten it to the following torque:
Torque 60N*m
Assemble the screw (2) and decorating

cushion (3) according to the following torque:
Torque 60N*m
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 198
P
CO
Drive chain and rear swing arm
Disassembly of drive chain
Important
Support the motorcycle with appropriate parking
rack, so that it will not topple and the rear wheel
can be lifted.
Remove:
Drive chain
(Use suitable tool for the drive chain (A), as
shown in Fig. A, or use special tool for drive
chain specified by the manufacturer)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 199
P
CO
Drive chain and rear swing arm
Check of drive chain
Check: drive chain, Fig. C

O-ring (B)
Replace the damaged drive chain
Drive chain roller (D)
Replace the damaged/worn drive chain
Side plate of the drive chain (C)
Replace the damaged/worn drive chain
If there are any cracks, replace the drive
chain.
Clean: drive chain, Fig. B

Use clean cloth to clean the drive chain.
Put the drive chain in neutral detergent and
remove all the dirt.
Take the drive chain out of the neutral
detergent and dry it thoroughly.
Important
This motorcycle is equipped with drive chain.
There is a rubber O-ring (B) between every
two chain plates.
Clean the drive chain. Do not use high
pressure water shower or air. Do not use
steam, gasoline, corrosive solvents (such as o @
petroleum ether) or excessively hard brush.
c nic
Using high pressure will make dust come into
e
the cavity of the drive chain, and corrosive
e p.t
solvents can cause deterioration of the O-ring.
O-ring will be damaged by excessively hard brush. - d
ins
Lubricate: drive chain r t
It is recommended that only white grease is used to lubricate the drive chain. Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 200
P
CO
Drive chain
Check of drive chain
Check: drive gear/rear serrated chain wheel.
Fig. A
If the wear of each tooth is more than 1/4 (4),
replace the drive chain and chain wheel
together.
If the the tooth is bent, replace the drive chain
and chain wheel together.
Note
Assemble a new chain, and its chain wheel
must not be worn.
Chain and chain wheel must be in good state, otherwise the new chain will be worn out quickly.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 201
P
CO
Drive chain
Replacement of the drive chain
Loosen: the drive chain
Loosen the transmission chain used by this chain and
the main link with safety side plate.
Use special tools according to the manufacturer
specification as well as the required type for use of
chain. There are three tools to disassemble the main
chain plate (A), assemble the side plate (B), and
fasten the pin on the side plate (C) in Fig. A
Warning
Never use old chain, main chain plate, main chain
side plate, or rubber O-ring.
Insert:
Main chain plate (A), Fig. B
Rubber O-ring (B), Figure B
Main chain side plate (C), Fig. B
Important
Insert the chain plate in transimission chain, then
assemble the side plate, and place the ID logo
outwards.
Fastening:
Press the the main chain side plate against the main
chain plate with tools for assembling the main chain
o @
side plate (B).
c nic
e
Clutch:
e p.t
Nail the pin in the main chain plate (C) with special
- d
tools. Fig. D
ins
Check: r t
There must be no openings on surfaces affected by
Ma
the nailed main chain plate.
If there is any opening, replace the main chain plate, d re
seal ring and side plate.
xan
Important A le
Never use transmission chain of the main chain plate
A -
with clights.
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 202
P
CO
Drive chain and rear swing arm/ rear swing arm
Assembly of the rear swing arm
Qua
No. Name and specifications
ntity
No. o @
1 Rear swing arm weld component 1 11 M6×19.2 screw 2
c nic
e
p.t
2 Rear swing arm outer spacer bush 2 12 Support sleeve 2
3
25×37×7 lip-type packing
2 13 M6×30 bolt
2
de
component
Rear hydraulic brake mounting s -
4 φ37 circlip for hole 2 14
plate component
1
r tin
5 NA4904 needle roller bearing 2 15 M6×14 screw 1
Ma
6 61904-2RS rolling bearing
Rear swing arm intermediate shaft
2 16 Speed sensor
d re
1
an
2
7 1 17 Chain adjusting block
8
sleeve
Rear swing arm assembling shaft 1 18 M8 chain adjusting screwle x 2
9 M20×1.5 self-locking nut 1 19 M8 nut - A 2
A
10 Chain protection block 1
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 203
P
CO
Rear swing arm
Assemble:
Rear swing arm component (A)
Rear swing arm shaft (8)
Arrange the rear swing arm components (A) in a
row on both sides of the rear swing arm shaft (8).
Insert the swing arm shaft (5) from the left side
of the motorcycle frame (C) to the right side.
Fig. A
Note
Use lithium base grease during assembly. Apply
it on inner bores at both ends of the rear swing
arm component (A). Fig. B
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
Screw the nut (9) on the rear swing arm shaft (8) ins
r t
Ma
which is fastened to the motorcycle frame, as
shown in Fig. C, according to the following
torque:
d re
xan
Torque 200N*m
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 204
P
CO
Rear swing arm
Assembly:
Install the right decorating plate (N) on the
motorcycle frame, and fix it with screws (L);
Install the left decorating plate (M) on the
motorcycle frame, and fix it with screws (L); as
shown in Fig. D, according to the following
torque:
Torque 10N*m
Assemble:
Rear shock absorber (see “rear shock absorber section”)
Rear wheel (see “rear wheel section”)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 205
P
CO
Frame
Frame assembly
1 Welded assembly of frame 1 16 Screw M6×12-8.8-ZG 4
2 Name plate of frame 1 17
Steel rope assembly of seat
1 o @
nic
cushion II
3 Rivet for name plate 3×6 2 18 Bolt M6×30 2
ec
p.t
Socket head cap screw Mounting plate assembly on rear
4 4 19 1
M10×22 fender
5 Bumper block 2 20 Bolt M6×1×16 4
de
6
Welded assembly of left
power connecting support
1 21 Bolt M6×1×20 4
s -
7
Welded assembly of right
1 22
Welded assembly of rear fender
1 r tin
Ma
power connecting support support
Socket head cap screw Left decorative cover
8 2 23 1
M10×1.25×45
Socket head cap screw
(electroplated silver C9)
Right decorative cover
d re
an
9 4 24 1
M10×30 (electroplated silver C9)
10 Elastic washer 10 4 25 x
Spongy cushion of storage battery
le 1
11
12
Self-locking nut M10×1.25
Backplate rubber cushion B
1
1
26
27 -
Screw M6×12
A
Assembly of cable clight II 1
2
13 Battery support II 1 28 A
Gray nylon 1
14 Battery support assembly I 1 29
a lS
Screw M6×15.2 1
15 12 30 ug Spongy cushion of storage battery
1
Rubber protecting ring
o rt 65×25×4
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 206
P
CO
Frame / engine assembly
Engine assembly
Important
Place the engine (B) on the appropriate liftable support
(C) so that the engine or parts will not fall down by
accident to injure the operators when assembling other
motorcycle parts, as shown in Fig. A.
Assembly:
Assemble the welded assemblies of left power
connecting support (6) and right power connecting
support (7) on the frame (1), and slightly screw on the
socket head cap screws (4) on both side of frame (1),
as shown in Fig. B.
o @
Assembly: c nic
e
Raise the engine (B), and screw on four socket head
e p.t
cap screws (9) fastened on the back of engine and
frame (1). - d
Screw on the rear upper left socket head cap screws (9) ins
r t
Ma
of the engine (B), as shown in Fig. C.
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 207
P
CO
Engine assembly
Assembly:
Screw on the rear upper right socket head cap screws (9)
of the engine (B), as shown in Fig. D.
Screw on the rear lower left socket head cap screws (9)
of the engine (B), as shown in Fig. E.
o @
c nic
Screw on the rear lower right socket head cap screws (9)
e
of the engine (B), as shown in Fig. F.
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 208
P
CO
Engine assembly
Assembly:
Screw on the socket head cap screws (8) for slightly
fixing the welded assembly of left power connecting
support (6) and engine (B), as shown in Fig. B.
Screw on the socket head cap screws (8) for slightly
fixing the welded assembly of right power connecting
support (7) and engine (B), as shown in Fig. B.
Tightening:
Fasten the engine mounting screws in order, and mark them after fastening.
1. Four rear socket head cap screws (9) of frame / engine, as shown in Fig. C, D, E and F.
2. Two welded assemblies of front-left frame / left power connecting support (6) and socket head cap screws
(4), as shown in Fig. B.
3. Two welded assemblies of front-right frame / right power connecting support (6) and socket head cap screws
4. One socket head cap screw of front-left engine (8), as shown in Fig. B.
5. One socket head cap screw of front-right engine (8), as shown in Fig. B.
Use the thread sealant at the end of thread. o @
c nic
e
e p.t
Tighten the fastening bolt to the following torque:
- d
ins
Torque: 45N*m r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 209
P
CO
Engine disassembly
Disassembly:
Conduct disassembly in inverse order to assembly.
Note:
Disassemble fastening screws from the front to back.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 210
P
CO
Frame / rear license plate support
Assembly of rear license plate support
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
1 Bolt M6×1×16 4
- d
2
Mounting plate assembly on rear
1
ins
fender
r t
3 Screw M6×12 2
Ma
4
Welded assembly of rear fender
support
1
d re
5 Bolt M6×1×20 4
xan
6 Nut M6
A 2 le
7 Bolt M6×1×16
A - 2
lS
8 Bolt M6×16 2
9 License plate holder
g a 1
rt u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 211
P
CO
Assembly of rear license plate support
Assembly:
Assemble the rear fender, and screw four
socket head cap screws (5) to the frame, as
shown in Fig. A.
Tighten the fastening bolt to the following
torque:
Torque: 10N*m
Screw two socket head cap screws (7) to the

license plate support (9), and assemble it to the
welded assembly of rear fender support (4), as
shown in Fig. B.
Tighten the fastening bolt to the following
torque:
o @
Torque: 10N*m
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Connect:
Ma
Rear steering light and license plate light wires.
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 212
P
CO
Disassembly of rear license plate support
Disassembly:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 213
P
CO
Frame / single stay
Assembly of single stay

1 Welded assembly of single stay 1
2 Fitting screw of single stay 1
3 Mounting washer of single stay 1
4 Spring assembly of single stay 1
5 Bolt M6×8 1
6 Socket head cap screw M10×30 1
7 Mounting plate sleeve of single stay 1
o @
8 Bolt M5×0.8×14 2
c nic
9 Flameout switch of single stay 1
e
10
Single stay Mounting support of
1
e p.t
single stay
- d
11 Thin nut M12×1.25 1
ins
12 Socket head cap screw M10×50 1
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 214
P
CO
Frame / single stay
Assembly of single stay
Assemble:
Assemble the single stay supporting plate (5) on the
frame using two fastening screws (X), as shown in Fig.
A.
Note:
Use the thread sealant at the end of thread.
Fasten two bolts to the following torque:
Torque: 45N*m
Assemble: inner screw (5) and outer screw (8).

Connect the flameout switch connector of single stay to the cable.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 215
P
CO
Frame / single stay
Disassembly of single stay
Disassembly:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 216
P
CO
Frame / left foot pedal
Assembly of left foot pedal
1 Front-left foot pedal support 1 17 Nut M6 2
Assembling bushing of foot
2 1 18 Bolt M5×0.8×18 1
pedal support
3
1 19 1
o @
nic
M10×22 Shift pedal lever
4 Rigging pin of foot pedal 2 20 Foot pedal of rear hydraulic brake 1
ec
p.t
5 Rear-left foot pedal 1 21 Rubber of shift pedal lever 1
6 Front foot pedal spring 1 22 Nut M6-8-ZG 1
de
7 Foot pedal ball 1 23 Connecting rod of shift level 1
s -
8 Mounting plate of foot pedal 1 24 Left nut M6 1
r tin
Ma
9 Closing ring φ5 2 25 M6 left connector 1
10 Left foot pedal 1 26 Screw M6×25-8.8-ZG 1
11 Fork bar 1 27 Sleeve
d re 1
12 Foot pedal spring 1 28 Assembly stand of shift lever
xan 1
13
14
Bolt M10×25
Self-lubricating bushing
2
1
29
30
Bolt M6×1×20
A
Rubber of left foot pedal
le 1
2
15 Bolt M6×30 1 31 A -
Rubber pad of left foot pedal 2
16 Connector 1 32 lS
Bolt M4×10
a 2
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 217
P
CO
Assembly of left foot pedal
Assemble:
Front-left foot pedal support (1), as shown in Fig.
A.
Note
Fasten two screws (3) and bolts (13) to the

following torque:
Torque: 45N*m
Note
Please replace the damaged left foot pedal rubber.
Assembly:
Assemble the mounting seat of shift lever (28) on the shift spline shaft of engine, and lubricate it using
lithium-based grease.
Fasten the fastening bolt (29) on the mounting base of shift lever.
o @
nic
Adjustment:
The distance between the connecting rod of shift level (23) and connectors (16) and (25) is 185mm, as shown in
ec
Fig. A.
e p.t
Note - d
If necessary, change this item according to the comfort of cyclists. ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 218
P
CO
Disassembly of front-left foot pedal
Disassembly:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 219
P
CO
Frame / right foot pedal
Assembly of front-right foot pedal
1 Front-right foot pedal support 1 14 Self-lubricating bushing 1
Assembling bushing of foot
2 1 15 Reset spring of brake pedal 1
pedal support
o @
nic
3 1 16 1
M10×22 Brake pedal lever
ec
p.t
Foot pedal of rear hydraulic
4 2 17 1
Rigging pin of foot pedal brake
de
5 Rear-right foot pedal 1 18 Rubber of shift pedal lever 1
s -
6
7
Front foot pedal spring
Foot pedal ball
1
1
19
20
Bolt M5×0.8×18
Upper spring pin
1
1 r tin
8 Mounting plate of foot pedal 1 21 Screw M6×1×16 1 Ma
9 Closing ring φ5 2 22 Connector M6 1re
10 Right foot pedal 1 23 Nut M6-8-ZG d
n 2
11 Fork bar 1 24 Right foot pedal rubber x
a 2
A
Rubber pad of right
l e
foot
12
Foot pedal spring
1 25
pedal - 2
13 Bolt M10×25 2 26
l SA
Bolt M4×10 2
g a
o rtu
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 220
P
CO
Assemble:
Front-right foot pedal support (1), as shown
in Fig. A.
Note
Fasten two screws (3) and bolts (13) to the

following torque:
Torque: 45N*m
Note
Please replace the worn right pedal foot
rubber (24).
Assembly:
Assemble the brake pedal lever (22) on the
supporting plate of foot pedal, insert the
first bushing (14) and then screw (13) after
greasing, as shown in Fig. B, and fasten it
to the following torque: o @
c nic
e
Torque: 45N*m
e p.t
- d
Assembly:
ins
r t
Ma
Fix the brake pedal lever (16) and ball connector (22) using the fastening screw (21), as shown in Fig. B, and
fasten it to the following torque:
d re
Torque: 10N*m
xan
A le
-
Assembly:
l SasAshown in Fig. B.
g a
Assemble the upper spring pin (20) on the front-right foot pedal support (1),
rt u
Assemble the reset spring of brake pedal (15) on the upper spring pin (20) of brake pedal lever (16).
P o
t o r
M o
o t o
lt i m
M u
-
PY 221
CO
Disassembly:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 222
P
CO
Muffler
Muffler assembly

1 Sealing gasket assembly of exhaust pipe 2
2 Nut M8 4
3 Exhaust pipe assembly 1
4 Graphite lining ring 1
5 Rear carrier screw II 1
o @
nic
6 Catalytic thermal protective plate 1
7 Combination screw M6×12 2
ec
8 Oxygen sensor 2
e p.t
9 Rubber boot II 3
- d
10 Backplate bushing 3
ins
11 Bolt M8×1.25×25 3
r t
12 Barrel assembly 1
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 223
P
CO
Muffler
Muffler
Exhaust system
Manifold Muffler body
Honeycomb catalyst Honeycomb catalyst

Sign: N12-1
Sign: N12-1 CCC noise emission and
control information
Honeycomb catalyst Honeycomb catalyst

Sign: C5390
European III noise
Sign: C5390
emission and control
information
Porous manifold [C] of oxygen

Manifold mark position [A] Mark position of muffler body
sensor [D]
The position of honeycomb catalyst [A]
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 224
P
CO
Muffler
Muffler disassembly
Parking: Park the motorcycle on a flat ground.
Note:
Support the motorcycle with an appropriate
stander to prevent it from tipping.
Disassembly:
Disassemble the nut fastening the flange of
exhaust pipe and engine, as shown in Fig. A.
Unscrew the socket head cap screw (5) on the

clight (20), as shown in Fig. B.
Disassemble the socket head cap screw (11) o @

fastening the muffler barrel, as shown in Fig. C.
c nic
e
p.t
Note:
Disassemble the right foot pedal followed by
de
disassembling the socket head cap screw (11) on
s -
the right (see Chapter IV “Frame / right foot pedal”
r tin
Ma
of “Motorcycle”).
Left d
Right
re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 225
P
CO
Muffler
Muffler assembly
Assembly:
Assemble the oxygen sensor (8) on the exhaust
pipe (3), as shown in Fig. A, and fasten it to the
following torque.
Torque: 40-60 N*m
Apply lubricating grease to two exhaust outlets

(B) of engine, and install the exhaust pipe gasket
Note
Apply lubricating grease to the exhaust pipe
gasket to keep it stuck on the engine exhaust
outlet, as shown in Fig. B.
o @
c nic
Slightly screw the nut (2) on the double-screw
e
bolt, as shown in Fig. C.
e p.t
Note - d
Conduct this operation for all double-screw bolts. ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 226
P
CO
Muffler
Muffler assembly
Assembly:
Assemble the graphite gasket (4) on the exhaust pipe, as
shown in Fig. D.
Note
Slightly screw the screw (5) in the clight (20), as shown
in Fig. D.
Assembly:
Insert the exhaust manifold in the muffler barrel to align
the bottom surface of graphite gasket (4) with the inlet
pipe surface of muffler barrel, as shown in Fig. E.
Assemble the muffler barrel. Assemble the rubber boot II

(9), backplate bushing (10) and then screw (11) on the
frame, and fasten it to the following torque.
o @
Torque: 22N*m c nic
e
e p.t
Fastening: Left Right
- d
Fasten the nut (2) at the exhaust port of engine, as shown in Fig. C, to the following torque. ins
r t
Ma
Torque: 25N*m
d re
an
Fasten the socket head cap screw (5) of clight (20), as shown in Fig. D, to the following torque.
x
A le
Torque: 22N*m
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 227
P
CO
Covering parts
Covering parts
No. Name and specifications Quantity No. Name and specifications Quantity o @
1 Front fender 1 15 Rear decorative plate of fairing
Rear decorative plate of left
1
1 c nic
2 Small front fender 1 16 e
p.t
fairing
3 Right power bottom cover 1 17 Right decorative plate of fuel tank 1
4 Gusset plate of power bottom cover 1 18 Left decorative plate of fuel tank 1 de
5 Left power bottom cover 1 19 Left decorative cap of frame 1
s -
6
7
Side reflector assembly
Left fuel tank guard
2
1
20
21
Right backplate
Right decorative plate
1
1 r tin
8 Inner baffle of left fuel tank guard 1 22 Sun visor of speedometer 1 Ma
9
Decorative plate of left fuel tank
guard
1 23 Lower cover of instrument
d re 1
Rear-right trail cover an

Decorative plate of right fuel tank 1
10 1 24
11
guard
Inner baffle of right fuel tank guard 1 25 Rear lower right trail
x
lecover 1
12 Right fuel tank guard 1 26 -
Seat cushion Aassembly 1
13
Rear decorative plate of right
1 27
S ARear armrest 1
alRear lower left trail cover

fairing
14 Fairing 1 28 1
rt ug
P o
t o r
M o
oto
lt im
M u
Y - 228
P
CO
Covering parts
Covering parts
o @
c nic
29 Rear-left trail cover 1 e
30 Front of rear fender 1
e p.t
31 Left backplate 1
- d
32 Left decorative plate 1
ins
33 Rear reflector 1 r t
34 Right piece of rear fender 1
Ma
35 Left piece of rear fender 1
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 229
P
CO
Covering parts / front fender
Assembly of front fender

1 Front fender 1
2 Screw M6×15.2 6
3 Screw M6×14 4
o @
nic
4 Mounting plate of front fender 2
5 Gray nylon 6
ec
6
7
T-type bushing 5×7×6×10×0.8
Nut M5
2
2 e p.t
8 Small front fender 1 - d
9 Bolt M5×0.8×14 2 ins
r t
Ma
10 Clighting nut for backplate assembly 1
11 Screw 5×12 1
12 Gasketφ5 1
d re
13 Spring washerφ5 1
xan
A le
-
l SA
a
rt ug
P o
t o r
M o
oto
ltim
M u
Y - 230
P
CO
Assembly of front fender
Assembly:
Assemble the front fender (1) and the small front
fender (8) together, as shown in Fig. A.
Assemble the mounting plate of front fender (4) and

their screws (3) at the bottom of two front forks, as
shown in Fig. A.
Assembly:
Assemble the front fender (1), small front fender (8) o @
and their fastening screws (2) on both sides, as
c nic
e
p.t
shown in Fig. C.
de
s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 231
P
CO
Disassembly of front fender
Disassembly:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 232
P
CO
Covering parts / rear fender
Assembly of rear fender

1 Right piece of rear fender 1
2 Left piece of rear fender 1
3 Front of rear fender 1
4 License plate holder 1
o @
nic
5 Rear license plate 1
6 Nut M6 2
ec
7 Bolt M6×1×16 2
e p.t
8
9
Bolt M6×16
Rubber cushion of rear fender I
2
1 - d
10 Decorative screw M6×25 1 ins
r t
Ma
11 Nut M6 1
12 Ring nut M6 1
13 Rear reflector 1
d re
14 Gasketφ5 2
xan
15 Spring washerφ5
A
2
le
16
17
Nut M5
Fixing plate of rear reflector A - 2
1
18 Basic tool bandage
a lS 1
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 233
P
CO
Assembly:
Assemble the right piece of rear fender (1), left piece of
rear fender (2) and the welded assembly of rear fender
support (D) together, as shown in Fig. A.
Install the license plate holder (4), rear reflector (3), rear
left and right steering lights (R) and rear plate light (T)
on the rear backplate assembly, as shown in Fig. A.
Install the front of rear fender (3) on the motorcycle, as

shown in Fig. B. o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 234
P
CO
Assembly:
Screw four screws (5) into the assembled rear
fender, and assemble it on the frame, as
shown in Fig. A.
Fasten four screws to the following torque:
Torque: 10N*m
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 235
P
CO
Disassembly of rear fender
Disassembly:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 236
P
CO
Assembly of covering parts / rear lower fender and chain cover
Assembly of rear lower fender and chain cover
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
1 Rear lower fender 1
- d
2 Screw M6×15.2 5
ins
3 Chain cover 1
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 237
P
CO
Covering parts / rear lower fender and chain cover
Assembly:
Assemble the rear lower fender (1) on the rocker arm,
and assemble their fastening screws (2), as shown in
Fig. A and B.
Note:
Fasten three screws to the following torque:
Torque: 10N*m
Assemble: o @
Assemble the chain cover (3) on the rocker arm, and c nic
e
assemble their fastening screws (2), as shown in Fig.
C. e p.t
- d
Note:
ins
r t
Ma
Fasten two screws to the following torque:
Torque: 10N*m d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 238
P
CO
Covering parts / lower rear fender and chain cover
Disassembly:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 239
P
CO
Covering parts / fuel tank guard and power bottom cover
Assembly of fuel tank guard and power bottom cover
Quantit
y
1 Left fuel tank guard 1
2 Right fuel tank guard 1
3 Decorative plate of left fuel tank guard 1
o @
nic
4 Decorative plate of right fuel tank guard 1
5 Inner baffle of left fuel tank guard 1
ec
6
7
Inner baffle of right fuel tank guard
Left power bottom cover
1
1 e p.t
8 Right power bottom cover 1 - d
9 Gusset plate of power bottom cover 1
ins
r t
Ma
10 Self-tapping screw ST4.2×13 17
11 Card ST4.2 4
12 Screw M6×14 2
d re
13 Side reflector assembly 2
xan
14 Nut M5
A
2
le
15
16
Tin foil paper of power bottom cover
Screw M6×15.2 A - 1
6
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 240
P
CO
Assembly of fuel tank guard
Assembly:
Assemble the left fuel tank guard (1), decorative plate
of left fuel tank guard (3), inner baffle of left fuel tank
guard (5) and side reflector assembly (13) together
using the self-tapping screw (10), as shown in Fig. A.
Assemble the right fuel tank guard (2), decorative

plate of right fuel tank guard (4), inner baffle of right
fuel tank guard (6) and side reflector assembly (13)
together using the self-tapping screw (10), as shown
in Fig. B.
Assemble the assembled left fuel tank guard assembly

(A) on the motorcycle, as shown in Fig. C. o @
Fasten the screw (17) to the following torque:
c nic
e
Torque: 10N*m e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Assemble the assembled right fuel tank guard
Ma
assembly (B) on the motorcycle, as shown in Fig. D. d re
Fasten the screw (17) to the following torque:
xan
A le
Torque: 10N*m
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 241
P
CO
Assembly of power bottom cover
Assembly:
Stick the tin foil paper of power bottom cover (15) on the
gusset plate of power bottom cover (9), as shown in Fig.
A.
Assemble the left power bottom cover (7), right power

bottom cover (8) and gusset plate of power bottom cover
(9) together using the self-tapping screw (10), as shown
in Fig. B.
Assemble the assembled power bottom cover assembly

on the motorcycle using the screw (16), as shown in Fig.
C.
Left
o @
Note:
c nic
Fasten the screw to the following torque: e
e p.t
Torque: 10N*m
Right
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
Middle
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 242
P
CO
Disassembly of fuel tank guard and power bottom cover
Disassembly:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 243
P
CO
Covering parts / backplate
Backplate assembly
Quantit Quanti
No. Name and specifications No. Name and specifications
y ty
1 Left backplate 1 14 Rear carrier screw I 4
o @
nic
2 Right backplate 1 15 Ring nut M6 1
3 Left decorative plate 1 16 Stainless screw M6×25 4
ec
p.t
4 Right decorative plate 1 17 Bushing on radiator 4
5
Left decorative plate of fuel
1 18 Backplate rubber cushion 4 de
tank
s -
6
Right decorative plate of
fuel tank
1 19
Self-tapping screw
ST4.2×13
20
r tin
7 Rear lower left trail cover 1 20 Card ST4.2 4 Ma
8 Rear lower right trail cover 1 21 Screw M6×14
d
4
re
9
10
Rear-left trail cover
Rear-right trail cover
1
1
22
23
Rear-left cover assembly
Bolt M6×30 xan 1
4
11 Left decorative cap of frame 1 24
A
Screw M6×20 le 4
12 Seat cushion assembly 1 25 -
Screw M6×15.2
A 3
13
Rear armrest (matte black
1 26
a lS
Crystal sticker 1
BG)
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 244
P
CO
Backplate assembly
Assembly:
Assemble the left decorative plate of fuel tank (5) on
the fuel tank using the screw (21), as shown in Fig. A.
Note:
Fasten the screw to the following torque:
Torque: 10N*m
Assemble the right decorative plate of fuel tank (6) on

the fuel tank using the screw (21), as shown in Fig. B.
Note:
Torque: 10N*m
Assemble the right backplate (2) on the frame using

the screws (21) and (24), as shown in Fig. C.
o @
nic
Note:
Fasten three screws to the following torque:
ec
e p.t
Torque: 10N*m - d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 245
P
CO
Backplate assembly
Assembly:
Assemble the rear lower left trail cover (7) with the
rear-left trail cover (9) using the self-tapping screw (19),
as shown in Fig. D.
Assemble the assembled rear lower left trail cover and

rear-left trail cover on the frame using the screw (16),
bushing (17) and backplate rubber cushion (18), as
shown in Fig. E.
Torque: 10N*m
Assemble the rear lower right trail cover (8) and the
rear-right trail cover (10) using the self-tapping screw
(19), as shown in Fig. F. o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 246
P
CO
Backplate assembly
Assembly:
Assemble the assembled rear lower left trail cover and
rear-left trail cover on the frame using the screw (16),
bushing (17) and backplate rubber cushion (18), as
shown in Fig. G.
Note:
Torque: 10N*m
Assemble the left backplate (1) on the frame using the

screw (24), as shown in Fig. H.
Torque: 10N*m
Assemble the rear armrest (13) on the frame using the

screw (14), as shown in Fig. J.
o @
nic
ec
Torque: 22N*m
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 247
P
CO
Backplate disassembly
Disassembly:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 248
P
CO
Covering parts / fairing
Fairing assembly
No. Name and specifications Quantity o @

1 Lower cover of instrument 1
c nic
e
p.t
2 Sun visor of speedometer 1
3 Fairing 1
de
4 Self-tapping screw ST4.2×13 11
s -
5
6
Card ST4.2
Self-tapping screw ST4.2×16
2
2 r tin
7 Rear decorative plate of left fairing 1 Ma
8 Rear decorative plate of right fairing 1
d re
9 Rear decorative plate of fairing 1
xan
10
11
Bandage 150MM
Spongy cushion 1 A
1
le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 249
P
CO
Fairing assembly
Preassembly: as shown in Fig. A
and B.
Assemble the rear decorative plate of right
fairing (8) and rear decorative plate of left
fairing (7) on the fairing (3).
Assemble the sun visor of speedometer (2) on
the lower cover of instrument (3). 批注 [003]: 号码与上表不符
Assemble the headlight (A), instrument (B) and
preassembled parts together.
o @
cnic
e
e p.t
- d
Assembly:
ins
r t
Ma
Please see the chapter of “Replacement of headlight bulb”.
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 250
P
CO
Fairing assembly
Disassembly:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 251
P
CO
Lights
Replacement of lights
Name and
No. Name and specifications Quantity No. Quantity
specifications
Stainless steel screw
1 Headlight 1 13 2
M6×30
2 Headlight cushion cover 2 14 Front left steering light 1 o @
3
Lower assembling spacer of
headlight
1 15
Front right steering
light
1
c nic
e
p.t
Lower assembling plate of
4 1 16 Rear left steering light 1
headlight
Hexagon socket button Rear right steering de
5
head screw
1 17
light
1
s -
6
7
Nut M6
Bolt M6×1×16
3
2
18
19
Taillight
Sleeving nut M6
1
1 r tin
8 Stainless steel screw M6×25 2 20 Rear license plate light 1
Ma
9
Upper bush of radiator
4 21
Self-tapping screw
ST4.2×13
d re2
10
Rubber cushion of guard
plate
4 22
Cable clamp
components II
xan 2
11
Upper assembling plate of
headlight
1 23
A
Screw M6×20 le 1
12 Instrument assembly 1
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 252
P
CO
Lights/rear taillight
Replacement of rear taillight
Replacement of rear taillight
The light source of rear taillight is LED; replace the

entire light when required.
(1) Disassemble seat cushion.

(2) Disassemble the fixing screw of rear handle (1), and
then take down the handle.
(1) Disassemble fixing screw (2).
(2) Disassemble fixing nut (3). o @

(3) Disassemble the cable of rear taillight, take down
c nic
the damaged lights and replace new rear taillight.
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
Assembly:
xan
Install light in inverse order to disassembly.
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 253
P
CO
Lights/front steering light
Replacement of front steering light
Replacement of front steering light

1. Operate according to the prompts in the section

“Replacement of headlight bulbs”
2. Disassemble the fixing screw ① of left or right
steering light.
3. Disassemble the cable of front steering light,
take down the damaged light and replace new
front steering light.
Assembly:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 254
P
CO
Lights/rear steering light
Replacement of rear steering light
Replacement of rear steering light

1. Disassemble the fixing nut (1) of left or right

steering light from the back of rear license
plate.
2. Disassemble the cable of rear steering light,
take down the damaged lights and replace new
rear steering light,.
Assembly:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 255
P
CO
Chapter V Engine
Cylinder head and cylinder head cover of engine.............................................................................................. 258
Exploded view .......................................................................................................................................... 258
Technical parameters ................................................................................................................................ 261
Special tools and sealants ......................................................................................................................... 262
Cylinder head cover .................................................................................................................................. 264
Camshaft timing chain tensioner .............................................................................................................. 267
Camshaft and camshaft timing chain ........................................................................................................ 269
Cylinder cover .......................................................................................................................................... 275
Valve ......................................................................................................................................................... 280
Fixator of throttle valve body ................................................................................................................... 291
Clutch................................................................................................................................................................ 292
Breakdown drawing .................................................................................................................................. 292
Special tools and fastening adhesives ....................................................................................................... 294
Right cover ............................................................................................................................................... 295
Clutch........................................................................................................................................................ 297
Engine lubrication system................................................................................................................................. 303
Engine oil flow diagram ........................................................................................................................... 305
Special tools and fastening adhesives ....................................................................................................... 307
Engine oil and engine oil filter ................................................................................................................. 308
Oil pan ...................................................................................................................................................... 309
o @
Engine oil pump ........................................................................................................................................ 311
Engine oil pressure relief valve ................................................................................................................ 313 c nic
e
Measurement of engine oil pressure ......................................................................................................... 314
Engine oil pressure switch ........................................................................................................................ 315 e p.t
Crankshaft / transmission gear .......................................................................................................................... 317 - d
in s
Technical parameters ................................................................................................................................ 320 r t
Special tools and fastening adhesives ....................................................................................................... 323 Ma
re
Crankcase.................................................................................................................................................. 324
d
an
Crankshaft and connecting rod ................................................................................................................. 331
le x
Piston ........................................................................................................................................................ 344
Electric start .............................................................................................................................................. 350
- A
Variable gear............................................................................................................................................. 354
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 256
P
CO
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 257
P
CO
Cylinder head and cylinder head cover of engine
Cylinder head and cylinder head cover
Exploded view
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 258
P
CO
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 259
P
CO
Exploded view
Torque
No. Fastener Remark
N·m kgf·m ft·lb
1 Ignition coil set bolt 12 1.2 106in·lb L
2 Positioning bolt 12 1.2 106in·lb L
3 Camshaft sprocket fixing bolt 20 2.0 14.75 L
4 Camshaft briquetting bolt 12 1.2 106in·lb S
5 Intake pipe erection bolt 12 1.2 106 in·lb L
6 Thermostat cover erection bolt 12 1.2 106 in·lb L
7 Cylinder head bolt component (M10) 55 5.5 40.56 S、MO
8 Cylinder cover bolt (M6) 12 1.2 106 in·lb L
9 Tensioner fixing bolt 12 1.2 106in·lb L
10 Tensioner sealing bolt 12 1.2 106 in·lb
11 Spark plug 13 1.3 115 in·lb
12 Water jacket plug 20 2.0 14.75
G: Apply lubricating grease.
L: Apply thread fastening glue.
M: Apply lubricating grease containing molybdenum disulfide
MO: Apply oil solution containing molybdenum disulfide.
(Ratio of engine oil and lubricating grease containing molybdenum disulfide in weight: 10: 1)
R: Replace parts
S: Comply with the specified tightening order.
SS: Apply silicone sealant
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 260
P
CO
Technical parameters
Item Standard Operating limit
Camshaft
Cam height:
Exhaust valve 32.455 ∼ 32.535 mm (1.2778 ∼ 1.2809 32.36 mm (1.274 in.)

in.)
Intake valve 32.455 ∼32.535 mm (1.2778 ∼ 1.2809 32.36 mm (1.274 in.)
in.)
Camshaft oil passage, camshaft cover 0.03∼ 0.064mm (0.0012 ∼ 0.0025 in.) 0.15mm (0.0059 in.)
clearance
Camshaft oil passage diameter 22.957 ∼ 22.97mm (0.9038 ∼ 0.9043 in.) 22.91 mm (0.902 in.)
Camshaft bearing bore diameter 23.000 ∼ 23.021 mm (0.9055 ∼ 0.9063 23.08 mm (0.909 in.)
in.)
Camshaft radial eccentricity ≤TIR 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.) TIR 0.05mm (0.002 in.)
Cylinder
Cylinder (Application) –––
When the rotating speed is 300 r/min: 1
030 ∼ 1 570 kPa (10.5 ∼ 16.0
kgf/cm²,149 ∼ 228 psi)
Cylinder cover bending ––– 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Valve
Valve clearance:
Exhaust valve 0.19 ∼ 0.25 mm (0.0074 ∼ 0.0098 in.) –––
Intake valve 0.13 ∼ 0.19 mm (0.0051 ∼ 0.0075 in.) –––
Valve head thickness:
Exhaust valve 0.6 mm (0.024 in.) 0.4 mm (0.016 in.)
Intake valve 0.6 mm (0.024 in.) 0.4 mm (0.016 in.)
Valve stem bending ≤TIR 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.) TIR 0.05mm (0.002 in.)
Valve stem diameter:
Exhaust valve 3.965∼ 3.98 mm (0.1561 ∼ 0.1567 in.) 3.95mm (0.155 in.)
o @
nic
Intake valve 3.965-3.98 mm (0.1561 ∼ 0.1567 in.) 3.95mm (0.155 in.)
Valve guide bore diameter:
Exhaust valve 4.03 ∼ 4.04 mm (0.1587 ∼ 0.1590in.) 4.047 mm (0.16in.)
ec
Intake valve
Valve clearance/valve guide clearance
4.02 ∼ 4.03 mm (0.1583 ∼ 0.1587 in.) 4.037 mm (0.200 in.)
e p.t
(the pendulum test):
Exhaust valve 0.13∼ 0.21 mm (0.0051 ∼ 0.0083 in.) 0.40 mm (0.016 in.) - d
Intake valve 0.12 ∼ 0.2 mm (0.0047 ∼ 0.0079 in.) 0.34 mm (0.013 in.)
ins
Valve seat cutting angle 30°、45°、60° ––– r t
Valve seat surface:
Width: Ma
Exhaust valve 1.1 ∼ 1.3 mm (0.043 ∼ 0.051 in.) –––
d re
an
Intake valve 1.1 ∼ 1.3 mm (0.043 ∼ 0.051 in.) –––
Outside diameter:
Exhaust valve 23.1 ∼23.12mm (0.9094 ∼ 0.9102in.)
le
––– x
Intake valve 26.1 ∼26.12mm (1.0283 ∼ 1.0291 in.) A–––
A -
Free length of valve spring:
Exhaust valve 40.5mm (1.594 in.)
a lS 38.8 mm (1.528in.)
Intake valve 37.2mm (1.518 in.)
u g 35.6 mm (1.402 in.)
o rt
r P
ot o
M
oto
lt im
M u
Y - 261
P
CO
Special tools and sealants

20 kgf/cm² pressure gauge 60°-φ 30 valve-seat milling cutter
Valve spring compressor assembly Valve-seat milling cutter fixator rod
45°-φ35 valve-seat milling cutter 45°-φ30 valve-seat milling cutter
30°-φ30 valve-seat milling cutter φ4 valve guide arbor o @

c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
30°-φ35 valve-seat milling cutter φ4 valve guide reamer
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 262
P
CO
Special tools and sealants

φ4 valve-seat milling cutter fixator M10 × 1.0 pressure gauge adaptor
60°-φ35 valve-seat milling cutter L-shaped hose
Valve guide knock-in device Valve guide knock-in device accessory E
o @
φ24 valve spring compressor adaptor Adhesive (silicone sealant)
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 263
P
CO
Cylinder head cover
Cylinder head cover
Disassembly of the cylinder head cover
● Loosen the bolt and spring washer [A]
● Remove the ignition coil locating clip [B]
●Remove the ignition coil [C], ignition coil cover, O-ring
and so on
● Loosen the positioning screws [D]
● Remove the seal ring subassembly, cylinder head cover
and cylinder head cover gasket assembly
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 264
P
CO
Cylinder head cover
Cylinder head cover

Assembly of cylinder head cover
 Apply silicone sealant [A] on the semicircle sharp corner of the cylinder head cover as shown in the figure,
Sealant-silicone sealant
 Cylinder head cover gasket assembly, seal ring subassembly, O-ring and spring washer
It is necessary to replace them with new parts.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 265
P
CO
 Assembly:
Assemble the disassembled parts on the cylinder head
cover in the reverse order of disassembly
 Put the metal surface of the seal ring subassembly
[A] upwards
 Assemble the positioning screw according to the
number in the picture and tighten it twice
Locking torque of the positioning screw and the

ignition coil locating clip bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 106in·lb)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 266
P
CO
Camshaft timing chain tensioner
Disassembly of the camshaft transmission chain
tensioner
Note
Do not start the crankshaft after the tensioner
is removed, otherwise the timing of the
camshaft timing chain will be affected, and the
valve will be damaged.
● Remove the sealing bolt [C]
● Remove the fixing bolts [A], and remove the camshaft
timing chain tensioner [B].
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 267
P
CO

Assembly of the camshaft transmission chain
tensioner
●Insert the T-shaped paddle [A] in the cross recess at the
back of the tensioner [B], and rotate it in the direction [C]
● Screw the extending part of the tensioner [A] to the

minimum and then insert the T-shaped paddle [B] in the
cross recess at the back of the tensioner and fix it
● Tighten the fixing bolts [A] of the tensioner.

● Remove the T- shaped paddle
● Tighten the sealing bolt [C].
Locking torque of the camshaft timing chain tensioner
fixing bolt: 10N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 87 in·lb) o @
Locking torque of the camshaft timing chain tensioner
c nic
sealing bolt: 10N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 87 in·lb)
e
● Rotate the crankshaft twice clockwise, and the tensioner
e p.t
will open. Then check the camshaft timing again.
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 268
P
CO
Camshaft and camshaft timing chain
Disassembly of the camshaft

● Remove:
Cylinder head cover (see "disassembly of the cylinder
head cover"),
●Rotate the crankshaft [B] and put the crankshaft at the
top dead center of the piston. Align the timing
observation hole slot [A] with the scribed line on the
flywheel.
●Remove:
Camshaft timing chain tensioner (see "disassembly of
the camshaft transmission chain tensioner"),
Camshaft cover bolt [A] ,
Camshaft cover [B],
Camshaft [C]
● To prevent parts from falling into the crankcase, plug
the transmission chain link with clean cloth.
● Remove:
Camshaft sprocket fixing bolts [A]
Camshaft sprocket
Note
The crankshaft can be rotated after the
o @
camshaft is removed. The transmission chain
must be tightened during the rotation of the c nic
e
crankshaft, so as to prevent the lower
(crankshaft) sprocket of the transmission e p.t
chain from kinking and damaging the - d
transmission chain and sprocket.
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 269
P
CO
Assembly of the camshaft

● Disassemble the camshaft sprocket, as shown in the
picture.
● Apply thread fastening glue on the threads of the
fixing bolt, and then tighten the bolt.
Locking torque of camshaft sprocket fixing bolt:
20N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 11 ft·lb)
● Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution on all cam

parts and journals.
● If it is necessary to use new camshafts, apply a thin
layer of molybdenum disulfide lubricating grease on
surfaces of the cams.
Remark
○ There is an E sign [A] on the exhaust camshaft
sprocket, and there is an I sign [B] on the intake
camshaft sprocket. Do not confuse the exhaust camshaft
and the intake camshaft!
Remark
○The E and I signs should be put upwards during the
adjustment of the timing.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
● Put the crankshaft on the top dead center of the piston.
● Tighten the tight side (exhaust side) of the chain when - d
installing the chain.
ins
r t
Ma
●Align the timing observation hole slot [A] with the
scribed line on the flywheel.
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 270
P
CO
○ Align the timing signs with the upper surface [A] of the
cylinder.
E sign [B]
I sign [C]
●Assemble the camshaft cover

○Tighten the camshaft cover first, put the camshaft in proper place, and then tighten all bolts according to the
order shown in the figure.
Locking torque of No.1 to 12 camshaft cover bolt: 12 N•m (1.2 kgf•m, 106 in•lb)
● Assemble the camshaft timing chain tensioner (see “Assembly of the camshaft transmission chain tensioner”).
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 271
P
CO
Check of the camshaft
Wear of the camshaft and camshaft lock block
● Remove:
Camshaft lock block (see “Disassembly of the
camshaft”)
● Cut the plastic clearance gauge into strips
according to the width of the journal. Put a strip of
plastic clearance gauge in each oil passage, and align
it with the camshaft which is installed in the correct
position.
●Measure the clearance between each camshaft oil
passage and camshaft lock block with the plastic clearance gauge [A].
● Tighten the camshaft briquetting bolt and the chain guide bolt (see “Assembly of the camshaft”).
Remark
○Do not rotate the camshaft when plastic clearance gauge is between the oil passage and the camshaft lock block!
Clearance between the camshaft oil passage and the camshaft lock block
Standard: 0.03 to 0.064 mm (0.0012 to 0.0025 in.)
Operating limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059in.)
★ If clearance between any camshaft journal and camshaft cover exceeds the operating limit, measure the
diameter of each camshaft oil passage with a micrometer.
Diameter of camshaft oil passage

Standard: 22.957 to 22.97mm (0.9038 to 0.9043 in.)
Operating limit: 22.91 mm (0.902 in.) o @
c nic
★ If the diameter of the camshaft oil passage is lower than the operating limit, replace the camshaft, and then e
re-measure the clearance.
e p.t
★ If the measured clearance is still beyond the limit, replace the cylinder cover.
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 272
P
CO
Camshaft radial eccentricity
● Remove the camshaft (see “Disassembly of the
camshaft”).
● Put the camshaft in the alignment jig or V-shaped
block.
● Measure the radial eccentricity of the camshaft with a
dial indicator at the position shown in the right figure.
★ If the radial eccentricity of the camshaft exceeds the
operating limit, replace the camshaft.
Radial eccentricity of the camshaft
Standard: ≤TIR 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.)
Operating limit: TIR 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Wear of the cam
● Remove the camshaft (see “Disassembly of the
camshaft”).
● Measure the height of each cam with a micrometer
[A].
★ If wear of the cam exceeds the operating limit,
replace the camshaft.
Cam height
Standard:
Exhaust cam: 32.455 to 32.535 mm (1.2778 to
1.2809 in.)
Intake cam: 32.455 to 32.535 mm (1.2778 to
1.2809in.)
Operating limit: o @
Exhaust cam: 32.36 mm (1.274 in.)
c nic
Intake cam: 32.36mm (1.274 in.)
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 273
P
CO
Disassembly of the camshaft timing chain

● Remove:
Camshaft (see “Disassembly of the camshaft”)
Auxiliary leading chain plate [D]
Main leading chain plate follower bolts [A]
Main leading chain plate pressing plate [B]
Main leading chain plate [C]
● Pull the camshaft timing chain [A] out downwards.
Assembly of the camshaft timing chain

● Assemble timing chain on the side of cylinder head camshaft first.
o @
nic
● Assemble the crankshaft on the top dead center
● Assemble the auxiliary leading chain plate.
ec
p.t
● Assemble the main leading chain plate
● Tighten the main leading chain plate follower bolts
de
Tightening torque of the main leading chain plate follower bolts: 9.8N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 87 in·lb)
●Assemble the removed parts (see the corresponding section). s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 274
P
CO
Cylinder cover
Cylinder cover
Measurement of cylinder pressure
Remark
○ Use fully charged battery!
● Heat the engine completely.
● Turn off the engine.
● Remove:
The ignition coil
The spark plug (see “Chapter III Check and Regular
Adjustment” and Chapter I “Replacement of the Spark
Plug”)
●Connect the pressure gauge [A] and adapter [B] firmly
in the spark plug hole.
○ Start the motor with the starting motor, and turn on the
throttle valve fully until readings of the pressure gauge
does not increase. The maximum reading is cylinder
pressure of the cylinder.
Special tool: pressure gauge 20 kgf/cm: 57001-221
Pressure gauge adapter M10 × 1.0: 57001-1601
L-shaped hose [C]
Cylinder pressure
Application: when the rotating speed is 300r/min: 1030 to 1570 kPa (10.5 to 16.0 kgf/ cm2,149 to 228 psi)
● Measure the cylinder pressure of other cylinders according to above the steps.
● Install the spark plug.
Spark plug locking torque: 13 N·m (1.3 kgf·m, 115 in·lb) o @
○ If the pressure gauge readings are not within the above application scope, please refer to the following table.
Problem Cause Solution c nic
e
Cylinder Maybe it is due to damage of valve stem seal and/or
pressure is piston oil ring. There are carbon deposits on the Clean the carbon deposits, and replace the
e p.t
higher
than
piston and in the combustion chamber (it can be damaged parts if necessary.
judged from the discharged white exhaust gas). - d
pressure in
ins
the Replace it with a gasket of standard r t
Ma
Thickness of the cylinder cover gasket is unsuitable.
application thickness.
scope
Cylinder
There is leakage around the cylinder cover. re
Replace the damaged gasket, and check the
d
deformation of the cylinder cover.
pressure is The valve seat is not working properly an
Repair it if necessary.
x
lower than Valve clearance is incorrect
pressure in Piston/cylinder clearance is incorrect
A le
Adjust the valve clearance.
Replace the piston and/or cylinder.
the
application Cylinder score
A -
Check the cylinder, and replace/repair the
cylinder and/or piston if necessary.
scope Piston ring and/or piston ring groove is not working
properly a lS
Replace the piston and/or piston ring.
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 275
P
CO
Cylinder cover
Cylinder cover
Disassembly of the cylinder cover
● Remove:
The cylinder head cover (see “Disassembly of the cylinder head cover”),
Camshaft (see “Disassembly of the camshaft”)
Main chain guide (see “Disassembly of the camshaft transmission chain”),
Auxiliary chain guide (see “Disassembly of the camshaft transmission chain”),
● Remove:
Front engine fixing bolt (M10) [A],
● Remove the M6 cylinder cover bolts [A] and then

remove the M10 cylinder cover bolts [B].
● Remove the cylinder cover.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 276
P
CO
Cylinder cover
Cylinder cover
Assembly of the cylinder cover
Remark
○ Camshaft lock block and the cylinder cover are
processed together, therefore, if it is necessary to
assemble a new cylinder, please use the camshaft lock
block equipped with the new cylinder cover.
● Assemble a new cylinder cover gasket and locating

pin.
● Replaced a new cylinder cover bolt washer.
● Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution on both
sides [A] of the cylinder cover bolt washer [B] and
threads of the cover bolt [C].
●Tighten the M10 cylinder cover bolts in the order

shown in the right figure [1～6].
Locking torque of cylinder cover bolts (M10):
Preliminary lock: 30N·m (3.0 kgf·m,)
Final lock: 55 N·m (5.5 kgf·m,)
● Tighten the M6 cylinder cover bolts [7 ∼ 8].
Locking torque of cylinder cover bolts (M6): 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 277
P
CO
Cylinder cover
Cylinder cover
● Assemble:
Auxiliary leading chain plate [A],
Main leading chain plate [B],
Main leading chain plate pressing plate [C]
Pressing plate fixing bolts [D]
● Locking torque:
Tightening torque of main leading chain plate
follower bolts: 9.8N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 87 in·lb)
●Replace the following bolts with new bolts that has
been applied with tightening agents and tighten them.
Engine bracket bolts (M8),
Front engine fixing bolts (M10),
Locking torque of engine bracket bolts (M8): 25 N·m
(2.5 kgf·m, 18ft·lb)
Locking torque of front engine fixing bolts (M10): 59
N·m (6.0kgf·m, 44 ft·lb)
● Assemble the removed parts (see the corresponding
section).
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 278
P
CO
Cylinder cover
Cylinder cover
Check of the deformation of the cylinder cover
● Clean the cylinder cover.
● Put a ruler at several locations on the lower surface of
the cylinder cover.
● Measure the distance between the cylinder cover and
the ruler [B] with the clearance gauge [A].
Deformation of the cylinder cover
Standard: ---
Operating limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
★ If deformation of the cylinder cover is beyond the
operating limit, replace the cylinder cover.
★ If deformation of the cylinder cover does not exceed
the operating limit, polish the lower surface of the
cylinder cover with the sandpaper fixed on the plate
(polish it with No.200 sandpaper first, then with No.400 sandpaper).
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 279
P
CO
Valve
Valve
Check of the valve clearance
●See “Chapter III Check and Regular adjustment” –
“Check of the valve clearance.”
Adjustment of the valve clearance
● See “Chapter III Check and Regular adjustment” –
“Adjustment of the valve clearance.”
Disassembly of the valve

● Remove:
Cylinder cover (see “Disassembly of the cylinder
cover”),
Valve ejector rod and gasket
○ Make marks on the valve ejector rod and gasket, so
that the valve ejector rod and gasket can be assembled to the original positions later.
● Remove the valve with valve spring compressor assembly.
Valve spring compressor assembly [A]
Valve spring compressor adapter φ24 [B]
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 280
P
CO
Valve
Valve
Assembly of the valve

● It is necessary to use the new oil seal.
● Apply a thin layer of molybdenum disulfide grease on
the valve stem first before assembling the valve.
● Put the end with narrower spacing of the spring
downwards when assembling the spring.
The valve stem [A],
Oil seal [B],
Upper guard ring of the spring [C],
Spring end with narrower spacing [D]
Valve spring [E]
Lower guard ring of the spring [F]
Valve key [G]
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 281
P
CO
Valve
Valve
Disassembly of the valve guide
● Remove:
Valve (see “Disassembly of the valve”),
Oil seal,
Spring seat
●Increase the temperature of the valve guide to
120∼150°C (248∼302°F), then tap the valve guide and
remove the tooling [A], and remove the guide from the
top.
Note
Do not heat the cylinder head directly with
fire, otherwise the cylinder cover will be
deformed. Soak the cylinder cover in oil and
heat the oil.
Special tool - the valve guide removal rod φ4
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 282
P
CO
Valve
Valve
Assembly of the valve guide
● Apply engine oil on the external surface of the valve guide before assembling it.
● Increase the temperature around the valve guide hole to 120 ∼ 150°C (248∼302°F).
Note
Do not heat the cylinder head directly with
fire, otherwise the cylinder cover will be
deformed. Soak the cylinder cover in oil and
heat the oil.
● Assemble the parts of valve guide knock-in tooling

(fixator and accessory E).
● Insert the rod of the knock-in tooling into the valve
guide hole, and then knock the end of the knock-in
tooling, until it reaches the bottom.
Valve guide screwdriver accessory E [A],
Valve guide screwdriver (fixator) [B],
Valve guide [C],
Cylinder cover [D]
Valve guide installation height = 15.1 mm (0.59 in.) [E]
Special tool - valve guide screwdriver
Valve guide screwdriver accessory E
o @
nic
●Ream the valve guide with the valve guide reamer [A].
The used guide also needs to be reamed with the
ec
p.t
reamer.
Special tool - valve guide reamer φ4
de
s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 283
P
CO
Valve
Valve
Measurement of the clearance between the valve

and guide (the pendulum test)
If there is no small-sized inside gauge, clearance
between the valve and the valve guide can be measured
by the pendulum test as shown in the figure, thereby
wear of the valve guide can be measured.
● Insert a new valve [A] into the valve guide [B] inside,
and make the dial indicator perpendicular to the valve
stem and keep it as close to the cylinder cover joint
surface as possible.
●Move the valve stem back and forth [C] and measure
the clearance between the valve and the valve guide.
● Measure the clearance again in the above steps in the
same direction and at the right angle.
★ If the reading exceeds the operating limit, replace
the valve guide.
Remark
○ Since the measuring point and the valve guide is not
in the same plane, so measured values of the pendulum test are not the actual clearance values between the valve
guide and valve stem. Please refer to the following table during maintenance and replacement.
Clearance between the valve and guide (the pendulum test)

Standard:
o @
nic
Exhaust: 0.13 ∼ 0.21 mm (0.0051 ∼ 0.0083in.)
Intake: 0.12 ∼ 0.2 mm (0.0047 ∼ 0.0079 in.)
ec
p.t
Operating limit:
Exhaust: 0.40 mm (0.016 in.)
de
Intake: 0.34 mm (0.013 in.)
s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 284
P
CO
Valve
Valve
Check of the valve seat

● Remove the valve (see “Disassembly of the valve”).
● Check the valve seat surface [A] between the valve B]
and valve seat [C].
○ Measure the outside diameter [D] of the valve seat.
★ If the outer diameter of the valve seat is too large or
too small, repair the valve seat (see “Repair of the valve
seat”).
Outside diameter of the valve seat surface:

Standard:
Exhaust valve seat: 21.55 ∼ 21.65 mm (0.849∼ 0.853
in.)
Intake valve seat: 24.4∼24.5 mm (0.961 ∼ 0.965 in.)
○ Measure the width [E] of the part without carbon

deposits (the white part) on the valve seat with a vernier
caliper.
Normal [F]
★ If the width is too large [G], too small [H] or uneven
[J], repair the valve seat (see “Repair of the valve seat”).
Width of the valve seat surface:

Standard:
Exhaust valve seat: 1.1 ∼ 1.3 mm (0.043 ∼ 0.051 in.)
o @
nic
Intake valve seat: 1.1 ∼ 1.3 mm (0.043 ∼ 0.051 in.)
ec
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 285
P
CO
Valve
Valve
Repair of the valve seat

● Repair the valve seat with the valve seat milling cutter
[A].
Special tool - valve seat milling cutter fixator rod
valve seat milling cutter fixator φ4
[Special valve seat milling cutter for exhaust valve
seat]
Valve seat milling cutter 45 ° -φ30
[Special valve seat milling cutter for intake valve seat]
★ If you cannot find the instructions provided by the
manufacturer, follow the following steps.
Note for the use of the valve seat milling cutter:
1. Since the valve seat milling cutter is designed for polishing on the valve seat to fix the valve seat, it can only be
used to repair the valve seat and cannot be used for other purposes.
2. The valve seat milling cutter must be protected from dropping or striking to prevent diamond particle from
shedding.
3. Apply engine oil on the valve seat milling cutter before polishing on the valve seat surface, and clean the
powder on the milling cutter with special cleaning oil.
Remark
○Do not use wire brush to clean the metal
powder on the milling cutter, otherwise the
diamond particle would fall off.
4. Put the valve seat milling cutter on the fixator, and operate the milling cutter with one hand. Do not use
excessive force on the diamond section!
Remark
o @
○Apply engine oil on the valve seat cutter before
polishing, and clean the powder sticking to the
c nic
e
p.t
milling cutter timely with special cleaning oil
during the use of the milling cutter.
5. Clean the milling cutter with special cleaning oil after use, and then apply a thin layer of oil on it before storage
de
s -
r tin
Ma
Signs printed on the milling cutter
Meanings of the signs printed on the back of the cutter are
as follows:
d re
60° ........................... cutting tool angle [B]
37.5φ ........................... outside diameter of the cutter [C] xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 286
P
CO
Valve
Valve
Operating procedures:
●Thoroughly clean the valve seat.
●Coat the surface of valve seat with dye for mechanical processing.
●Install a 45 ° milling cutter at the fixator, and then slide it into the valve guide.
●Gently press down the handle, and then rotate it to left or right, polish the surface of valve seat, until it becomes
smooth.
Note
Do not polish valve seat excessively,
otherwise the valve may go into cylinder
head, reducing the valve clearance. If the
valve moves upward and goes into cylinder
head too deep, the valve clearance cannot be
adjusted, and the entire cylinder head
assemble should be replaced.
●Measure the outer diameter of valve seat surface with a vernier caliper.
★ If the outer diameter of valve seat surface is too
small, continue to polish with 45 ° milling cutter, until
the diameter is within then specified range.
Widened width after polishing with 45 ° milling cutter

[A]
Part polished with 30 ° milling cutter [B]
30 ° [C]
Correct width [D]
Part polished with 60 ° milling cutter [E]
60 ° [F]
o @
● Measure the outer diameter of valve seat surface with
c nic
e
p.t
a vernier caliper.
de
★If the outer diameter of valve seat surface is too small,
continue to polish with 45 ° milling cutter, until the s -
diameter is within then specified range.
r tin
Ma
Original valve seat surface [B]
Remarks d re
○Clean the powder on 45 ° polished surface.
xan
○After grinding with 45 ° milling cutter, coat a thin
A le
and 60 ° polishing. A -
layer of special dye for mechanical processing to make the valve surface seat more obvious and facilitate 30 °
lS
○When replacing valve guide, polish with 45 ° milling cutter, make the valve seat align at the center and ensure
a
good contact.
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 287
P
CO
Valve
Valve
★If the outer diameter of valve seat surface is too large, polish with 30 ° milling cutter according to the following
method.
★If the outer diameter of valve seat surface is within the specified range, measure the width of valve seat
according to the following method.
●Grind valve seat at 30° angle [B], until its outer diameter is reduced to the specified range.
○Install a 30 ° milling cutter at the fixator before polishing at 30° angle, and then make it go into the valve guide.
○Gently press down the fixator, turn one round once, and check the valve seat once per round.
Note
The polishing efficiency of 30° milling cutter
is very high, so it is required to frequently check
the outer diameter of valve to avoid excessive
polishing.
○ After polishing using 30 ° milling cutter, go back to the
above steps for measuring the outer diameter of valve
seat.
●In order to measure the width of valve seat, measure the
width of several different parts of valve seat with a
vernier caliper.
★If the width of valve seat is too small, repeat 45°
polishing, until valve seat become a little wide, and then
go back to the above steps for measuring the outer
diameter of valve seat.
★ If the width of valve seat is too large, conduct 60°[A] o @

polishing according to the following method.
c nic
★If the width of valve seat is within the specified range, e
install the valve on valve seat according to the following
e p.t
methods.
- d
●Polish valve seat at 60° angle, until the width of valve
ins
seat is within the specified range.
r t
Ma
○Before polishing at 60° angle, it is required to install 60°
milling cutter on fixator, and then slide it into the valve
guide.
d re
○Gently press fixator and rotate it at the same time.
○After polishing at 60° angle, go back to the above steps for measuring the width of valve seatxan
Correct width [B]
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 288
P
CO
Valve
Valve
● If the width and outer diameter of valve seat are
within the specified range, install valve on valve seat.
○Place a small amount of grinding agent at several
parts of around valve head.
○Rotate the valve, until coarse grinding agent make the
contact surface between valve seat and valve become
smooth.
○Repeat the above grinding process using fine grinding
agent.
Grinding tools [A]
Valve seat [B]
Valve [C]
●Make the position of base at the middle of valve surface.
★If the base is not at the correct part of valve, confirm whether the valve is correct part. If it is correct, the
problem is excessive polishing, and you need to replace it.
●Thoroughly clean all grinding agent before assembly.
●Adjust valve clearance before assembling engine (See “Chapter III Check and Regular Adjustment” –“Check
valve clearance” for details).
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 289
P
CO
Valve
Valve
Repair of valve seat
Start
Coat the valve seat with dye for
mechanical processing
45 ° polishing
Tool: 45 ° milling cutter
Purpose: To enable the base
parts to become smooth and
rounded
Measure the outer diameter of
the base part
Tool: Vernier caliper
Purpose: To check whether the
outer diameter of valve seat
meets the standard
Result
Too small Normal Too large
Coat the valve seat

with dye for
45 ° polishing mechanical processing
Tool: 45 ° milling cutter
Purpose: To expand the 32 ° polishing
outer diameter of valve seat
according to the standards. Tool: 32° milling cutter
Purpose: To reduce the outer
Measure the valve seat width diameter of valve seat
Tool: Vernier caliper according to the standards.
Purpose: To check whether
the outer diameter of valve
seat meets the standard
Result
o @
Too narrow Normal Too large
c nic
e
45 ° polishing
Coat the valve seat
with dye for
e p.t
Tool: 45° milling cutter
Purpose: To expand the outer
mechanical processing
- d
diameter of valve seat according
to the standards (exceed the 60°polishing
ins
specified range). Tool: 60° milling cutter r t
Grinding valve
Purpose: To reduce the
width of valve seat Ma
Tool: Valve grinding tool,
grinding agent
according to the
standards.
d re
an
Purpose: To make the contact
surfaces of valve and valve
seat perfectly match with
each other; to check whether
End
le x
the valve head is damaged.
- A
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 290
P
CO
Fixator of throttle valve body
Fixator of throttle valve body
Installation of fixator of throttle valve body

● Apply grease in sealing O-ring [A].
●Remember to install sealing O-ring.
●As shown in the figure, install clamp [B].
●Tighten the bolt of fixator.
Locking torque of fixator of throttle valve assembly:
12 N·m (1.0kgf·m, 106in·lb)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 291
P
CO
Clutch
Clutch
Breakdown drawing
Torque Remarks o @
nic
No. Fastener
N·m kgf·m ft·lb
1 Right cover bolt 12 1.2 106 in·lb ec
2 Hexagon bolt 12 1.2 106 in·lb
e p.t
3
Oil filling plug screw — — Manual
- d
tightening
ins
4 Clutch spring bolt 10 1.0 89 in·lb
r t
5 Chain wheel installing bolt
Driving gear locking nut of balance
8
60
0.8
6.1
71 in·lb
44 ft·lb L Ma
6
shaft
d re
7 Locking nut of clutch 95 9.7 70 ft·lb
xan
8 Drive sprocket screw of clutch
EO: Apply engine oil
8 0.8
le
71 in·lb
A
-
SA
L: Apply thread fastening adhesives
R: Replace parts
a l
rt ug
Po
t o r
M o
oto
lt im
M u
Y - 292
P
CO
Clutch
Clutch
Item Standard Use limit
Clutch operating lever
Position of clutch operating lever –––

Free clearance of clutch operating Align the slotting position at the –––
lever marked line at right cover
Cannot be adjusted
Clutch
Clutch pressure plate assembly 32.5 ∼ 33.5 mm (1.28 ∼ 1.32 in.) –––
Thickness of clutch friction plate:
2.9 ∼ 3.1 mm (0.11 ∼ 0.12 in.) 2.6 mm (0.1 in.)
Deformation of clutch plate ≤0.15 mm (0.0059 in.) 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)

Free length of clutch spring 36.7 mm (1.45 in.) 35.4 mm (1.4 in.)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 293
P
CO
Clutch
Clutch
Special tools and fastening adhesives

Clutch fastener Thread fastening adhesives
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 294
P
CO
Right cover
Right cover
Disassemble right cover
●Release engine oil (see “Check and regular adjustment”
– “Engine oil” for details
Disassemble:
The split pin used for connecting the wire hinge pin of
clutch [H]
Hexagon bolt [I] used for fixing releasing lever [J]
Disassemble:
Totally 16 right cover bolts [A]
Right cover gaskets and positioning pins at right cover [B]
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 295
P
CO
Right cover
Right cover
Install right cover

●In inverse order to disassembly
●Replace one right cover gasket
●Fasten right cover bolt
●Align the slot [C] at releasing lever at the mark [D] at
right cover
Locking torque of right cover bolt and hexagon bolt:
12 N·m (1.2kgf·m, 106 in·lb)
○ If oil seal, gasket and clutch operating lever [K] and

operating lever spring need to be disassembled, lubricate
the lip [E] of oil seal with engine oil when assembling
oil seal
○ If oil sight glass has been disassembled, make its o @

projecting portion [B] toward the inside. Grease if
c nic
e
p.t
necessary, to facilitate installation.
de
s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 296
P
CO
Clutch
Clutch
Disassembly of clutch
●Release engine oil (see “Check and regular adjustment”
– “Engine oil” for details
Disassemble:
Right cover (see “Disassembly of right cover”)

Balance shaft driving gear lock nut [A], lock gasket and
gasket
Balance shaft driving gear [B]
Clutch spring bolt [C] and clutch spring
Clutch driven hub pressure plate [D]
Clutch rack [E], flat needle roller bearings and thrust
gaskets
● Disassemble:
Clutch friction plate and clutch plate
Disc spring and gasket
Clutch lock nut [A]
●Fix the driven hub [B] with special tool-clutch fixing
device, and disassemble clutch lock nut [A] and lock
gasket.
Special tool—clutch fixing device
●Disassemble clutch driven hub [B] and spline gasket
●Disassemble: o @
Engine oil pump installing bolt [C], gasket and engine
c nic
oil pump sprocket [D]
e
Engine oil pump chain [E] and clutch outer disc
e p.t
components [F]
- d
ins
r t
Ma
●Disassemble clutch sleeve [A]
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 297
P
CO
Clutch
Clutch
Installation of clutch
● Install clutch sleeve [A]
●Install:
Installation:
Clutch outer plate components [F] and engine oil pump
chain [E]
Engine oil pump sprocket [D]
Engine oil pump sprocket mounting bolt [C] and gasket
Locking torque:
Locking torque of engine oil chain wheel mounting

bolt [C]: 8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m, 71 in·lb)
Spline gasket and clutch driven hub [B] o @
●Install clutch releasing nut [A] and replace new lock gasket, fix clutch driven hub using clutch fixing device,
c nic
lock clutch lock nut [A] using torque wrench, and conduct mechanical locking using lock gaskets.
e
Special tool—clutch fixing device
e p.t
Locking torque of clutch lock nut [A]: 95 N·m (9.7 kgf·m, 70 ft·lb)
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 298
P
CO
Clutch
Clutch
● As shown in the figure, install gasket [A], disk spring
[B], clutch friction plates [C] [D] [E] and clutch plate
[F].
Remarks
○The inner diameter of the first clutch
friction plate is greater than that of other
friction plates, because the role of gasket
and disk spring is to reduce the noise of
vibration.
Clutch driven hub [G]

Note
To avoid the seizure of clutch plate, apply
engine oil at the surface of each plate
when installing dry new clutch friction
plate and clutch plate.
○ The clutch friction plate with large area [A] should be

placed at the outermost side.
o @
○ As shown in the figure, install the bump [A] at the
edge of outermost clutch friction plate into the trough of c nic
e
clutch outer plate.
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 299
P
CO
Clutch
Clutch
● Install:
Clutch rack [A], plane needle roller bearing [B] and
thrust gasket [C]
Clutch driven hub pressure plate [D]
●Install clutch spring [E], evenly lock clutch spring bolts

[F].
Locking torque:
Locking torque of clutch spring bolt[F]: 10 N·m (1.0
kgf·m, 89 in·lb)
●Install balance shaft driving gear (see “Crankshaft /
transmission gear”—“Install crankshaft” for details)
●Install right cover (see “install right cover” for details)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 300
P
CO
Clutch
Clutch
Check of entire group of clutch friction plate
● Check the thickness of clutch friction plate (see
“Check whether the entire group of clutch friction plate
has been worn or damaged” for details)
●As shown in the figure, measure the length of entire
group of clutch friction group and clutch plate [A]
○Assemble:
Clutch driven hub [B]
Gasket [C]
Disk spring [D]
Friction plates [E] [F] [G]
Clutch plate [H]
Clutch driven hub pressure plate [J]
Clutch spring [K]
Clutch spring bolt [L]
Locking torque of clutch spring bolt[l]: 10 N·m (1.0
kgf·m, 89 in·lb)
Total thickness of entire group of clutch friction plate
and clutch plate after installation
Standard: 32.5 ∼ 33.5 mm (1.28 ∼ 1.32 in.)
★If the length is not within the above range, please
adjust (see “Adjustment of entire group of clutch friction
plate and clutch plate” for details)
Adjustment of entire group of clutch friction plate
and clutch plate
●Check the total thickness of entire group of clutch
o @
nic
friction plate and clutch plate after installation, and then
replace clutch friction plate, to control the length within
the above range. ec
●Disassemble:
Clutch spring bolt e p.t
Clutch spring
- d
Clutch driven hub pressure plate
● Replace clutch friction plate ins
Clutch friction plate thickness: r t
Standard: 2.9 ∼ 3.1 mm (0.11 ∼ 0.12 in.) Ma
d re
● Install the disassembled parts, and check the total thickness of entire group of clutch friction plate and
clutch plate after installation
xan
Locking torque of clutch spring bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 89 in·lb)
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 301
P
CO
Clutch
Clutch
Check whether the entire group of clutch friction

plate has been worn or damaged
● Visually check whether there is seizure, overheating
(discoloration)) or uneven wear in clutch friction plate
and clutch plate.
●Measure the thickness of each clutch friction plate [A]
at different positions.
★If any clutch friction plate has been broken or the
wear exceeds the use limit, please replace a new one!
Thickness of clutch friction plate

Standard: 2.9 ∼ 3.1mm (0.11 ∼ 0.12 in.)
Use limit: 2.6 mm (0.1 in.)
Check the deformation of entire group of clutch

plate
● Place each clutch plate at a flat plate, measure the
clearance between flat plate and clutch plate with a
feeler. The measured clearance is the deformation of
clutch.
★If the deformation of any clutch has exceeded the use
limit, please replace a new one!
Deformation of clutch plate

Standard: ≤0.15 mm (0.0059 in.)
Measure the free length of clutch spring o @

● Measure the free length of clutch spring [A]
c nic
★If the length of any clutch spring is below the use
e
limit, please replace one new!
e p.t
Free length of clutch spring - d
Standard: 36.7 mm (1.45 in.) ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 302
P
CO
Breakdown drawing
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 303
P
CO
Breakdown drawing
o @
c nic
Torque Remarks
e
p.t
No. Fastener
N·m kgf·m ft·lb
1 Oil pan drain magnetic bolt 20 2.0 15 ft·lb de
2 Oil pan bolt 10 1.0 89 in·lb
s -
3 Engine oil pump mounting bolt 10 1.0 89 in·lb
r tin
Engine oil pump cover bolt
Ma
4 10 1.0 89 in·lb
5 Sprocket mounting bolt 8 0.8 71 in·lb
6 Engine oil pressure switch bolt 24.5 2.5 18 ft·lb
d reL
Engine oil filter bolt 13 ft·lb n
7 17 1.7
x a
EO: Apply engine oil
R: Replace parts A l e
L: Apply thread fastening adhesives
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 304
P
CO
Engine oil flow diagram
Exhaust cam
bearing
Inlet cam
bearing
Orifice Connecting Connecting

rod bearing rod bearing
Main Main Main

bearing bearing bearing
Main oil
passage
Engine oil
Orifice filter
Pressure
release valve
Main Counter @
shaft shaft Engine oil o
pump
c nic
e
e p.t
Oil pan
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 305
P
CO
Item Standard
Engine oil
Type API SE, SF or SG
API SH, SJ or SL, JASO MA, MA1 or MA2
Viscosity SAE 10W-40
Volume 2.8 L (When replacing oil)
3.0 L (When disassembling)
Oil level Between upper and lower limits (2-3 minutes after idle
speed or normal running)
Engine oil pump rotor
Radial clearance between inner and outer rotor 0.05 ~ 0.13 mm （0.002 ~ 0.0051 in.）
Clearance between outer rotor and pump 0.11 ~ 0.17 mm （0.0043 ~ 0.0067 in.）
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 306
P
CO

Engine oil pressure gauge 10 kgf/cm² Adaptor of engine oil pressure gauge PT3/8
Wrench of engine oil filter Thread fastening adhesives
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 307
P
CO
Engine oil and engine oil filter
Engine oil and engine oil filter
Warning
The insufficient amount, deterioration or
contamination of engine oil will accelerate the
wear of motorcycle, may result in seizure of
engine or gear group and cause traffic accident
and personal injury.
Check of oil level
●Check whether the level of engine oil is between the
high oil level line H and low oil level line L of oil sight
glass.
Check the oil level

● Check the engine oil level is between the oil mirror
the high oil line H and the low oil level line L.
Remarks
○Park the motorcycle perpendicular to the ground.
○If you have just used motorcycles, wait a few
minutes to let the engine oil cool.
○If you have replaced engine oil, start the engine,
make it running at idle speed for a few minutes, and
thus fill the engine oil filter. Switch off the engine,
wait a few minutes and let the oil settle.
Note
If you make the engine run at full speed before
engine oil flows to each part, seizure may be
caused to engine.
If the volume of engine oil is very low, or engine
oil pump or oil passage is blocked or abnormal,
the pressure warning light of engine oil will be
o @
on. If the running speed is higher than the idle
speed and the pressure warning light of engine
c nic
e
p.t
oil remains on, immediately shut down the
engine and find the cause of fault.
★ If the engine oil level is too high, please pump out excess engine oil with a syringe or other suitable tools.
de
★ If the engine oil level is too low, please add a proper amount of engine oil to the oil filler! Oil type and
manufacturer used should be consistent with that in the engine. s -
r tin
Ma
Remarks
○If you are not sure about the type and
manufacturer of the engine oil, you can fill any
specified brand of oil engine to the highest level, but d re
not let engine run when the engine oil level is low.
xan
However, you must replace the oil in the engine as
soon as possible.
A le
-
Replacement of engine oil
l SAoil” for details
● See “Chapter III Check and Regular Adjustment” – “Replacement of engine
Replacement of engine filter
g a
u
rt of engine oil filter” for details
●See “Chapter III Check and Regular Adjustment” – “Replacement
P o
t o r
M o
o t o
lt i m
M u
-
PY 308
CO
Oil pan
Oil pan
Disassembly of oil pan
●Release engine oil, disassemble oil drain magnetic bolt [A] See “Chapter III Check and Regular Adjustment” –
“Replacement of engine oil” for details
Muffler body (see “Top of engine” –“Disassembly / installation of muffler body” for details),
Exhaust pipe (see “Top of engine” –“Disassembly / installation of exhaust pipe” for details),
●Disassemble:
Oil pan bolt [B]
Oil pan [C]
Gasket [D]
●Disassemble:
Engine oil filter [A] and seal cartridge
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 309
P
CO
Oil pan
Oil pan
Installation of oil pan
● Clean engine oil filter [A].
●Install engine oil filer and seal cartridge, and make the
raised part [B] of engine oil pump align at the notch of
engine oil filter during installation.
● Replace new oil pan gasket [D]

●Install oil pan
Locking torque:
Locking torque of oil pan bolt [B]: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
89 in·lb)
Locking torque of magnetic oil drain bolt of oil pan
[A]: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 ft·lb)
●Parts disassembled before installation
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 310
P
CO
Engine oil pump
Engine oil pump
Disassembly of engine oil pump

Release engine oil See “Chapter III Check and Regular
Adjustment” – “Replacement of engine oil” for details
Disassemble right cover (see “Clutch” –“Disassemble
clutch” for details)
Disassemble the gear driving balance shaft at the
crankshaft (see “Clutch” –“Disassemble clutch” for
details)
Disassemble clutch hub components (see “Clutch”
–“Disassemble clutch” for detail)
Disassemble oil pan and engine oil filter (see
“Disassembly of oil pan”)
Disassemble water pump mounting bolt [B] and pump
components [A]
● Disassemble the oil pump sprocket mounting bolts

and gaskets
● Disassemble the oil pump sprocket [A]
● Disassemble the oil pump chain [B] and clutch outer
plate components [C]
● Disassemble the oil pump mounting bolts
● Disassemble the oil pump components [D] and
positioning pins
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
● Disassemble the oil pump cover bolts - d
● Disassemble the oil pump cover [A]
ins
r t
Ma
● Disassemble the outer rotor [B] and inner rotor of oil
pump [C]
● Disassemble the pin
d re
● Disassemble the gasket
● Disassemble the oil pump shaft [E] and oil pump [D] xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 311
P
CO
Engine oil pump
Engine oil pump
Installation of engine oil pump
●Clean engine oil pump [D], engine oil pump cover [A],
outer rotor [B], inner rotor [C] and engine oil pump
shaft [E] with engine oil
● Install engine oil pump shaft [E] at the engine oil
pump [D]
● Install gaskets and pins
● Install inner rotor [C], outer rotor [B] and oil pump cover [A]
Locking torque:
Locking torque of engine oil pump cover bolt: 10
N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 89 in·lb)
● Install the engine oil pump positioning pins on the

lower crankcase
● Install the oil pump components [D]
Locking torque:
Locking torque of engine oil pump mounting bolt: 10
N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 89 in·lb)
● Install the clutch outer plate components [C] and
engine oil pump chain [B]
● Install the engine oil pump sprocket [A] and gasket
Locking torque:
Locking torque of engine oil pump sprocket mounting bolt: 8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m, 71 in·lb)
●Parts disassembled before installation
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 312
P
CO
Engine oil pressure relief valve
Engine oil pressure relief valve
Disassembly of engine oil pressure relief valve

● Release the engine oil (see Chapter III “Check and
Regular adjustment”-“Replacement of engine oil”).
Disassemble the right cover (see “Clutch”-“Clutch
disassembly”).
Disassemble the gear on upper driving balance shaft of
crankshaft (see “Clutch”-“Clutch disassembly”).
Disassemble the central components of clutch see
“Clutch”-“Clutch disassembly”).
Disassemble the oil pan and engine oil strainer (see
“Disassembly of oil pan”).
● Disassemble the engine oil pressure relief valve [A].
Installation of engine oil pressure relief valve

● Clean the engine oil pressure relief valve [A].
● Install the engine oil pressure relief valve [A].
● Install the disassembled parts.
Check of engine oil pressure relief valve

● Check whether the relief valve [A] can slide
smoothly, and return to the original position under the
pressure of spring [B] when it is pushed by sticks or
other soft bars.
Remark
○ Check the relief valve after installation, since
the process of disassembling and assembling the
relief valve will change its performance.
★ Clean up the relief valve using the high flash

solvent, and then blow out the foreign matter in the
o @
nic
relief valve using compressed air if any impurity or
foreign matter is found in the above checking process.
ec
p.t
Warning
Clean the engine oil pressure relief valve in
a well-ventilated place, and prevent any spark
de
or flame nearby operating areas. It is forbidden
to clean the relief valve using gasoline or low s -
flash solvents, since they are extremely
r tin
Ma
flammable.
★ Replace the entire engine oil pressure relief valve if

the above problem cannot be solved by cleaning the d re
relief valve. It is not allowed to separately replace the
individual parts, since the engine oil pressure relief xan
valve is made with refined processing.
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 313
P
CO
Measurement of engine oil pressure
Measurement of engine oil
Measurement of engine oil

● Disassemble the oil passage plug [A].
● Connect the adaptor of engine oil pressure gauge and
engine oil pressure gauge to the low crankcase.
Special tool-engine oil pressure gauge 10 kgf/cm²
Adaptor of engine oil pressure gauge PT3/8
● Start the engine for preheating.

● Run the engine at the specified speed, and take the
readings on the engine oil pressure gauge.
★ Immediately check the wear patterns of oil pump,
relief valve and / or crankcase bearing bush if the engine
oil pressure is far lower than the standard.
★ Check whether the oil passage is blocked if the
engine oil pressure if far higher than the standard.
Engine oil pressure

Standard: 400-420 kPa [Engine speed=4 000 r/min, Engine oil pressure=85°C]
● Shut down the engine.
● Disassemble the engine oil pressure gauge and adaptor of engine oil pressure gauge.
Warning
Take care not to let the skin be burnt by
the engine oil flowing from oil passage during
disassembly of adaptor of engine oil pressure
gauge!
o @
nic
● Install and lock the oil passage plug [A].
Locking torque of oil passage plug: 20 N·m.
ec
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 314
P
CO
Engine oil pressure switch
Disassembly of engine oil pressure switch
●Release the engine oil (see Chapter III “Check and
Regular adjustment”-“Replacement of engine oil”).
Disassemble the engine oil pressure switch wiring.
Disassemble the engine oil pressure switch [A] and
gasket.
Check of engine oil pressure switch

Check whether the connector terminal has good contact
with thread position. There is internal open-circuit in the
terminal, if not, and it needs to be replaced.
Test whether there is impedance phenomenon on the
sensor pin and engine crankcase when unplugging the
sensor connector after starting the engine. There may be
water or oil inside, or there is insufficient pressure in the
o @
nic
engine, if any.
Initial pressure of alarming: 0.055±0.015MPa
ec
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 315
P
CO
Installation of engine oil pressure switch
● Apply the fastening adhesive to the thread of engine
oil pressure switch [A], and then lock the engine oil
pressure switch [A] and gasket.
Locking torque of engine pressure switch [A]: 24.5
N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18 ft·lb)
● Install the engine oil pressure switch wiring.
Remark
○ Add a little amount of lubricating grease to
the terminal block so as not to block two air
vents [A] of switch membrane.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 316
P
CO
Crankshaft / transmission gear
Breakdown drawing
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 317
P
CO
Breakdown drawing
Torque
No. Fastener Remark
N·m kgf·m ft·lb
1 Balance shaft driven gear lock nut 100 10.2 73.7 L
2 Connecting rod big end nut See the
text
3 Crankshaft flywheel nut 105 10.7 77.4 L
4 Balance shaft driving gear lock nut 60 6 44 L
5 Follower bolt (M6, L = 14 mm) 10 1 89 in·lb L
6 Oil passage plug (M16, L = 15 mm) 24.5 2.5 18.1 L
7 Follower screw (M6, L = 16 mm) 7 0.71 62 in·lb L
8 Support bolt (M6, L = 20 mm) 10 1 89 in·lb L
9 Crankcase bolt (M8, L = 85 mm) 24.5 2.5 18.1 MO、S
o @
nic
10 Crankcase bolt (M6, L = 40 mm) 10 1 89 in·lb S
11 Crankcase bolt (M10, L = 60mm) 45 4.6 33.3 MO、S
ec
p.t
12 Crankcase bolt (M8, L = 75 mm) 24.5 2.5 18.1 S
13 Crankcase bolt (M8, L = 115 mm) 24.5 2.5 18.1 S
de
14
15
Crankcase bolt (M10, L = 100mm)
Crankcase bolt (M8, L = 45 mm)
45
24.5
4.6
2.5
33.3
18.1
MO、S
S s -
G: Apply lubricating grease. r tin
L: Apply thread fastening adhesive.
Ma
LG: Apply mould closing adhesive.
M: Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricating grease. d re
MO: Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution.
xan
(Weight ratio of engine oil and molybdenum disulfide lubricating grease: 10:1)
A le
R: Replace parts.
S: Follow the specified tightening sequences. A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 318
P
CO
Breakdown drawing
o @
c nic
e
No. Fastener
Torque
Remark e p.t
N·m kgf·m ft·lb
- d
1 Flywheel lock nut 100 10.2 73.7
ins
2 Overrunning clutch bolt 20 2.04 14.74 L
r t
Ma
3 Positioning roller rocker arm bolt 12 1.22 106in·lb L
4 Shift positioning star wheel fixing bolt 12 1.22 106in·lb
EO: Apply engine oil.
d re
G: Apply lubricating grease.
xan
L: Apply thread fastening adhesive.
M: Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricating grease. A le
R: Replace parts.
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 319
P
CO
Crankcase, crankshaft and
connecting rod
Bend of connecting rod ––– TIR 0.2/100 mm
(0.008/3.94 in.)
Distortion of connecting rod ––– TIR 0.2/100 mm
(0.008/3.94 in.)
Clearance of connecting rod big end 0.1 ∼ 0.25 mm 0.38 mm
(0.0039 ∼ 0.0098 in.) (0.015 in.)
Clearance of bearing bush of 0.028 ∼ 0.052 mm 0.07mm
connecting rod big end / crankshaft (0.0011 ∼ 0.0020 in.) (0.0027 in.)
pin
Diameter of crankshaft pin: 29.962 ∼ 29.976 mm 29.91 mm
(1.1796 ∼ 1.1801 in.) (1.1775 in.)
Mark: A 29.969 ∼ 29.976 mm –––
(1.1799 ∼ 1.1801 in.)
B ○ 29.962 ∼ 29.968 mm –––
(1.1796 ∼ 1.1798 in.)
Bore diameter of connecting rod big 33.000 ∼ 33.016 mm –––
end: (1.2992 ∼ 1.2998 in.)
Mark A 33.000 ∼ 33.008 mm –––
(1.2992 ∼ 1.299 5 in.)
B ○ 33.009 ∼ 33.016 mm –––
(1.2995 ∼ 1.2998 in.)
Thickness of bearing bush of
connecting rod big end:
Yellow 1.500 ∼ 1.503 mm –––
(0.05905 ∼ 0.05917 in.)
Green 1.503 ∼ 1.506 mm –––
(0.05917 ∼0.05929 in.)
o @
nic
Blue 1.506 ∼ 1.509 mm –––
(0.05929 ∼ 0.05941 in.)
Extension of connecting rod bolt: （适用范围）(Scope of application) ec
New connecting rod 0.25 ∼ 0.34 mm
(0.0098 ∼ 0.0134 in.)
–––
e p.t
Old connecting rod 0.25 ∼ 0.34 mm –––
- d
Side clearance of crankshaft
(0.0098 ∼ 0.0134 in.)
0.10 ∼ 0.25mm 0.30 mm ins
(0.0039 ∼ 0.0098 in.) (0.0118 in.) r t
Radial oscillating quantity of
crankshaft
≤TIR 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) TIR 0.06 mm
(0.0024 in.)
Ma
Clearance of main crankshaft 0.022 ∼ 0.045 mm 0.06 mm
d re
bearing bush / oil passage
Diameter of main crankshaft oil
(0.0009 ∼ 0.0018in.)
31.958 ∼31.972 mm
(0.0024 in.)
31.94 mm
xan
passage:
Mark 1
(1.2582 ∼1.2587 in.)
31.965 ∼ 31.972 mm A
–––
le
(1.2575 in.)
(1.2585 ∼ 1.2587 in.)

A––– -
lS
2 31.958 ∼ 31.965 mm
(1.2582∼1.2585 in.)
Bore diameter of main crankshaft 35.000 ∼ 35.021 mm g a –––
bearing bush:
rt
(1.3779 ∼ 1.3788 in.)u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 320
P
CO
Technical data
Mark 01 35.000 ∼35.007 mm
(1.3779 ∼1.3782 in.)
02 35.007 ∼ 35.014 mm
(1.3782 ∼ 1.3785 in.)
03 35.014 ~ 35.021 mm
(1.3785 ∼ 1.3788 in.)
Thickness of main crankshaft
bearing bush:
Yellow 1.500∼ 1.503 mm
(0.0590 ∼ 0.0592 in.)
Green 1.503 ∼ 1.506 mm
(0.0592 ∼ 0.0593 in.)
Blue 1.506∼ 1.509 mm
(0.0593 ∼ 0.0594 in.)
Red 1.509 ∼ 1.512 mm
(0.0594 ∼ 0.0595 in.)
Piston
Bore diameter of cylinder (on the 65.010 ∼ 65.020 mm 65.10 mm
crankcase) (2.5594 ∼ 2.5598 in.) (2.5630 in.)
Piston diameter 64.97 ∼64.98 mm 64.90 mm
(2.5579 ∼ 2.5583 in.) (2.5551 in.)
Piston / cylinder clearance 0.030∼ 0.050 mm
(0.0012 ∼ 0.0020 in.)
Clearance of piston ring groove:
Top 0.05 ∼ 0.09 mm 0.17 mm
(0.0020 ∼ 0.0035in.) （0.0067 in.）
Section II 0.04 ∼ 0.08 mm 0.16 mm
(0.0016 ∼ 0.0031 in.) (0.0063 in.)
Width of piston ring groove: o @
Top 0.83 ∼ 0.85mm
(0.0327 ∼ 0.0335 in.)
0.90 mm
(0.0354 in.)
c nic
e
p.t
Section II 0.83 ∼ 0.85 mm 0.90 mm
(0.0327 ∼ 0.0335 in.) (0.0354 in.)
Thickness of piston ring:
de
Top 0.76 ∼ 0.78 mm
(0.0299 ∼ 0.0307 in.)
0.73 mm
(0.0287 in.) s -
Section II 0.77 ∼ 0.79 mm 0.74 mm
r tin
Ma
(0.0303 ∼ 0.0307 in.) (0.0291 in.)
End clearance of piston ring:
Top 0.15 ∼ 0.30 mm
(0.0059 ∼ 0.0118 in.)
0.4mm
(0.0157 in.)
d re
Section II 0.25 ∼ 0.45 mm
(0.0098 ∼ 0.0177 in.)
0.65 mm
(0.0256in.) xan
Composite oil ring 0.20 ∼ 0.70 mm
A 1.0 mm le
(0.0079 ∼ 0.0276 in.)
A - (0.039 in.)
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 321
P
CO
Technical data
Transmission gear
Thickness of fork 5.8 ∼ 5.9 mm 5.65 mm
(0.2283 ∼ 0.2323 in.) (0.2224 in.)
Width of fork groove on gear 6 ∼ 6.05 mm 6.15 mm
(0.2362 ∼ 0.2382 in.) (0.2421 in.)
Diameter of fork guide pin 7.93 ∼ 8.0 mm 7.83 mm
(0.3122 ∼ 0.315 in.) (0.3083 in.)
Width of shift drum groove 8.05 ∼ 8.15 mm 8.25 mm
(0.3169 ∼ 0.3209 in.) (0.3248 in.)
Selection of bearing bush of connecting rod big end

Bore diameter mark of Diameter mark of Bearing bush
connecting rod big end crankshaft pin Dimension and color Part No.
A A Yellow 170116030000
A B
Green 170116030000
B A
B B Blue 170116030000
Selection of main crankshaft bearing shaft

Bore diameter mark of Bearing bush*
Diameter mark of main
main crankshaft bearing
crankshaft oil passage Dimension and color Part No.
bush
01 1 Yellow 150026030000
o @
02 1
Green 150026030000 c nic
e
p.t
01 2
03 1
Blue 150026030000
de
02
03
2
2 Red 150026030000 s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 322
P
CO

Tooling of piston installation: Adhesive:
Bearing puller:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 323
P
CO
Crankcase
Crankcase
Crankcase disassembly
● Disassemble the engine (see “Frame / engine installation”-“Engine disassembly”).
● Place the engine on a clean surface to ensure that the engine remains stable after disassembling parts.
● Disassemble:
Clutch (see “Clutch”-“Clutch disassembly”)
Starting motor (see “Electrical starting system”-“Starting motor”)
Engine oil pump (see “Engine lubricating system”-“Disassembly of oil pump”)
Alternator rotor (see “Electrical system”-“Disassembly of alternator rotor”)
Engine oil filter (see “Engine lubricating system”-“Disassembly of engine oil filter”)
Oil pan (see “Engine lubricating system”-“Disassembly of oil pan”)
External gearshift (see “External gearshift”)
● Disassemble the screw on oil-gas separation

labyrinth of right cavity cover, and remove the cover
plate and cover plate gasket;
○ First, disassemble M6 screw and M6 bolt.
Disassemble M6 bolt [A].
● Disassemble the bolt M6 on side cover plate of o @

output sprocket, and remove the pressing plate of oil
c nic
seal;
e
Disassemble M6 bolt [A].
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 324
P
CO
Crankcase
Crankcase
● Disassemble the bolt of lower crankcase.
○ First, disassemble M6 bolt [A].
○ Then disassemble M10 bolt [C].
● Disassemble the bolt of upper crankcase. o @

○ First, disassemble M8 bolt [B].
c nic
○ Then disassemble M10 bolt [C].
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 325
P
CO
Crankcase
Crankcase
○ Then disassemble M8 bolt (sequence no.: 1-6).
● Gently knock the surfaces around meshing plane of

crankcase using a plastic hammer, and disassemble the
crankcase. Please avoid damaging the crankcase!
★ Disassemble the piston before disassembling the
crankshaft (see “Piston disassembly”).
● Disassemble the crankshaft connecting rod assembly

and balance shaft assembly in the crankcase (see
“Disassembly of crankshaft and balance shaft”).
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 326
P
CO
Crankcase
Crankcase
Crankcase installation
Notes
The upper half and lower half parts of
crankcase are entirely processed in the factory,
so they must be entirely replaced.
● Clean the meshing plane of crankcase using high

flash solvents, and wipe it out.
● Blow out the oil passage in crankcase using
compressed air.
● Marked side [B] of shift drum bearing [A] should be
toward the outside during installation, as shown in the
figure.
● Install the pressing plate of bearing [C] and bolt M6
[D].
○ The sharp side of pressing plate of bearing should fall
down, and its blunt side should be inward during
installation.
○ Apply the thread fastening adhesive to the thread of
follower bolt on fixed bearing, and then lock the bolt.
Locking torque of bolt on pressing plate of bearing:
10N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 7.4ft·lb)
●The direction of marked side [B] of new roller

bearing [A] of gear shaft during installation is shown in
the figure. o @
● The surface [D] of new oil seal [C] should be leveled
c nic
with the crankcase surface [E] during installation of e
new oil seal [C].
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
● Install:
Piston connecting rod assembly of crankshaft [A] (see “Installation of piston connecting rod assembly of
crankshaft”)
d re
Balance shaft assembly [B] (see “Installation of balance shaft assembly”)
Locating pin [C] xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 327
P
CO
Crankcase
Crankcase
● Install the shift assembly of main shaft and
counter shaft. (See “Installation of main shaft and
counter shaft assembly”)
● Check the following items before connecting
the lower crankcase and upper crankcase.
○ Check whether the shift drum and main shaft and
counter shaft are in the neutral position.
● Apply the mould closing sealant [A] to the meshing

plane on the lower half of crankcase.
● Install the oil passage plug [C], and apply the thread
fastening adhesive during installation.
Remarks
○ Avoid blocking the orifice of oil passage plug
[C] when applying the mould closing sealant.
○ Apply the mould closing adhesive to the o @
mould closing surface on the lower half of
c nic
crankcase within 20min.
e
e p.t
Notes
- d
Do not apply the mould closing sealant
ins
to the oil groove [B] nearby the main
r t
Ma
crankshaft bearing bush and counter shaft
bearing of balance shaft!
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 328
P
CO
Crankcase
Crankcase
● Connect the lower crankcase to the upper crankcase.
● Apply the molybdenum disulfide oil solution to the
contact area [A] of gasket and bolt and thread [B] of
M10 and M8 bolts.
● Lock the mould closing bolt of upper crankcase in the

specified sequence (No.: 1-21).
○ M8 and M10 bolts are equipped with gaskets. Please
replace the old gaskets into new ones.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 329
P
CO
Crankcase
Crankcase
○ Lock:
M6 bolt [A]
M8 bolt [B] and gasket
M10 bolt [C] and gasket
Final locking torque:
Crankcase bolt (M6):10 N·m (first tightening)
Crankcase bolt (M8): 24.5 N·m (second tightenings:
10, 24.5)
Crankcase bolt (M10): 45 N·m
(third tightenings: 10, 24.5, 45)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
● Check the following items after locking all crankcase ins
r t
Ma
bolts.
○ Check whether the crankshaft and transmission shaft
can rotate smoothly.
d re
○ Check whether the gear can be smoothly shifted from
first gear to neutral gear and vise versa when rotating the xan
output shaft.
A le
● Install the disassembled parts (see corresponding
A -
chapters).
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 330
P
CO
Crankshaft and connecting rod
Disassemble the balance shaft of crankshaft
● Disassemble the crankcase (See detailed information at
"Disassemble the crankcase")
● Disassemble the connecting rod (See detailed
information at "Disassemble the connecting rod"
Hex nuts on crankshaft [E]
Driving gear of balance shaft [D]
Driving gear [F]
Lock nuts on balance shaft [B]
Gear of balance shaft [C]
Axle sleeve [A]
● Disassemble the crankshaft and balance shaft from the
crankcase.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 331
P
CO
Crankshaft assembly
Attention
To replace the crankshaft, bearing bush or
upper crankcase/lower crankcase, select
appropriate bearing bush. Check the clearance
with a plastic clearance gauge, and then
assemble the engine thus to mount appropriate
bearing bush.
● Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution on the
principal axis bushing of crankshaft.
● Install the connecting rod on the crankshaft (See
details at "Connecting rod assembly").
● Assembly
Flat key
Driving gear [F]
Driving gear of balance shaft [D]
On the gasket
● Apply for tighten glue and lock the nuts [B]
Locking torque
Locking torque on the driving gear of balance shaft 60
N·m (6 kgf·m, 44ft·lb)
o @
c nic
Balance shaft assembly e
● Rotate the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC)
e p.t
● Assembly the balance shaft on the upper box
- d
● Assembly
ins
Axle sleeve
r t
Ma
Flat key
Driven gear of balance shaft. Align the mark [D] with
the mark [C] on the driving gear of balance shaft [A].
d re
● Apply for tighten glue and lock the nuts
Locking torque xan
Locking torque on the driving gear of balance shaft
A le
100 N·m (10.2kgf·m, 73.7ft·lb)
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 332
P
CO
Connecting rod disassemble
●Disassemble the crankcase (See detailed information at
● Disassemble:
Connecting rod nut [A]
Crankshaft
Note
○ Make a mark on the connecting rod and
connecting rod cover thus to assemble them to the
original position.
● Disassemble the piston (See detailed information at

"Disassemble the piston")
Attention
Discard the disassembled old connecting rod
bolt. To avoid damage to the crankshaft pin
surface, it is necessary to ensure that the
connecting rod bolt will not be knocked down
to the crankshaft pin.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 333
P
CO
Connecting rod assembly
Connecting rod cover [A]
Connecting rod [B]
Diameter symbol [C]: "A" or "B"
Attention
To replace the connecting rod, big end bearing
bush of connecting rod or crankcase, select
appropriate bearing bush. Check the clearance
with a plastic clearance gauge, and then
assemble the engine thus to mount appropriate
bearing bush.
● Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution on the upper

and lower inner surface of bearing bush [A].
● Apply molybdenum disulfide solution on the contact
surface [B] of connecting rod nut and screw thread [B].
● Arrange the nails at the same side at installation of
bearing bush. Install the bearing bush to the notches of
connecting rod and connecting rod cover.
Attention
The bearing bush will be damaged in case of
lubricating oil and grease not being applied
correctly.
o @
○ Avoid damage on bearing bush surface from
connecting rod edge [B] or connecting rod cover [C] at c nic
e
bearing bush assembly. A bearing bush assembly
method is as shown below: e p.t
Connecting rod cover assembly [D] - d
Connecting rod assembly [E]
ins
Push [F] r t
Spare locating pin [G] Ma
Connecting rod bolt [H]
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 334
P
CO
● Clean the sundries on the bush, as well as the bearing surface.
● Assemble the lower subsidiary cover of the lock to the connecting rod and align the diameter symbol.
● Assemble the crankcase (See detailed information at "Assemble the crankcase")
● Assemble each connecting rod to the original crankshaft pin
○ Lock the connecting rod big end by adopting "plastic zone fastening method"
○ This approach can accurately achieve the required clamping force. Thus relatively finer and lighter bolts can be
used to further reduce the weight of connecting rod.
○ There are two plastic zone fastening methods in total. The first one is bolt length measurement method and the
other one is rotation angle method. You can choose either of the following methods. However, it is suggested to
adopt bolt length measurement method since the big head nut can be fixed more reliably.
Attention
The connecting rod bolt is subject to
elongating distortion thus secondary use is
prohibited! The detail information of
correct operating method for screw bolt and
nut is as shown in the table below.
Attention
Do not lock the nuts over tightly!
The bolts should be placed on the contact
surface correctly to avoid the bolt head
colliding to crankcase.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 335
P
CO
Connecting rod inspection
(1) Bolt length measurement method
● Since new connecting rod, bolt and nut shall be antirust solution processed, the bolt, nut and connecting rod
shall be completely cleaned with solvent of high flash point to avoid torque readings error.
Warning
The bolt, nut and connecting rod shall be cleaned
at a place with excellent ventilation condition to
strictly avoid any sparks or flames around the
operation area, including devices with indicator
light. Since gasoline or solvent of low flash point
are extremely inflammable, it is forbidden to clean
bolt, nut and connecting rod with them.
Attention
After cleaning, it is necessary to dry bolt and nut
with compressed air immediately.
Bear in mind that the bolt and nut shall be rinsed
thoroughly!
● Assemble the new bolt to old connecting rod.
● As shown in the Fig. below, make dent marks on two
bolt heads and bolt bottom.
● Before locking the bolt, measure the length of
connecting rod with a point micrometer and record the
measuring value so as to successively calculate the
elongation degree after locking the bolt.
Connecting rod [A]
Make dent marks [B]
Nut [C]
o @
nic
Insert micrometer pin to dent mark [D].
● Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution at the
following sections: ec
Screw thread on nut and bolt
e p.t
Contact surface of nut and connecting rod
● Lock the big head nut until that the bolt extension can reach the specified value in the following table. - d
● Check the length of connecting rod bolt
ins
★ If the elongation amount exceeds application scope, it indicates over extension of bolt. In case of over r t
extension of bolt, the bolt will be damaged during the use process.
Ma
Bolt length after locking-bolt length after locking=bolt extension
Connecting rod
d re
Application scope of connecting rod
an
Bolt Nut
assembly bolt elongation
Use bolts matching new

Nut matching new
le x
0.25 ∼ 0.34 mm
New
connecting rod
connecting rod
New - A (0.0098 ∼ 0.0134 in.)
A
lS
Old 0.25 ∼ 0.34 mm
Old Replace with new bolt
New
g a (0.0098 ∼ 0.0134 in.)
rt u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 336
P
CO
(2) Rotating moment method
★ If there is no point micrometer, rotating moment method can be adopted to lock nut.
● Since new connecting rod, bolt and nut shall be antirust solution processed, the bolt, nut and connecting rod
shall be completely cleaned with solvent of high flash point to avoid torque readings error.
Warning
The bolt, nut and connecting rod shall be
cleaned at a place with excellent ventilation
condition to strictly avoid any sparks or flames
around the operation area, including devices
with indicator light. Since gasoline or solvent
of low flash point are extremely inflammable,
it is forbidden to clean bolt, nut and
connecting rod with them.
Attention
After cleaning, it is necessary to dry bolt and
nut with compressed air immediately.
Bear in mind that the bolt and nut shall be
rinsed thoroughly!
● Assemble the new bolt to old connecting rod.

● Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution at the
following sections:
Screw thread on nut and bolt [A]
Contact surface of nut and connecting rod [B]
o @
c nic
e
p.t
● Lock the nut applying the stipulated locking torque.
See the table as below.
Connecting rod Moment de
assembly
Bolt Nut
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lb) s -
Use bolts matching
Nut matching new 25 (2.5, 18.4) score 10 (1, 7.37), 20(2, 14.7)
r tin
New new connecting
connecting rod twice prefixation
Ma
25 (2.5, 18.4) score 10 (1, 7.37), 20(2, 14.7)
rod New
twice prefixation
d re
Replace with new
Old
twice prefixation xan
25 (2.5, 18.4) score 10 (1, 7.37), 20(2, 14.7)
Old
bolt
New Ale
25 (2.5, 18.4) score 10 (1, 7.37), 20(2,
-
14.7) twice prefixation
A
Crankshaft/connecting rod cleaning
l S
a rod with solvent of high flash point.
● After removing the connecting rod from crankshaft, clean the connecting
g
rt u
● Discharge the foreign matters and residual oil in the crankshaft oil passage with compressed air.
P o
t o r
M o
o t o
lt i m
M u
-
PY 337
CO
Check the bend amount of connecting rod
● Disassemble the bearing bush of connecting rod big
end. And then assemble the lower subsidiary cover of
the lock to the connecting rod.
● Select a mandrel with a same diameter equal to that of
connecting rod big end [A]. And then insert the mandrel
from the connecting rod big end.
● Select a mandrel with a same diameter equal to that of
piston pin, and a length at least of 100mm (3.94 in.).
And then insert the mandrel from the connecting rod
small end.
● Place the mandrel of connecting rod big end on the V
block [C] on the slab.
● Fix the connecting rod vertically. Measure the difference value of mandrel height over 100mm (3.94 in.) on the
slab with a height gauge to determine the bend amount of connecting rod.
★ If the bend amount of connecting rod exceeds the service limit, the connecting rod shall be replaced.
Bend amount of connecting rod

Service limit:TIR 0.2/100 mm (0.008/3.94 in.)
Check the warp amount of connecting rod

● Fix the big head of mandrel [A] on V block [C].
Horizontally replace connecting rod. Measure the offset
of mandrel in mandrel [B] 100 mm (3.94 in.) length
parallel to slab to determine the warp amount of
connecting rod. o @
★ If the warp amount of connecting rod exceeds the
c nic
service limit, the connecting rod shall be replaced.
e
e p.t
Warp amount of connecting rod
Service limit: TIR 0.2/100 mm (0.008/3.94 in.) - d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 338
P
CO
Check the side clearance of connecting rod big
end
● Measure the side clearance of connecting rod big end
○ Insert the feeler gauge [A] between big end and
balance weight of any crankshaft to measure the
clearance between them.
Side clearance of connecting rod big end

Standard: 0.1~0.25 mm (0.0039~0.0098 in.)
Service limit: 0.38 mm (0.015 in.)
★ If the side clearance exceeds service limit, replace

the connecting rod to re-check side clearance. If the side
clearance after replacing the connecting rod is too big, it
is necessary to replace the crankshaft.
Check the abrasion of connecting rod big end

bearing bush/crankshaft pin.
● Check the clearance between bearing bush/crankshaft
pin [A] with a plastigauge [B].
● Lock the nuts of connecting rod big end with
stipulated moment (See detailed information of
"connecting rod assemble")
Notes
○ Do not rotate connecting rod and crankshaft
during the clearance measuring process!
Attention
o @
nic
Replace connecting rod bolt after measuring
the clearance.
ec
Clearance of connecting rod big end bearing bush/crankshaft pin
e p.t
Standard: 0.028~0.052 mm (0.0011~0.0020 in.)
- d
Service limit: 0.07mm (0.0027 in.)
ins
r t
Ma
★ If the measured clearance is within the standard, it
is not required to replace the bearing.
★ If the measured clearance is between 0.052 mm
(0.0020 in.) and service limit (0.07 mm, 0.0027 in.), d re
replace the current bearing bush [A] with that with
xan
blue paint [B]. Check the clearance between bearing
bush/crankshaft pin with a plastigauge. The measured A le
clearance can slightly exceed the standard, but shall
A -
not be lower than the minimum value to prevent
bearing bush biting. a lS
ug
rt
★ If the clearance value exceeds the service limit, measure the diameter of crankshaft pin.
o
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 339
P
CO
Diameter of crankshaft pin
Standard: 29.962~29.976 mm (1.1796~1.1801 in.)
Service limit: 29.91 mm(1.1775 in.)
★ If the abrasion of any crankshaft pin exceeds lower

limit of maintenance, replace with new crankshaft.
★ If the measured crankshaft pin diameter is equal to
or higher than the lower limit of maintenance, and the
original diameter symbol on the crankshaft is
inconsistent, replace with new diameter symbol.
Diameter symbol of crankshaft pin
A 29.969 ～ 29.976 mm(1.1799 ～ 1.1801 in.)
B 29.962 ～ 29.968 mm(1.1796 ～ 1.1798 in.)
△: Diameter symbol of crankshaft pin: "A" or "B"
● Measure the inner diameter of the connecting rod big end. Make corresponding marks on the connecting rod big
end according to the measured inner diameter.
● Lock the nuts of connecting rod big end with stipulated locking moment (See detailed information of
"connecting rod assemble")
Notes
○ The measuring result and connecting rod big end
shall be approximate to original symbols.
Inner diameter symbol of connecting rod big end
A 33.000 ～ 33.008 mm(1.2992 ～ 1.299 5 in.)
B 33.009 ～ 33.016 mm(1.2995 ～ 1.2998 in.)
Connecting rod cap [A]
Connecting rod body [B]
Diameter symbol [C]: "A" or "B"
o @
c nic
e
● Select appropriate bearing bush according to the e p.t
combination of connecting rod and crankshaft code [A]. - d
Size color [B]
ins
Inner Bearing bush
r t
Ma
Diameter
diameter
symbol of
symbol of
connecting
crankshaft
pin
Size
color
Part number
d re
rod big end
A A Yellow 170116030000 xan
B A
Green 170116030000 A le
A B
A -
B B Blue 170116030000
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 340
P
CO
● Assemble the new bearing bush to connecting rod.
Measure the clearance between bearing bush/crankshaft
pin with a plastigauge.
Check the side clearance of crankshaft.

● Move the crankshaft [A] to crankshaft transmission
chain.
● Insert the feeler gauge [B] to the 2# main oil duct end
and crankshaft end [C] of crankcase to measure the
clearance.
Side clearance of crankshaft

Standard: 0.10~0.25 mm (0.0039~0.0098 in.)
Service limit: 0.30mm (0.0118 in.)
Notes
○ The crankcase shall be replaced for the whole
set.
● Check the width of the 2# main oil duct

● Check the width of the 2# main oil duct [A]
★ If the measured value exceeds the standard value,
replace the crankshaft [B].
The width of the 2# main oil duct of crankshaft

Standard: 24.00~24.05 mm ( 0.9449~0.9468 in.)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
Measure the radial oscillating quantity of
ins
crankshaft.
r t
● Jack-up the both ends of crankshaft with a thimble.
Measure the radial oscillating quantity of crankshaft.
Ma
★ If the measured value exceeds the standard value,
d re
replace the crankshaft.
xan
Radial oscillating quantity of crankshaft. A le
Standard: ≤TIR 0.02mm (0.0008in.)
A -
Service limit: TIR 0.06 mm (0.0024 in.)
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 341
P
CO
Check the abrasion of main bearing bush of
crankshaft/oil duct.
● Check the clearance between bearing bush/oil duct [B]
with a plastigauge [A].
Notes
○ Lock the crankcase bolt with stipulated moment
(See detailed information for "Crankcase assembly").
○ Do not rotate the crankshaft during the clearance
measuring process!
○ Oil duct clearance less than 0.025mm (0.00098 in.)
can not be measured with a plastigauge. Original parts
enable the clearance satisfying the minimum standard.
Clearance of crankshaft principal axis bushing/oil duct

Standard: 0.022~0.045 mm (0.0009~0.0018in.)
★ If the measured clearance is within the

aforementioned standard, it is not required to replace the
bearing bush.
★ If the measured clearance is between 0.046 mm
(0.002 in.) and service limit (0.06 mm, 0.0024 in.),
replace the current bearing bush [A] with that with black
paint [B]. Check the clearance between bearing
bush/crankshaft pin with a plastigauge. The measured
clearance can slightly exceed the standard, but shall not
be lower than the minimum value to prevent bearing
o @
nic
bush biting.
★ If the clearance value exceeds the service limit, measure the diameter of the main oil duct of crankshaft.
ec
Diameter of the main oil duct of crankshaft
e p.t
Standard: 31.958~31.972 mm (1.2582~1.2587 in.)
Service limit: 31.94 mm (1.2575 in.) - d
ins
★ If the abrasion of any oil duct exceeds the service r t
limit, replace with new crankshaft.
Ma
★ If the measured oil duct diameter is not lower than
the service limit, and the original diameter symbol on the
d re
crankshaft is inconsistent, replace with new diameter
xan
symbol.
Diameter symbol of the main oil duct of crankshaft
A le
1 31.965 ～ 31.972 mm(1.2585 ～ 1.2587 in.)
A -
2 31.958 ～ 31.965 mm(1.2582～1.2585 in.)
□: Diameter symbol of the main oil duct of crankshaft: “1” or "2".
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 342
P
CO
● Measure the inner diameter of the principal axis
bushing. Make corresponding marks on the crankcase
according to the measured inner diameter.
A: Inner diameter symbol of the principal axis bushing
of crankshaft: “01”, "02" or "03".
● Lock the crankcase bolt with stipulated locking
moment (See detailed information for "Crankcase
assembly").
Notes
○ The measuring results shall be approximately
to original symbols of the upper part of
crankcase.
Inner diameter symbol of the principal axis bushing of crankshaft

01 35.000 ～35.007 mm(1.3779 ～1.3782 in.)
02 35.007 ～ 35.014 mm(1.3782 ～ 1.3785 in.)
03 35.014 ~ 35.021 mm(1.3785 ～ 1.3788 in.)
● Select appropriate bearing bush according to the

combination of connecting rod and crankshaft code [A].
Size color [B]
Inner Spindle Bearing bush *

diameter oil duct
symbol of the diameter
Size Part number
principal axis
bushing of
symbol of
crankshaf
color
o @
crankshaft t
1500260300 c nic
01 1 Yellow e
p.t
00
02 1 1500260300
01 2
Green
00 de
02 2 1500260300 s -
03 1
Blue
00
r tin
Ma
1500260300
03 2 Red
00
bush/oil duct with a plastigauge. d re

● Assemble the new bearing bush to the upper crankcase and lower crankcase. Measure the clearance between
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 343
P
CO
Piston
Piston
Disassemble the piston
● Disassemble the crankcase (See detailed information at
● Disassemble:
Connecting rod nut [A]
Connecting rod cover at the lower end of connecting rod
● Disassemble the crankshaft.

● Push out the piston in the direction of junk head.
● Disassemble the retainer ring of piston pin [A].

● Disassemble the piston pin.
● Disassemble the piston.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
● Unfold the opening of piston ring with thumb carefully.
Boost at the back of piston ring [A] to remove the piston
ring.
d re
● Disassemble the compound oil ring with thumb according
to the same method (including three components). xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 344
P
CO
Piston
Piston
Piston assembly
● Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution on the
bushing ring of compound oil ring. Assemble the
bushing ring of compound oil ring on the piston ring
bottom. Do not stuck the two sides of the bushing ring
[B].
● Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution on scraper
of compound oil ring. And then assemble the compound
oil ring and scraper ring. Assemble one on the upper
side of the bushing ring, and the other on the lower side
of the bushing ring.
○ Unfold the scraper ring with thumb carefully. It
should not overexert. Put the scraper ring on the piston.
○ Loosen the scraper ring. Make it drop to the piston ring at the bottom.
Notes
○ Scraper ring is not located at the "top" or
"bottom".
● Do not confuse top piston ring and the secondary

piston ring!
● While assembling top piston ring, the symbol "DY" [B]
should be upward.
● While assembling the secondary piston ring, the
symbol "D" [D] should be upward.
○ Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution on piston
ring.
o @
Notes
c nic
○ In case of replacing new piston, it is necessary e
to replace with a new piston ring.
e p.t
● Put a new piston pin check ring to piston. Coincide - d
the opening of piston pin check ring [A] and on the hole
ins
of piston pin [B]. r t
○ Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution on piston
Ma
pin and piston pin hole.
○ Do not overexert at assembling the piston pin check
d re
ring.
xan
Attention
A le
Don't take recycle ring to retaining ring. The
A -
lS
check ring will be deformed, weak the
locking force, fall off and scratch the casing
wall. g a
rt u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 345
P
CO
Piston
Piston
● The opening of piston ring shall be as shown on the
position of the right figure. The opening of compound
oil ring shall present an angle of 30～40° with the
opening of piston ring.
Top piston ring [A]
The secondary piston ring [B]
Upper scraper ring assembly [C]
Bushing ring of compound oil ring [D]
Lower scraper ring assembly [E]
Hole [F]
30～40°[G]
● The symbol shall be at the air inlet side at piston

assembly.
● Assemble the piston with a piston ring installation tool
[A] from the side of piston ring.
Dedicated tool-Piston ring assemble tool
● Assembly:
Crankcase (See detailed information at "Assemble the
crankcase")
Connecting rod cover at the lower end of the connecting
rod (See details at "Connecting rod assembly").
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 346
P
CO
Piston
Piston
Check abrasion status of cylinder stator (upper
crankcase)
● Due to different abrasion status of cylinder stator
(upper crankcase), perform measurement from one side
to the other side, from the front to the back (four times
in total) as shown in the two positions of the right
diagram.
★ If any inner diameter measurement value of cylinder
stator exceeds the service limit, replace the crankcase!
10 mm (0.39 in.) [A]
60 mm (2.36 in.) [B]
Inner diameter of cylinder stator (upper crankcase)
Standard: 65.010 ~ 65.020 mm ( 2.5594~ 2.5598 in.)
Check the piston abrasion

● Measure the outer diameter of each piston [A] at a
position 10mm (0.39 in.) [B] away from the piston
bottom vertical to the piston pin.
★ If the measured value is less than the lower limit,
replace the piston!
Piston diameter
Standard: 64.97~64.98 mm ( 2.5579~ 2.5583 in.)
Service limit: 64.90 mm ( 2.5551 in.)
Check the abrasion of piston ring and piston ring

groove.
o @
nic
● Check the base of piston ring to determine whether
the circular groove is subject to uneven wear.
ec
p.t
★ The piston ring shall be totally parallel to the surface
of circular groove, otherwise pistons and piston rings
shall be replaced. de
● When the piston ring is in the circular groove,
s -
measure the feeler gauge [A] for several times to
r tin
Ma
determine the clearance of piston ring/piston ring
groove.
Clearance of piston ring/piston ring groove
Standard: d re
Top piston ring: 0.05~0.09mm (0.0020～0.0035in.)
xan
The secondary piston ring: 0.77~0.79 mm (0.0303~0.0307 in.)
Service limit: A le
Top piston ring: 0.17mm (0.0067 in.)
A -
The secondary piston ring: 0.16 mm (0.0063 in.)
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 347
P
CO
Piston
Piston
Check the width of piston circular groove
● Measure the width of piston circular groove
○ Measure the width of piston circular groove with a
vernier caliper at different measuring points.
Width of piston circular groove
Standard:
Top piston ring [A]: 0.83~0.85mm (0.0327~0.0335
in.)
The secondary piston ring [B]: 0.83~ 0.85mm
(0.0327~ 0.0335 in.)
Service limit:
Top piston ring [A]: 0.90mm (0.0354 in.)
The secondary piston ring [B]: 0.90mm ( 0.0354 in.)
★ If the width of any piston circular groove measured at any point is greater than the service limit, please replace
the piston!
Check the thickness of piston ring

● Check the thickness of piston ring
○ Measure the width of piston circular groove with a micrometer at different measuring points.
Thickness of piston ring

Standard:
Top piston ring [A]: 0.76~ 0.78 mm ( 0.0299~0.0307
in.)
The secondary piston ring [B]: 0.77~0.79 mm
o @
(0.0303~0.0307 in.)
Service limit: c nic
e
Top piston ring [A]: 0.73mm (0.0287 in.)
The secondary piston ring [B]: 0.74mm (0.0291 in.) e p.t
- d
★ If the width of any piston ring is lower than the
ins
service limit, please replace all the piston rings! r t
Notes Ma
○ If the new piston ring is used on the old one,
d re
an
check if the piston circular groove is subject to
uneven wear. The piston ring shall be totally
parallel to the surface of circular groove, le x
otherwise the pistons shall be replaced. - A
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 348
P
CO
Piston
Piston
Check the open clearance of piston ring.
● Put the piston ring [A] into air cylinder (upper
crankcase). Assemble the piston ring to air cylinder
bottom by utilizing piston due to smaller abrasion at air
cylinder bottom.
● Measure the open clearance of piston ring with a
feeler gauge [B].
Open clearance of piston ring

Standard:
Top piston ring: 0.15~0.30mm (0.0059~0.0118 in.)
The secondary piston ring: 0.25~0.45 mm (0.0098~
0.0177 in.)
Oil ring: 0.20~0.70 mm (0.0079~0.0276 in.)
Service limit:
Top piston ring: 0.4mm(0.0157 in.)
The secondary piston ring: 0.65 mm(0.0256in.)
Oil ring: 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
★ If the open clearance of piston ring is higher than the service limit, please replace all the piston rings!
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 349
P
CO
Electric start
Electric start
Disassemble the left cover
● Disassemble the engine (See
"Disassemble/assemble"-"Disassemble the engine")
● Screw off the left cover bolts [A]
● Disassemble the left cover [B]
Disassemble the flywheel

● Screw off the flywheel lock nut [A]
● Pull out the flywheel [B]
o @
c nic
e
Disassemble electric starting idle wheel and
e p.t
starting big gear wheel
- d
● Disassemble electric starting idle wheel and starting
ins
idler shaft
r t
Ma
● Disassemble starting big gear
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 350
P
CO
Electric start
Electric start
Disassemble the overrun clutch
● Disassemble the flywheel (See detailed information at
"Disassemble the flywheel")
● Screw off the bolt of overrun clutch [A]
● Disassemble the overrun clutch [B] and outer ring of

overrun clutch [C]
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 351
P
CO
Electric start
Electric start
Installation the overrun clutch
● Disassemble the overrun clutch [A] and outer ring of
overrun clutch [B] on the flywheel [C].
● Assemble the bolts of overrun clutch [D]
○ Apply threaded fastening adhesive on the screw thread
of overrun clutch bolt.
Locking torque of overrun clutch bolt [D]：20N·m
(2.04 kgf·m, 177.48in·lb)
Assemble the starting big gear and electric

starting idler
● Assemble the starting big gear [A]
● Assemble the electric starting idler [C] of starting idler
shaft [B]
○ Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricating grease on
starting idler shaft
● Assemble the electric starting idler [C]
Flywheel assembly
● Assemble the overrun clutch (See detailed information o @
at "Overrun clutch assembly")
c nic
● Flywheel assembly [A]
e
● Gasket assembly [B]
e p.t
● Flywheel lock nut assembly [C]
Locking torque of flywheel lock:100N·m (10.2 kgf·m, - d
887.75in·lb) ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 352
P
CO
Electric start
Electric start
Left cover assembly
● Left cover assembly
● Left cover bolts assembly
Locking torque of left cover bolt：12N·m (1.22 kgf·m,
106.49in·lb)
Check the overrun clutch

● Disassemble:
Left cover (See detailed information at "Left cover
disassembly")
Electric starting idler and starting idler shaft (See
detailed information at "Disassemble of starting big gear
and electric starting idler").
● Rotate the starting big gear with hands [A].
From the left side of engine, the starting big gear shall
rotate smoothly to backward [B], but not forward.
★ If the overrun clutch can not work normally, or run
with noise, disassemble the overrun clutch and visual o @
inspect every part.
c nic
In case of any worn or damaged parts, please replace
e
them!
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 353
P
CO
Variable gear
Variable gear
Disassemble the pedal with variable speed
● Disassemble:
Bolt of gear lever [A]
Gear lever [B]
Gear shift pedal assembly

● Gear shift pedal assembly
● Tighten up the bolts of pedal with variable speed
Locking torque of bolts of pedal with variable speed：6.9 N·m (0.70 kgf·m, 61 in·lb)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 354
P
CO
Variable gear
Variable gear
Disassemble the external gear shift mechanism
● Disassemble:
Gear shift pedal
Clutch (See detailed information "clutch"-"Disassemble
the clutch")
● Pull the variable gear arm [A] and disassemble the
variable block arm shaft [B].
● Disassemble:
Rocker arm bolt of positioning idler wheel [A]
Rocker arm, gasket and rocker arm spring of positioning
idler wheel
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 355
P
CO
Variable gear
Variable gear
Assemble the external gear shift mechanism
● Assemble the rocker arm spring as shown in the Fig.
below [A]
Gasket [B]
Rocker arm of positioning idler wheel [C]
Rocker arm bolt of positioning idler wheel [D]
Locking torque of rocker arm bolt of positioning idler
wheel: 12 N·m (1.22 kgf·m, 106.49in·lb)
Check the external gear shift mechanism

● Check whether the variable block arm shaft [A] is
intact.
★ If the variable block arm shaft is bended, straighten it
or replace with the new product.
★ If the spline [B] on the variable block arm shaft is
damaged, please replace the variable block arm shaft.
★ If the spring [C] is damaged, please replace the
spring.
★ If the variable gear arm [D] or pusher dog [E] is
damaged, please replace the variable block arm shaft.
● Check whether the locating shaft of variable gear arm o @
[A] is loosening.
c nic
★ If the locating shaft of variable gear arm is loosening, e
remove it, apply threaded fastening adhesive on the
e p.t
screw thread, and lock the locking torque of bolts of
- d
variable block arm shaft: 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,21 ft·lb)
ins
r t
Ma
● Check whether the rocker arm of positioning idler
wheel [B] and spring is ruptured or twisted.
★ If the positioning idler wheel rocker arm or spring is
d re
damaged, please replace with good one.
xan
● Perform visual inspection on gear shifting star wheel
A le
[C]
A -
lS
★ In case of severe wear or any damage of shifting star wheel, please replace with good one.
a
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 356
P
CO
Variable gear
Variable gear
Disassemble the principal and auxiliary shaft
● Disassemble the crankcase (See detailed information
at "Disassemble the crankcase")
● Disassemble the principal [A] and auxiliary [B] axis
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 357
P
CO
Variable gear
Variable gear
The principal [A] and auxiliary [B] axis assembly
● Check whether the bearing retainer [A] on the crankcase is assembled to right position.
● Assemble the principal axis on the crankcase
○ The bearing check ring shall align to the groove of bearing outer ring.
● Check whether the bearing retainer [B] on the

crankcase is assembled to right position.
● Assemble the auxiliary axis on the crankcase
○ The bearing check ring shall align to the groove of
bearing outer ring.
● Crankshaft assembly o @
● Press the oil seal [C] on the axle sleeve [D]. Align the
c nic
oil seal surface to the exterior plane [E] of crankcase.
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 358
P
CO
Variable gear
Variable gear
Disassemble the principal and auxiliary axis
● Disassemble the principal and auxiliary axis(See
detailed information at "Disassemble the principal and
auxiliary axis")
● Disassemble the check ring and gasket. Remove all the
gears.
● Remove the ball bearing of each axis [A]
Dedicated tool-bearing extractor [B]
Adaptor of bearing extractor [C]
● Discard bearing
The principal and auxiliary axis assembly

● Apply engine oil on the surface of bush sleeve, ball
bearing and axis surface
● Install the gear bush [A] to the axis to align the holes
on them [B] mutually.
● All the removed check ring shall be replaced with new
products.
● The opening [B] on the check ring [A] shall align to

spline groove [C].
● While assembling the check ring, the face of check
ring with stamped rounded corners shall face the gasket.
● The principal axis gear can be identified according to
the diameter: The one with the Min. diameter is grade I
gear. The one with the Max. diameter is grade VI gear.
Make sure to assemble all the parts according to the
correct order. All the check rings and gaskets shall be o @
installed to right position.
● While assembling the grade III and IV gears to the c nic
e
p.t
principal axis, the oil holes on the gear shall be aligned
to each other.
● While install bush of six grade gear on the principal de
axis, the oil holes on the bush shall be aligned.
s -
● The auxiliary axis gear can be identified according to
the diameter: The one with the Max. diameter is grade I r tin
gear. The one with the Min. diameter is grade VI gear.
Ma
Make sure to assemble all the parts according to the
correct order. All the check rings and gaskets shall be
d re
installed to right position.
● While assembling the grade V and VI gears to the xan
auxiliary axis, the oil holes on the gear shall be aligned
A le
to each other.
● While install bush of grade III/IV gear on the auxiliary A -
axis, the oil holes on the bush shall be aligned.
a lS
● After assembling the principal and auxiliary axis,
ug
rt
check whether the gear can be smoothly rotated or slide without being subject to resistance.
o
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 359
P
CO
Variable gear
Variable gear
1. Auxiliary axis 16. Gasket

2. Deep groove ball bearing 17. Deep groove ball bearing
o @
nic
3. Axle sleeve 18. Gasket
4. Grade II gear of auxiliary axis 19. Principal axis
5. Gasket of inner spline 20. Grade V gear of principal axis ec
6. Check ring
7. Grade VI gear of auxiliary axis
21. Axle sleeve
22. Gasket of inner spline e p.t
8. Grade IV gear of auxiliary axis 23. Elastic ring 24 - d
9. Axle sleeve of inner spline 24. Grade III, IV gear of principal axis
ins
10. Gasket of inner spline 25. Grade VI gear of principal axis
r t
Ma
11. Lock washer of inner spline 26. Axle sleeve of inner spline
12. Grade III gear of auxiliary axis 27. Gasket of inner spline
13. Grade V gear of auxiliary axis
14. Grade I gear of auxiliary axis
28. Lock washer of inner spline
29. Grade II gear of principal axis
d re
15. Axle sleeve 22
xan
○ The handle-foot [A] of lock washer of inner spline [11] shall be assembled to the notch [8] of lock washer of
inner spline [10].
A le
inner spline [27].
A -
○ The handle-foot [C] of lock washer of inner spline [28] shall be assembled to the notch [D] of lock washer of
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 360
P
CO
Variable gear
Variable gear
Disassemble the gear shift drum and shift fork
● Disassemble:
Upper crankcase (See detailed information at
The principal and auxiliary axis (See detailed information
at "Disassemble the principal and auxiliary axis")
External gear shift mechanism (See detailed information
at "External gear shift mechanism")
● Screw off the bolt [A]. Remove pressing plate [B]
● Pull out shift fork axis [C] and remove the shift fork
● Pull out shift drum [D]
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
Dismantle the shift drum
● Dismantle the shift drum (See detailed information at - d
"Dismantle the shift drum and shift fork") ins
r t
Ma
● Clamp the shift drum with a jaw vice. Disassemble the
fixing bolts of shifting star wheel [A].
● Take down the gasket, shifting star wheel, locating pin
d re
[B] and bearing.
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 361
P
CO
Variable gear
Variable gear
Shift drum assemble
● Bear in mind to assemble the locating pin
● Apply threaded fastening adhesive on the thread of
shifting star wheel fixation bolt, and then lock the bolt.
Locking torque of fixation bolt of shifting star wheel:
12 N·m (1.22 kgf·m,106.49 in·lb)
Gear shift drum and shift fork assemble
● Apply engine oil on shift drum, shift fork and shift fork
shaft
● Shift drum assemble
● Shift fork shaft assemble [A]
● assemble of left shift fork [B], middle shift fork [C]
and right shift fork [D].
○ There is a symbol “L”[E] on the left shift fork [B],

“C”[F] on the middle shift fork [C], and “R”[G] on the
right shift fork [D].
○ Assemble the middle shift fork on the principal axis.
Install the left shift fork and the right shift fork on the
auxiliary axis. Insert the guide pin to the center groove of
shift drum.
○ All the symbols on the shift fork to the right side of the
engine.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 362
P
CO
Variable gear
Variable gear
Check whether the shift fork is bended.
● Visual inspect whether the shift fork is bended. If yes,
it shall be replaced! The shift fork bending will cause
shift gears difficulty or trip stop to 90°[A] at driving.
Check the abrasion status of the shift fork and fork
groove on gear.
● Measure the thickness of the shift fork and width of

shift fork groove [B].
★ If the thickness of the shift fork is less than the
service limit, the shift fork shall be replaced.
Thickness of the shift fork
Standard: 5.8~5.9 mm (0.2283~0.2323 in.)
★ If the width of the shift fork exceeds the service

limit, the gear shall be replaced.
Width of shift fork groove
Standard: 6~6.05 mm (0.2362~ 0.2382 in.)
Service limit: 6.15 mm (0.2421 in.) o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 363
P
CO
Variable gear
Variable gear
Check the abrasion status of the shift fork guide
pin and shift drum groove
● Measure the diameter of shift fork guide pin [A] and
the width of shift drum groove [b]
★ If the diameter of guide pin on shift fork is less than
the service limit, the shift fork shall be replaced.
Diameter of guide pin on shift fork
Standard: 7.93~8 mm (0.3122~0.315 in.)
If the groove width of any shift drum is greater than the

service limit, the shift drum shall be replaced!
Groove width of shift drum
Standard: 8.05~ 8.15 mm (0.3169~ 0.3209 in.)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
Check whether the gear ratchet and ratchet slot
are subject to abrasion. - d
● Visual inspect whether the gear ratchet [A] and ins
r t
Ma
ratchet slot [B] are damaged or not
★ In case of excessive wear of gear ratchet or ratchet
slot, replace them with good one!
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 364
P
CO
Chapter VI Cooling system
Water pump .........................................................................................................................................368
Thermostat ......................................................................................................................................... 372
Water pipe connector ......................................................................................................................... 374
Disassemble the radiator ............................................................................................................ 376
Dismantle the radiator................................................................................................................ 378
Radiator ..................................................................................................................................... 379
Fan ............................................................................................................................................. 381
Radiator cover............................................................................................................................ 383
Water temperature switch .......................................................................................................... 384
Radiator assembly...................................................................................................................... 385
Cooling liquid filling ................................................................................................................. 386
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 365
P
CO
Cooling system
Cooling system
Functions of the cooling system:

Cooling method of the engine: water cooling
Water cooling adopts water as heat absorption medium to cool down the high temperature parts and then transmit
the heat to ambient air thus to keep the engine running under the most optimal temperature.
Specific cooling method:

Cooling water enters water jacket from crankcase through crankcase waterway. Up through the cylinder head, the
cooling water will eventually enter radiator cooling, relying on fin, it will transfer the heat to ambient air.
radiator
cooling system expansion kettle
thermostat
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
-
A water pump
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 366
P
CO
Cooling system
Cooling system
Permanent type antifreeze can be used as cooling liquid to prevent cooling system rusting or corrosion. As long as
the engine starts, the water pump starts running and cooling liquid starts circulation.
Cooling system adopts paraffin based thermostat. It will open or close along with the temperature variation of
cooling liquid. In order to make the cooling fluid maintain the proper temperature, thermostat will consistently
change the valve opening. If the temperature of cooling liquid is lower than 55°C(131°F), the thermostat will
close so that the vent holes will restrict cooling fluid flowing thus the engine can heat up quicker. If the
temperature of cooling liquid is higher than 58～62°C(136～144°F), the thermostat will open and the cooling
liquid can flow.
If the temperature of cooling liquid exceeds 95°C(203°F), radiator fan switch will start work to make the radiator
run. If the air mass flow is insufficient (Such as: low speed driving of motorcycle), the fan of radiator will suck air
through radiator rectangular fin to accelerate cooling action of radiator. If the temperature of cooling liquid is
lower than 90°C(194°F), blower relay of radiator will disconnect. The fan of radiator will stop running.
In this way, control the temperature of engine cooling system to a narrow range. The engine load will change and
the engine will work efficiently.
The cooling system will pressurize through radiator cover to avoid cooling liquid boiling to generate bubble and
engine overheat. Along with the temperature rising of the engine, the radiator and cooling liquid in water jacket
will expand. Extra cooling fluid will flow through the radiator cover and hoses, flow to auxiliary fuel tank and
temporarily reserve to auxiliary radiator. On the contrary, with temperature dropping of the engine, the cooling
liquid in radiator and water jacket will shrink. The cooling liquid reserved in the auxiliary fuel tank will flow back
to the radiator.
There are two valves on the radiator cover. The first one is pressure valve. The pressure valve at engine running
will control the pressure in cooling system. If the pressure exceeds 93～123kPa(0.95～1.25kgf/cm2,13～18psi),
the pressure valve will open and release the pressure of auxiliary radiator. After releasing the pressure, the
pressure valve will close and keep the pressure at 93～123kPa(0.95～1.25kgf/cm2,13～18psi). At engine cooling
process, another small valve at the radiator cover (negative pressure valve) will open. With cooling liquid
temperature dropping, the cooling liquid will shrink and form vacuum in the system. With negative pressure o @
opening, the cooling liquid will flow from auxiliary radiator to radiator.
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 367
P
CO
Water pump
Water pump
Item Qty
Description & specification
Number
1 Exhaust pipe 1
2 Steel wire clamp 6.5 2
3 Bolt M6*36 3
4 Bolt M6*22 2
5 Pipe 1
o @
6
7
Water pump cover
Water pump seal ring
1
1 c nic
e
8 Impeller 1
e p.t
9
Oil seal component of water pump
shaft
1
- d
10 O-shaped seal ring 25.8*2.651 1 ins
r t
Ma
11 Water pump shaft 1
12 Water pump body 1
13 Gasket 10.5*19.8*2 2
d re
14 Check ring 2
xan
15 Steel check ring 10
A
1
le
16
17
Water pump component
Stainless steel clamp A - 1
2
18 Water outlet
a lS 1
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 368
P
CO
Water pump
Water pump disassembly
Note:
Before water pump disassembly, please discharge the engine oil (Oil discharging refer to Chapter III Engine oil)
Disassemble:
Disassemble the engine bottom cover (See Chapter IV Assembly machine covering part/fuel tank guard plate,
engine bottom cover)
Disassemble:
Disassemble the water pipe clamp (19) and pull out
the water pipe, Fig. A
Attention:
●Perform the operation at cooling status.
●Discharge the cooling liquid from the drain opening
first.
●While pulling out the water pipe, the cooling liquid
shall not splash to the operator.
Loosen the bolt (3) and disassemble the water pump

component, Fig. B. o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 369
P
CO
Water pump
Water pump inspection
Disassemble
Water pump component, Fig. C
Loosen the bolt (4) and disassemble the water pump

cover (6)
Remove the impeller (8) o @

c nic
e
Inspection
e p.t
The surface of impeller has been corroded or the
blade has been damaged. Replace the water pump - d
assembly. ins
r t
Attention:
Ma
d re
Do not damage the gasket and body joint face during
the operation. xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 370
P
CO
Water pump
Water pump assembly
Assembly
Water pump assembly shall be in the reverse order of disassembly.
Note:
Rotate the water pump shaft to align the card slot
[A] on the shaft to the projecting portion of
driving gear of oil pump [B].
Note:
Tighten screw pump cover to the following
moment:
Moment 10N*m
Note:
Tighten screw pump cover to the following moment:
Moment 10N*m
Note:
o @
Tighten water pipe clamp screw to the following moment:
c nic
e
Moment 2N*m e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 371
P
CO
Thermostat
Disassembly/assembly of thermostat
Disassemble:
Disassemble the right fuel tank guard plate
component (See Chapter IV Assembly
machine covering part/fuel tank guard plate,
Disassemble:
Disassemble the two screws tightening the
cover of the thermostat (15). Disassemble the
cover of the thermostat; Fig. A
Remove the thermostat (13) from the engine,
Fig. A
Attention
Follow these steps when the engine is under the state of cooling.
Inspection:
 By-pass port (A), Fig. B
If it is blocked, replace it with a good
one.
 Thermostat (13*), Fig. B
If it is not open at 75°~ 90°C(167 ~
194°F), replace it with a good one. o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 372
P
CO
Thermostat
Disassembly/assembly of thermostat
Inspection of thermostat
 Immerse the thermostat into a container
filled with water
 Add heating water slowly
 Put a thermometer into water
 Monitor the temperature readings of
thermostat and thermometer.
 After reaching to 75°C, the constant
temperature valve will open. After
reaching to 90°C, the constant
temperature valve will open at least
7mm.
As shown in Fig. C
1.Thermometer
2.Container
3.Water
4.Thermostat
Note:
Thermostat and thermometer shall suspend in the fluid hanging with a wire. They shall not contact the interior
wall of the container.
On/off status of thermostat, Fig. D

A Totally off
B Totally on
o @
c nic
e
Attention:
A damaged thermostat will cause serious over e p.t
heating or over cooling of the engine. - d
ins
Assembly: r t
●The by-pass port of thermostat shall be upward at assembly as shown in Fig. A Ma
●Fasten two bolts (15*) to the following torque:
d re
xan
A le
Moment 12N*m
A -
Attention
Coolant can be added only after completing all the steps mentioned a lS
above.
r t ug
P o
t o r
M o
o to
u ltim
- M
PY 373
CO
Water pipe connector
Disassembly/assembly of water pipe connector
Disassemble:
Disassemble the two bolts (11*) and fasten
the water pipe connector (12*) Fig. A
Inspection:
 Water pipe connector (12*)
If it is damaged, replace it with a good
one.
 Sealing gasket (39*)
If it is damaged, replace it with a good
one.
Assemble:
 Water pipe connector (12*) and sealing gasket (39*) assembly
 Fasten two bolts (11*) to the following torque:
Moment 12N*m
Attention
Coolant can be added only after completing all the steps mentioned above.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 374
P
CO
Item
Description & specification Qty Item No. Description & specification Qty
No.
1 Bolt M6×95 1 12 Outlet pipe of expansion kettle 2
2 Installation bush of radiator 1 13 Expansion kettle 1
3 Radiator grille component 1 14 Screw M6×20 2
Outlet water temperature switch
4 Screw M6×25-8.8-ZG 2 15 1
o @
nic
assembly
5 Water inlet of engine 1 16 Stainless steel clamp 1
ec
p.t
6 Pipe heat insulation foil 2 17 Clamp 033.1-706R 3
7 Bolt M6×12-8.8-ZG 2 18 ClampΦ10 3
de
8 Water outlet of engine 1 19
Fuel tank guard plate scaffold
1
s -
9 Kettle decorative plate 1 20
welding component
Bolt M6×1×16 2 r tin
10 Ventilation rubber 1 21 Screw M6×14 2 Ma
11 Expansion kettle cover 1
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 375
P
CO
Radiator
Radiator disassembly
Attention
Follow these steps when the engine is under the
state of cooling.
Disassemble the radiator

Disassemble the left and right fuel tank guard
plate component (See Chapter IV Assembly
machine covering part/fuel tank guard plate,
Disassemble the waterpipe connecting the radiator clamp
water pipe
and engine, as shown in Fig. A.
Disassemble the two fastening screws (1)

connecting the radiator and the left/right engine
connecting bracket welding component as shown
in Fig. B.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
Disassemble the fastening screws connecting the - d
radiator and the frame as shown in Fig. C. ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 376
P
CO
Radiator
Radiator
Item Qty o @
nic
Name
No.
1 Radiator 1 ec
2 Fan assembly 1
e p.t
3 Radiator cover 1
- d
4 Screw M6×16 4
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 377
P
CO
Screw
Screw
Dismantle the radiator

Dismantle: Fig. A
Radiator (1)
Fan assembly (2)
Radiator cover (3)
Water temperature switch (5)
Assembly:
Assembly shall be in the reverse order of disassembly.
Note:
o @
Tighten two bolts (4) to the following moment:
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
Moment 10N*m
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 378
P
CO
Radiator
Radiator
Radiator
Check: rectangular fin of radiator
★ Please remove the materials blocking
airflow if any!
★ In case of deformation of rectangular fin [A],
please straighten it carefully.
★ If the blocking material failed to be removed
or the rectangular fin blocking 20% or above of
the air way which can not be fixed, replace
with a new radiator.
o @
c nic
e
Attention
e p.t
In order to avoid damage to the radiator,
pay attention to the following issues at cleaning - d
the radiator with a steam cleaner. ins
r t
Ma
●Keep the steam gun [A] over 0.5m (1.6ft)
[B] away from rectangular fin of radiator.
●Hold the steam gun, and keep it vertical [C]
d re
(should not tilt [D]) to the rectangular fin
surface of radiator. xan
●Use the steam gun following the direction of
A le
rectangular cooling fin of radiator.
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 379
P
CO
Check: Filler of radiator
● Check whether the filler of radiator is
damaged or not.
● Check the top and bottom seal cartridge [M]
inside the filler. The top and bottom seal
cartridge should be smooth and clean to
ensure normal operation of the radiator.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 380
P
CO
Radiator
Radiator
Fan
Check: Fan blade (1), as shown in Fig. A
In case of fan blade damage, change the fan
component.
Confirm whether the copper parts of fan inserter

are loosened or not. If not, connect the fan
separately to the positive and negative electrode of
power as shown in the right figure (The blue one
connect to the positive electrode, and the black one
connect to the negative electrode)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 381
P
CO
Radiator
Radiator
Check: Fan motor

●Detect the fan motor with an avometer grade “Ω”,
as shown in Fig. B
If it is shown as "∞", it means that the motor is
damaged. Please replace the fan assembly.
 Connect the fan motor to rechargeable battery

as shown in Fig. C
Check whether the fan is operating and is blowing
to the direction of installation scaffold. If not,
replace the fan; if the blowing direction is not
correct, replace the wiring plug wire position.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 382
P
CO
Radiator
Radiator
Radiator cover
Disassemble:
Disassemble the right fuel tank guard plate
component (See Chapter IV Assembly machine
covering part/fuel tank guard plate, engine bottom
cover)
Check:
Check the base [A], top [B] valve seal and valve
spring [C].
★ If any aforementioned part is damaged, replace
with a new radiator cover.
● Install the cover [A] to the cooling system

pressure gauge [B].
Note:
Wet the sealing face of radiator cover with water or
cooling liquid to prevent pressure leakage.
Observe the pressure gauge. Pump up to the pressure
gage to increase the pressure until the decompression
valve is open: Pressure gauge pointer flicks to
downward. Stop pumping up and immediately
measure the pressure value at air leakage. The o @
decompression valve shall be turned on within the
c nic
prescribed scope of the table below. In addition, pressure gauge pointer must stay for at least 6 seconds within the
e
range.
e p.t
Pressure release of radiator cover
Standard: 93 ∼ 123 kPa (0.95 ∼ 1.25 kgf/cm², 13 ∼ 18psi) - d
★ If the radiator cover prescribed cannot keep the stipulated pressure or keep excessive pressure, it is necessary ins
r t
Ma
to replace a new radiator cover.
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 383
P
CO
Radiator
Radiator
Water temperature switch
Disassemble
Unplug the water temperature switch plug
Disassemble the water temperature switch from
radiator with a wrench.
Conduction temperature: 98±4℃

9℃≥connecting temperature—disconnecting
temperature ≥3℃
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 384
P
CO
Radiator
Radiator
Radiator assembly
Assembly shall be in the reverse order of
disassembly.
Note:
Fasten the radiator according to the following
steps:
1. Fasten the bolts connecting the radiator
upper end and frame (2). Do not fasten too
much tightly. Fig. B
2. Fasten the bolts connecting the radiator lower

end and engine connecting bracket (1). Do
not fasten too much tightly. Fig. C
3. Fasten tightly
● Fasten the bolts on the upper end of the
radiator, and then the lower one;
● Fasten in two or three times separately;
● Tighten all the bolts to the following
moment:
o @
c nic
e
Moment 10N*m
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 385
P
CO
Radiator
Cooling liquid filling
Cooling liquid filling

Open the radiator cover (1) and fill in cooling
liquid as shown in Fig. A.
Open the expansion kettle cover (2) and fill in

cooling liquid as shown in Fig. B.
Attention
While filling in cooling liquid, it is preferred to
keep the cooling liquid level between the Max.
and Min. scale of the expansion kettle (3).
o @
nic
Discharge
Discharge the air in the cooling system according to the following steps:
ec
1. Start up the engine and remove the radiator cover to make it running. Slightly flap the exposed radiator
flexible pipe to discharge the bubble in the pipeline until no bubble can be observed in the coolant. If the e p.t
liquid level at the radiator port is low, supplement the liquid at any time. - d
2. Turn off the engine and Waite for about 30s. Add cooling liquid until the liquid level reaching to the liquid
ins
filling port neck of the radiator.
r t
3. Assemble the radiator cover and start up the engine to make the vehicle run at idle speed or throttle up the
engine slightly. The radiator fan can only be switched off after the radiator fan starts running. Ma
4. re
After the engine cooling down, check the coolant liquid level of the auxiliary radiator. If the coolant liquid
d
an
level is lower than the Min. liquid level stipulated, add coolant up to the Max. level as required.
le x
- A
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 386
P
CO
Chapter VII Fuel system
Fuel system ........................................................................................................................................... 388
Fuel tank ............................................................................................................................................... 389
Fuel pump ............................................................................................................................................. 395
Operating principle of fuel pump.................................................................................................. 395
Fuel pump appearance ................................................................................................................. 395
Fuel pump composition ................................................................................................................396
Tag and identification label of fuel pump ..................................................................................... 396
Work environment of fuel pump .................................................................................................. 397
Fuel pump maintenance procedure ............................................................................................... 398
Operation precaution: ................................................................................................................... 401
Throttle body ........................................................................................................................................ 402
Operating principle of throttle body: ............................................................................................ 402
Appearance of throttle body: ........................................................................................................ 402
Technical parameters ................................................................................................................... 403
Working environment of throttle valve......................................................................................... 403
Disassemble of throttle body ........................................................................................................ 403
Negative pressure balance of throttle valve regulation ................................................................. 404
Throttle valve cleaning method .................................................................................................... 404
Assembly of throttle body............................................................................................................. 404
Installation cautions for throttle valve .......................................................................................... 404
Operation cautions for throttle valve ............................................................................................ 404
Fuel injector .......................................................................................................................................... 405
Operating principle of fuel injector .............................................................................................. 405
o @
Appearance of fuel injector........................................................................................................... 405
Sealing ring of fuel injector .......................................................................................................... 406 c nic
e
Overvoltage effects of fuel injector .............................................................................................. 407
Temperature range of fuel injector ............................................................................................... 407 e p.t
Fuel oil pollutants of fuel injector................................................................................................. 407 - d
Wiring harness layout of fuel injector .......................................................................................... 407
ins
Operation cautions for fuel injector .............................................................................................. 408 r t
Installation requirements for fuel injector..................................................................................... 409 Ma
re
Fuel injector replacement method................................................................................................. 409
d
an
Replaceability of fuel injector....................................................................................................... 409
x
Blocking of fuel injector ............................................................................................................... 410
le
- A
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 387
P
CO
Fuel system
Fuel system
fuel filter
various sensors
oil-conveying pipe
ECU
fuel distribution pipe pressure

regulator
fuel injection fuel pump

signal controller
fuel pump
fuel injection tube
throttle valve
air filter intake fuel

manifold tank
Schematic diagram of fuel system
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 388
P
CO
Fuel tank
Fuel tank assembly
o @
c nic
Item Item e
No.
Description & specification Qty
No.
e p.t
1 Socket hexagon screw M5×30 3 9 Rubber sleeve 2
- d
2 Socket hexagon screw M5×14 4 10 Fuel tank assembly sleeve 2
ins
3 Sealing gasket of fuel tank cover 1 11 Fuel tank base plate 1
r t
4 Fuel tank cover support component 1 12 Fuel pump component 1
Ma
5
6
Fuel tank component
Screw M6×35
1
2
13
14
Gasoline pump screw M5×16
Tubing components d r61e
Filter cleaner component a
n 1
7
8
Front assembling stand of seat cushion
Oil pump plug
1
1
15
16 Nut M6 le x 4
- A
l SA
g a
rt u
P o
t o r
M o
oto
lt im
M u
Y - 389
P
CO
Fuel tank
Fuel tank assembly
o @
c nic
e
Item
No.
Item
No.
e p.t
17
Fuel sensor component 1
25 Check valve, fuel tank connecting
1 - d
pipe/forming pipe
ins
18 Rubber blanket of sensor 1 26 Two-way pipe 1
r t
Ma
19 Wire clip component 1 27 Rear guard plate strip 2
20 0Rubber sleeve 1 28 Filter jacket 1
21
22
Rubber blanket of guard plate C
Rubber blanket of guard plate B
4
2
29 Plate clamp
d re 4
23 Steel wire clamp Φ10.5 1

xan
24 Sewer pipe/forming pipe Φ7*2*880 1
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 390
P
CO
Fuel evaporative recovery system
Fuel evaporative recovery system
Serial Description & specification

number
Qty
o @
nic
1 Fuel tank component 1
2 Check valve, fuel tank connecting pipe/forming pipe 1
ec
p.t
3 Two-way pipe 1
4 Canister mounting plate 1
5 Connecting pipe of fuel tank and check valve 1 de
6 Check valve component 1
s -
7
8
Connecting pipe of check valve and canister
Canister assembly
1
r tin
Ma
1
9 Connecting pipe of canister and solenoid valve 1
10 Canister solenoid valve 1
d re
11
12
Plate clamp
Screw M6×12-8.8-ZG
6
x
2an
13 Plate clamp
A le 4
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 391
P
CO
Fuel tank
Fuel tank assembly
Assemble:
Assemble the fuel tank cover support component (4)
on the fuel tank (5)
Apply sealing gasket of fuel tank cover (3) on fuel
tank cover supporting component (4)
Fasten backing-up screw (1) and lock the opening
Use three relatively longer fastening screws (2) and
tighten tank opening lock as shown in Fig. A.
Note:
The screws assembled outside the lock are only for
visual effect.
Note:
Tighten screws to the following moment:
Moment 6N*m
o @
Assemble: c nic
e
Assemble the fuel pump component (13) to the fuel
e p.t
tank with six gasoline pump screws (12). And then
assemble the high-pressure oil pipe (14) correctly - d
as shown in Fig. B ins
r t
Note: Ma
d re
xan
Moment 3~4N*m
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 392
P
CO
Fuel tank
Fuel tank assembly
Assemble:
Assemble the fuel sensor components (17) to the
fuel tank with four screws (16).
Note:
Moment 10N*m
Assemble:
Install the sewer pipe (24) on the fuel tank with steel
wire clamp Φ10.5 (23) as shown in Fig. D.
Install the check valve and fuel tank connecting pipe
(25) on the fuel tank with clamp (29) as shown in
Fig. D.
Assemble:
Assemble the fuel tank on frame with two bolts
M6*35 as shown in Fig. E
o @
nic
Note:
ec
e p.t
Moment 10N*m - d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 393
P
CO
Fuel tank
Fuel tank disassembly
Disassemble:
Disassemble shall be in the reverse order of assembly.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 394
P
CO
Fuel pump
Fuel pump
Operating principle of fuel pump

Oil pump assembly: Provide 250Kpa gasoline fuel oil which satisfies the system requirements for the engine.
Install on the fuel tank bottom through connecting pipeline to provide fuel oil.
Oil pump:
The electrical principle of electric fuel pump is that when the fuel pump with DC motor driving turbine structure
running, the fuel oil existing in the circumferential grooves of turbine rotor will make high-velocity motion along
with the turbine rotor. Due to the function of centrifugal force caused by high speed, the fuel pressure at the outlet
of fuel will increase. In addition, turbine will produce certain vacuum at the inlet of oil pump thus the fuel will be
inhaled to turbine blade space. The inlet outlet pressure differential of fuel can urge fuel oil being transported from
the outlet side to systematic oil fuel pipe continuously. The fuel delivery pressure generated by fuel pump is up to
250～400kPa.
Pressure-regulating device: Mechanical diaphragm type. Perform oil pressure regulation for oil pump unit to
realize constant fuel pressure required by the system.
Fuel pump appearance

Reverse side:
o @
c nic
Obverse side
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 395
P
CO
Fuel pump
Fuel pump
Fuel pump composition
2
3
4
1.Oil pump body

2.Filter screen
3.Seal washer and oil pump scaffold
4.Pressure regulator
5.Oil pump wiring harness
o @
Tag and identification label of fuel pump
c nic
Oil pump assembly: Indicate in the form of label on the oil pump assembly mounting cover.
e
Oil pump: Engrave the marking on the pump body.
e p.t
Oil pressure regulator: Engrave the marking on the pump body.
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 396
P
CO
Fuel pump
Fuel pump
Work environment of fuel pump

● Oil pump assembly shall be installed at the fuel tank bottom according to the installation
requirements.
● Generally, oil pump assembly design is only for gasoline fuel, ethanol and gasoline ratio with a
proportion of 22%.
● Please make sure that there is sufficient fuel oil at first running of oil pump assembly. Don't run
when there is no fuel.
● For pipeline connection method, please refer to the following diagram.
Vehicle oilline layout
fuel filter
T-branch
pipe
o @
fuel injector fuel injector
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 397
P
CO
Fuel pump
Fuel pump
Fuel pump maintenance procedure

Safety protection:
In case of fuel system maintenance, watch out to ensure personal safety.
● Disconnect the negative electrode of vehicle battery.
● Smoking strictly prohibited. Set "No smoking" signs around the operating area.
● Ensure extinguishing device.
● Operating environment has excellent ventilation condition and shall be far away from naked light.
● Wear safety protection glasses
● In order to release the fuel vapor in fuel tank, open the fuel tank cover and reassemble it.
● When the engine shuts down and the pressure of the oil-way still remains very high, disassemble or
loosen the oil-way, and then the fuel oil will spray out. Operate according to "Fuel pressure release
procedure" in the Chapter.
● There will be a small amount of fuel flowing out after disassemble to avoid hazard. Block the oil pipe
with occlusion device.
● After maintenance, ensure that oil fuel pipe and clamp are reasonably installed.
● After the maintenance, perform systematic fuel leakage check according to "fuel leakage check
procedure".
● After the maintenance, connect to battery cathode. Make sure that there is sufficient fuel oil at oil pump
operation.
Fault diagnosis of oil pump assembly:
Proced
Operation Yes No
ure
If the sound oil pump
If the sound oil pump running
1
After ignition key being started, oil
pump will run for 3s. .
can be heard, skip to step IV
running can not be
heard, skip to step II o @
nic
directly.
directly.
Disconnect the oil pump plug
ec
p.t
connector. Check whether the supply Check power supply
2 Perform step III
voltage of oil pump is within the circuit of the oil pump.
range of 10-14V.
de
Supply 12V DC current for oil pump.
1.Check oil pump wiring s -
3
Make sure that there is sufficient oil in
the fuel tank to prevent oil pump
Check the loop from oil pump
to ECU.
harness
2.Check oil pump r tin
Ma
running without oil. 1. 2.Check ECU
1.
Whether the oil pump is operating●
4
Check whether the oil supply pressure
at the front end of jet nozzle is within
Oil pump assembly run Perform step V
d re
the range of 220-270kpa
normally
1.Check whether the oil 1.Blocking xaofnfuel filter
le bending and
Test whether the oil pipe line pressure pipeline joint is subject to 2.Pipeline
A
5 is lower than 220kpa with an oil leakage.
pressure gauge.
A
2.Check the oil pump device.
- 3.Check the pressure
twisting
l S regulator.
3.Check the pressure regulator.
a
r t ug
P o
t o r
M o
o to
u ltim
- M
P Y 398
CO
Fuel pump
Fuel pump
Dismount the oil pump assembly
● Release the fuel pressure in the oil way referring to "Fuel pressure release process".
● Disconnect the negative electrode of storage battery.
● Disconnect the connector clip of oil pump assembly wiring harness.
● Extract the residual fuel in the fuel tank. Save with appropriate container to ensure safety and reduce
pollution.
● Disassemble the connecting oil pipeline of oil pump assembly with a clamp.
● Disassemble the fuel tank from the motorcycle.
● Place the fuel tank upside down. Pay attention to avoid fuel tank scratching and collision.
● Disassemble the oil pump assembly and install bolts
● Take the oil pump assembly out from the fuel tank
● Pay attention not to scratch the oil pump filter screen.
Oil pump assembly:
● Replace the seal washer of oil pump assembly (The used gasket may cause fuel oil leakage)
● Slightly hold the oil pump filter screen and put the oil pump assembly into fuel tank. Pay attention not to
damage the oil pump filter screen.
Oil pump assembly direction: The installation screw holes of oil pump assembly are arranged in
dissymmetric. They can only be assembled in specified direction. The pressure regulator shall face the
backside of the fuel tank.
Maintain the fuel tank installation surface clean and flat.
● Install the retaining bolts on oil pump assembly cover. Tighten the bolts uniformly according to the
indicated sequence as shown in the Fig. below. Screw assembly direction: 3~4 Nm
The oil pump assembly shall be fixed with special bolts. Tighten the bolts according to the stipulated
sequence and moment at assembly. Over moment and wrong tightening sequence will lead to gasket
deformation and leakage.
● Assemble the fuel tank on the motorcycle. o @
● Connect the oil pipeline and use appropriate clamp to tighten.
c nic
● Connect the connector clip of oil pump wiring harness.
e
● Check leakage before engine running according to "fuel oil leakage check procedure".
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
Install screw tightening order
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 399
P
CO
Fuel pump
Fuel pump
Fuel pressure release procedure:

Matters needing attention: It is strictly prohibited to operate under the heat engine state.
Confirm that the engine is at cooling state. Please conduct the following fuel pressure release operation:
● The motorcycle is located at "neutral gear" state.
● Disconnect the connector clip of oil pump assembly wiring harness and vehicle wiring harness.
● Start up the engine of the motor until the engine automatically extinguish. Consecutively switch ignition
key again for 2-3 times with a time interval for 3s.
● After completing the aforementioned operations, connect the connector clip of oil pump assembly wiring
harness.
Fuel oil leakage check procedure:
After completing the maintenance of any fuel system, perform fuel oil leakage check procedure.
● Fill sufficient fuel oil in fuel tank
● Switch ignition key for 3s and then turn off for 15s. Repeat the above operations for 3-4 times, in order to
establish oil pressure in the oil-way.
● Check if there is any leakage phenomena of components in fuel system (fuel tank, connecting oil pipeline,
oil pipeline connector etc..)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 400
P
CO
Fuel pump
Fuel pump
Operation precaution:
Attention: Causes
DON'TS: Throwing and touching the oil pump It will cause oil pump internal damage.
DON'TS: Oil pump "dry running" (oil pump inlet, free of oil at
filter screen outlet). It will damage the internal parts of the oil pump.
Make sure there is sufficient fuel oil in the fuel tank
Impurities will enter the oil pump from the damaged filter screen
DON'TS: In case of damage to filter screen
into the damaged pump body.
DON'TS: Disassemble internal parts of the pump and pressure
regulator. The damage caused by disassembly without permission is not
DON'TS: Regulate oil pump and pressure regulator (replacement covered by “Three guarantees”.
excluded).
DON'TS: Lift the oil pump assembly through oil pump assembly
wiring harness.
Wiring harness damage/oil pump power supply disconnected
DON'TS: Lift and pull the oil pump wiring harness at vertical
direction of oil pump cover.
DON'TS: Use the damaged oil pipeline clamp. Pressure leakage/fuel oil leakage
DON'TS: Use oil pump assembly with seriously damaged or cut Impurities will enter the oil pump from the damaged filter screen
oil pump filter screen. into the damaged pump body.
DON'TS: Use an oil pump to exact oil from the fuel tank. Oil pump is not designed for this purpose.
DON'TS: Use the mounting screws of oil pump assembly to fix
It will affect the assembly of oil pump assembly.
other parts
DON'TS: Damage to oil pump wiring harness and terminals at
Lead to poor contact/oil pump power supply disconnecting.
oil pump assembly maintenance
DON'TS: Contact oil pump assembly while extracting oil from
Avoid oil pump assembly damage.
the fuel tank with a manual pump
DO'S: Make sure that the oil pipeline is not damaged at
Avoid fuel oil leakage.
maintenance
DO'S: Only use the "original" seal washer of oil pump assembly. Counterfeit products may lead to fuel leakage.
Ensure that there is no fuel leakage and leakage at oil pipeline
DO'S: Use the specified hose clamp
connector.
DO'S: Oil pump wiring harness shall be fixed on the motorcycle Reduce vibration.
DO'S: Use standard fuel oil. Poor quality fuel oil will lead to premature failure of oil pump.
DO'S: Replace fuel filter within the required time. Obstructed filter may cause reduction of fuel delivery.
DO'S: Use specified fuel filter in conformity with requirements.
The nonconforming filters will damage the jet nozzle, oil
o @
nic
pressure regulator and oil pump.
DO'S: Ensure proper arrangement of oil pipeline without
Incorrect direction and interference will damage the oil pipeline.
interference with other parts.
ec
p.t
DO'S: Make sure that there is sufficient oil (to submerge the oil
Prevent oil pump running without oil.
pump filter screen) in the fuel tank
DO'S: Replace the two O type rings simultaneously at pressure
Ensure correct pressure adjustment curve of pressure regulator. de
regulator maintenance
DO'S: Carefully connect the connector clip of oil pump assembly
Avoid damage to the connector terminal. s -
wiring harness
DO'S: Return to any touched, damaged, and suspicious parts and
r tin
Ma
Detect the root causes rapidly.
describe the problems
Warning:
d re
● For new motorcycles, since there is no gasoline in fuel tank, after filling the fuel tank, there aren
the oil fuel pipe. The engine needs to be started for many times to discharge the air inx
a a lot of air in
the oil pipeline for
normal working. This is a normal phenomenon. The engine will have no failure on A le up for a long time in
starting
the future.
A -
● Since gasoline plays a role to cool down the fuel pump, the oil pumpS
without fuel oil which may lead to fuel pump burnout. a l shall not run with insufficient or even
r t ug
P o
t o r
M o
o to
u ltim
- M
PY 401
CO
Throttle body
Throttle body
Operating principle of throttle body:

Throttle body assembly is mainly composed of the following parts: main cast body, bearing, shaft and valve
plates, return spring, throttle wire, position sensing system of the throttle valve and bypass air control system. All
the subsystems will work together to meet the following functions:
●Inlet flow control
●Idle air flow control
●Position detection of throttle valve - Provide throttle opening feedback signal for engine control system.
Position sensor of throttle body provides throttle opening for ECU; stepping motor on the throttle body
controls engine idle speed to maintain target idle speed as required by ECU;
Appearance of throttle body:
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 402
P
CO
Throttle body
Throttle body
Throttle body:
● 34mm ID: Max. flow: ≥50g/s @ 2.7kPa vacuum degree
● Starting torque of throttle body:
Idle state: 0.12±0.03Nm
Fully open: 0.32±0.05Nm
Position sensor of throttle valve:
● Reference voltage: 5±0.1VDC
● Resistance between T1 and T2: 3k~12kΩ
Idle air control valve:

● Working voltage: 7.5~14.2 VDC
● Winding resistance: 53Ω±10%
● Wire winding coil: 33mH±20% o @
Working environment of throttle valve c nic
e
Normal operating temperature: -30~120°C
e p.t
Disassemble of throttle body - d
● Disconnect the negative electrode of storage battery ins
r t
Ma
● Disconnect the connector assembly of throttle valve positioning sensor, stepping motor, inlet
temperature/pressure sensor (installed on the throttle body assembly).
● Dismantle the throttle wire
d re
● Dismantle the flexible hose connecting air cleaner and air intake manifold.
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 403
P
CO
Throttle body
Throttle body
Negative pressure balance of throttle valve regulation
Method to adjust the negative pressure balance: Connect the detection software; check the fuel injection pulse
width of the two cylinders and control the ventilation through adjusting by-pass port screws. After the adjustment,
the fuel injection pulse width of the two cylinders will get close to each other. Generally, the fuel injection pulse
width is at 2.0ms.
Throttle valve cleaning method
Clean the throttle body with carburetor cleaner (3M products recommend). Spray the cleaner on interior walls of
throttle body. Brush off the dust, carbon deposition etc. slightly. Pay attention that the bypass air way shall not be
blocked with dirty materials.
Assembly of throttle body
For throttle body assembly steps, pay attention to the following points:
● Adjust the throttle wire
● Ensure that all the dismantled parts, such as stepping motor, have been installed to right position.
● Connecting screws assembly
Installation cautions for throttle valve
● Do not soak the position sensor of throttle valve into liquid.
● Always use throttle wire to start up the valve.
● Do not fill tools or other materials to throttle valve to maintain the opening of the valve, which may cause
valve deformation or scratching the interior walls of throttle body. Such damage will cause that the valve
can be opened either very easily or very difficultly.
Operation cautions for throttle valve
Attention: Causes
DO'S: Install all the throttle body connectors carefully Avoid damage to wiring terminal.
DO'S: Avoid any liquids entering into the throttle body Ensure normal operation.
DO'S: Take off and assemble only one throttle valve from the
component tray at one time
Avoid damage to key components.
o @
nic
DO'S: Send back the falling, damaged or suspected parts and
Quickly identify the causes of the problems
components with quality issues. Paste the tags to indicate the
existing problems (only for the "three guarantees" components). ec
DON'TS: Use any falling or extruded parts
DON'TS: If it is stored or transported close to saline water
May cause internal damages to the parts.
e p.t
without protection conditions
Corrosion may affect normal use.
- d
DON'TS: In case of being exposed to the environment (for
Corrosion may affect normal use.
ins
example humid environment) before assembly
r t
Ma
DON'TS: Testing with non-system operating voltage May lead to damage.
DON'TS: Using additional jigs May lead to damage.
other. cause any other damages. d re

DON'TS: Remove the packaging to enable the parts touch each It may affect the minimum air leakage or
DON'TS: Suddenly release the throttle fully from any position May lead to damage.
xan
DON'TS: The bypass channel being blocked by dust or small
particles le
May affect idle speed stability.
A
contact other components. A -
DON'TS: Pick up, store, or hold parts by a means that may This behavior may cause damage.
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 404
P
CO
Fuel injector
Fuel injector
additional resistance
various sensors
position sensor of
crankshaft
air flow meter
fuel injector
water temperature
ter
microcompu
sensor
position sensor of
throttle valve
Ignition switch
oxygen sensor
vehicle speed sensor
battery voltage
Operating principle of fuel injector

Fuel injector is an executive component. Inject appropriate fuel oil into air inlet of engine through ECU in time
and accurately. In further, inhale the air into the combustion chamber. Mix the oxygen in the fresh air for
combustion.
Use the fuel injector with the same part number for replacement.
Appearance of fuel injector

The Fig. below is the appearance view of fuel injector.
O-type sealing ring o @

connecting the oil guide or
oil injection cap c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
le
AO-type sealing ring
-
A connecting air inlet
a lS pipe end
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 405
P
CO
Fuel injector
Fuel injector
Sealing ring of fuel injector

As shown in the Figure above, O-shaped sealing ring can make sure that the fuel injector will be subject to no
leakage within the range of -40℃ to 150℃ (-40 to 302℉). In addition, it can resist all kinds of fuel additives
(such as ethanol etc.). The following data are designed for current seal ring.
O-shaped sealing ring connecting fuel rail or spray cap.

●Size:
●Inner diameter: 6.35 mm
●Outer diameter: 14.85 mm
●Section thickness: 4.25 mm
●Materials
●Viton●GLT (blue): To be applied at the low temperature.
●Viton●A (black): Except to the applications be applied at the low temperature.
O-shaped sealing ring connecting inlet pipe end
●Size:
●Inner diameter: 9.61 mm
●Outer diameter: 14.49 mm
●Section thickness: 2.44 mm
●Materials:
●Viton A (Blue or brown)
Lubricant recommended
Lubricant shall be applied on O-shaped ring to facilitate fuel injector assembly. The following is the list of verified
lubricating oil. The experiment demonstrates that the following lubricants have no impact on fuel injector
performance.
List of lubricants recommended o @
Name of the lubricants Manufacturer Viscosity (cSt) @ 40 C
c nic
e
p.t
Spindura 10 Equilon 10
Spindura 22 Equilon 21
de
DTE-24
DTE-25
Mobil
Mobil
32
46 s -
DTE-26 Mobil 68 r tin
Norpar 15 Exxon / Mobil <1
Ma
Drawsol 60
NocoLube AW 46
DA Stewart
NOCO Energy
1-2
46 d re
32 a
n
NocoLube AW 32
Advantage Spindle Oil
NOCO Energy
Advantage Lubrication Specialties
x
le10
- A
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 406
P
CO
Fuel injector
Fuel injector
Overvoltage effects of fuel injector

Fuel injector can run for one minute (operating with oil) at maximum under the voltage of 26V with a pulse width
of 100ms and 200ms one cycle operating conditions. It will not affect the flow rate, will not cause permanent
damage on electromagnetic coil, and will not weaken the electromagnetic performance.
Temperature range of fuel injector

Standard injector working temperature range is as follow. Within the scope of the qualified working temperature,
fuel injector flow rate will not lose efficacy within the range of tolerance. In addition, the injector will not be
subject to leak, degradation and shortening of the life in proper working environment.
● Operating temperature range: -30~125°C
● Limit range of operation (it may be subject to functional degradation): -40~150°C
● Storage temperature: -60 ~ 60°C
Fuel oil pollutants of fuel injector

In spite of its self-clean function, fuel injector is a serviceable part since it is designed to remove impurities with
small diameter accumulated between fuel filter and fuel injector. However, the impurities with large diameter can
arouse fuel injector cementation, flow rate offset, leakage and other faults. Therefore, the fuel filter system is very
important.
Wiring harness layout of fuel injector

● Wiring harness layout of fuel injector shall be far away from heating source. It shall protect the wiring harness
away from outside worn or damage.
● If it is not necessary, please do not plug fuel injector connector.
● Fuel injector electric appliance connectors can not be distinguished from positive and negative level.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 407
P
CO
Fuel injector
Fuel injector
Operation cautions for fuel injector

Attention: Causes
DON'TS: Use seal ring repeatedly. In case of necessary
repeat use, please carefully check whether the seal ring is Avoid leakage.
damaged before use
DON'TS: Immerse the jet nozzle end to the lubricant
May cause injection hole blocking.
which
DON'TS: Idle running under the circumstance of free of
Will damage internal mechanical components.
oil pressure
DON'TS: Water entering oil circuit at leakage inspection Will cause fuel injector damage.
DON'TS: Apply force on the head of fuel injector at While assembly on nylon air inlet pipe, it is
assembly. allowed to apply force at the direction of 45°.
DON'TS: Collision on fuel injector while installing the
Will cause damage to fuel injector and seal ring.
fuel injector on air inlet pipe
DON'TS: Applying tensile on connector assembly Will cause an intermittent power supply.
DON'TS: Using broken fuel injector May be damaged.
DON'TS: Store fuel injector, fuel rail, or engine installed External environment could undermine electronic
with fuel injector in an environment without protection. and mechanical components of the injector.
DON'TS: While lifting the assembly part, treat the fuel
It will damage the fuel injector.
injector as the handle
DON'TS: The parts will contact each other during storage
process.
DON'TS: The parts will contact each other during
It will cause damage to the fuel injector.
transportation process
DON'TS: Tap the fuel injector to perform troubleshooting
at occurrence of failure
DON'TS: Substitute the original fuel injector with a new It will seriously affect the performance of the fuel
one with part number other than those recommended injector.
DO'S: Special attention should be paid that the seal ring
shall not be damaged by the mounting base at fuel injector Protect the seal ring.
assembly o @
DO'S: Use correct lubricant for installation. Assemble the
part to mounting holes after applying lubricant oil
Protect seal ring and reduce pollution.
c nic
e
p.t
DO'S: Perform tests more frequently for fuel injector
Confirm the failure mode of fuel injector.
pasted by needle valve or failed to be seated. (Apply pulse
less than 5s for fuel injector with a voltage within 9~15V) de
DO'S: Before fuel injector assembly, perform an oil During the transportation and delivery process, the
s -
leakage test to check whether the needle valve of fuel needle valve of fuel injector may not return to the
injector has been seated. right position and may lead to fuel oil leakage.
r tin
DO'S: Avoid the fuel injector being polluted by the fluid It will lead to short circuit of electromagnetic coil.
DO'S: Disassemble the wiring harness carefully. It may lead to terminal damage. Ma
DO'S: Use the recommended lubricants at connector
assembly. d re
It may produce corrosion on the terminal.
DO'S: It is not allowed to use falling, damaged
xan
illustrate the existing problem.
A le
components or those with material problems. Take a tag to Make sure to detect the fault source quickly.
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 408
P
CO
Fuel injector
Fuel injector
Installation requirements for fuel injector
During the assembly and disassembly process, please strictly abide by the following methods to avoid damage to
the fuel injector body and electronic components.
● Lubrication: Apply small amount of lubricant at the lower side of seal ring. It is recommended to use ISO
10 light material oil or equivalent product.
● Under the permissive conditions, the effects of applying lubricant on fuel injector base are superior to
being applied on seal ring. Thus the contamination probability of fuel injector can be reduced to the
minimum level.
● The orifice panel shall not contact the lubricant, which will affect the fuel-injection amount. Do not dip
the lubricant with the top of fuel injector.
● All the seal rings of fuel injector have been installed properly at delivery. In principle, reuse of seal ring
is not allowed. In case of necessary repeat use, please carefully check whether the seal ring is damaged
before use. Even tiny damage can cause leakage. Please take special care to fill the seal ring into the
fixing seat.
● Pay attention not to destroy the connector at fuel injector assembly. After hearing the sound of "clicks", it
means that the fuel injector has been installed to right position.
● Avoid unnecessary disassembling of connectors
● The wiring harness shall not be clamped too tightly. Over tightening will lead to occurrence of short
circuit.
● Do not rotate the fuel injector at fuel injector connector assembly which will lead to injection target
offset.
Fuel injector replacement method
Disassembly and replacement method of fuel injector
Attention: Fuel injector and high surrounding object temperature.
● Vehicle flameout
● Cut off the battery cathode to avoid accidental starting of the engine.
● Pick off the connector assembly of fuel injector.
● Release the fuel pressure.
● Remove the oil pipeline on fuel injector.
● Take down fuel injector from throttle valve.
● Pick off the fuel injector retaining clip. Remove fuel injector from the housing washer carefully.
● Remove the impurities on fuel injector contact surface. Pay attention not to damage the contact surface.
o @
nic
● Apply lubricant on the seal ring on both ends of the fuel injector.
● Put the fuel injector head into air duct carefully. Confirm that the installation shall be consistent with the
original one.
ec
● Press to injector seat and fix the retaining clip properly.
● Fuel injection tube assembly e p.t
● Insert connector assembly of fuel injector.
- d
● Start up the key to power on. Do not start up the engine to check fuel injector leakage.
● Start the engine to perform running inspection.
ins
Replaceability of fuel injector r t
Use the fuel injector with the same part number for replacement. Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 409
P
CO
Fuel injector
Fuel injector
Blocking of fuel injector

Fuel impurities accumulation will cause traffic migration and shorten the injection life. At engine stewing, engine
heat makes the fuel produce precipitation at fuel injector head. Precipitation gathers at injection holes which will
lead to flow deviation.
● Such blocking will lead to slow flow, increasing frictional force, impurities accumulation and other
problems. It will ultimately affect the emissions and durability.
● Fuel and environmental factors may cause fuel crystallization or fuel injector corrosion which will cause
flow deviation as well.
● Poor fuel oil oxidation stability will cause precipitation. Therefore, please use high-quality gasoline.
● Applying appropriate amount of fuel detergent can avoid precipitation.
● In case of fuel injector blocking, clean the fuel injector according to the following cleaning method.
poor good poor

Warning:
● A filter is designed within the fuel injector.
However, fuel injector is not a serviceable part
since it is designed to remove accumulation
impurities between fuel filter and fuel injector.
Impurities can cause bonding, flow deviation and
leakage fault. Thus the fuel filter is very important.
● Use the fuel injector with the same part number for
replacement. Fuel injector atomization state
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 410
P
CO
Chapter VIII Electrical system
Charging system ................................................................................................................................... 412
Rechargeable battery ................................................................................................................... 413
Magnetoelectric generator ........................................................................................................... 418
Rectifier ....................................................................................................................................... 423
Ignition system ................................................................................................................................... 425
Ignition coil.................................................................................................................................. 426
Position sensor of crankshaft ....................................................................................................... 434
ECU ............................................................................................................................................. 435
Sparking plug ............................................................................................................................... 436
Ignition system troubleshooting................................................................................................... 438
Start-up system .................................................................................................................................... 439
Motor start-up .............................................................................................................................. 440
Relay start-up ............................................................................................................................... 446
Instrument ............................................................................................................................................ 449
Instrument disassembly ............................................................................................................... 449
Instrument and indicator light ...................................................................................................... 449
Master switch ....................................................................................................................................... 452
Master switch disassembly .......................................................................................................... 452
Check the master switch ...............................................................................................................452
Loudspeaker......................................................................................................................................... 453
Disassemble: ................................................................................................................................ 453
Inspection..................................................................................................................................... 453
Handlebar switch (sell on domestic market) ......................................................................................... 454
Handlebar switch (EURO-STANDARD state) ................................................................................... 455
o @
Velocity sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 456
Disassemble velocity sensor ....................................................................................................... 456 c nic
e
Check the velocity sensor ........................................................................................................... 456
Velocity sensor assembly............................................................................................................ 456 e p.t
Relay and fuse-base block .................................................................................................................. 457 - d
Relay ........................................................................................................................................... 457
ins
Fuse-base block .......................................................................................................................... 459 r t
Electro-jet system ............................................................................................................................... 460 Ma
re
Electro-jet system/ECU .............................................................................................................. 461
d
an
Electro-jet system/water temperature sensor of engine .............................................................. 467
le x
Electro-jet system/intake air temperature sensor ........................................................................ 468
Electro-jet system/Intake manifold pressure ............................................................................... 470
- A
Electro-jet system/oxygen sensor ............................................................................................... 472
A
Electro-jet system/idle speed stepper motor ............................................................................... 474
a lS
Electro-jet system/ECP ............................................................................................................... 476
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 411
P
CO
Charging system
Charging system
o @
c nic
e
Charging system e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 412
P
CO
Rechargeable battery
Batteries disassembly
Switch off the electricity lock
Open the cushion
Dismantle the battery cathelectrode
Dismantle the battery cathode
Dismantle disaster box and fixed installation clamp
Remove the batteries from battery fixed bracket
*Attention
Ensure to disconnect the cathode (-) cable
Battery activation
Electrolyte solution filling
●Ensure that the model indicated on the electrolyte
bottle [A] match with battery model [B]. These models
must be the same.
Battery model of 300GS: YTX9-L
Warning
Must use electrolyte solution with an indicating
model of storage battery. Since the battery models
are different, the volume and density of electrolyte
solutions adopted will be different. It is to prevent
excessive filling of electrolyte thus to shorten the
service life of storage battery, and to reduce storage
battery performance.
Warning
Before using, do not tear the aluminum seal [A]
from the filling port [B]. Make sure to use dedicated
storage containers to ensure correct volume of
electrolyte filling.
o @
nic
●Put the battery on right horizontal plane.
●Check whether there are peeling, cracks, or holes.
●Disassemble the sealing strip
ec
*Attention:
e p.t
○ The battery is vacuum sealed. In case of air leakage
from sealing fin into the battery, the charging time for - d
the first time could be longer.
ins
•●Take the electrolyte bottle away from plastic bag. r t
●Remove the strip lid [A] away from the container. Place the parts slightly to seal the battery.
*Attention Ma
Do not pierce nor open the seal layer of electrolyte
d re
an
bottle [B]. Do not try to open single liquid cavity.
le x
- A
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 413
P
CO
●In case of electrolyte bottle dumping, put six seal
grooves into filling mouth. Keep the electrolyte bottle
horizontal. Push down to pierce all six liquid chamber
sealing. As the filling sealing liquid cavity being
inserted to filling port, bubble rising will be observed
in liquid cavity.
*Attention
○Don't lean the electrolyte bottle.
●Check electrolyte flow

★If bubble rising being observed in liquid cavity
[A], or if the electrolyte bottle not being fully filled
into storage battery, slightly slap several times of
electrolyte bottle [B].
●Hold the electrolyte bottle for 20min. or longer.
Before the container being discharged, do not move
from the battery. For normal operation of battery, all
the electrolyte solution shall be removed from the
container.
Warning
If the electrolyte solution in electrolyte bottle not
o @
nic
being fully filled into storage battery, the service
life of storage battery may be shortened. It needs
ec
p.t
at least 20 minutes to completely fill the
electrolyte solution into storage battery. Do not
remove the electrolyte bottle before that. de
●Slightly remove the electrolyte bottle from battery. s -
●Hold the battery for 60min. Before charging, make
r tin
the electrolyte solution penetrate to the plate metals
to achieve the optimal performance. Ma
*Attention
d re
○ Immediately recharging batteries will shorten
xan
battery life after filling. Hold at least for 60min.
after filling. A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 414
P
CO
Initial charge
●Slightly cover the cover strip [A] on the filling port.
Do not completely press into the port.
●The newly activated maintenance-free storage
battery requires initial charge.
Standard charging: 0.9A*5-10hrs
Attention
○ Charging rate depends on time and
temperature of battery storage, as well as the
charger type.
。After initial charge, hold the battery for 30min.
Use voltmeter to check voltage. If it failed to
reach 12.6V, repeat the charging period.
●After charging, press the strip cover [A] to battery
with two hands (Do not thump or beat). After correct
installation, align the strip cover and the top of the
battery.
Warning
As soon as the strip cover being installed to
battery, do not move the cover, nor apply water
or electrolyte solution to battery.
*Attention
○ In order to ensure the biggest battery life and o @
higher customer satisfaction, it is suggested to
c nic
e
p.t
perform 15s load testing under the three times of
ampere hour rate. Recheck the voltage. If it is
less than 12.6V, perform rechargeable cycle and de
load testing. If it is still lower than 12.6V, the s -
battery is defective.
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 415
P
CO
Inspection of charging state
Battery can be checked through a voltmeter to measure
the battery terminal voltage.
●Battery disassemble
●Battery terminal voltage measurement
*Attention
Take a digital display voltmeter with an accuracy
to measure the voltage.
If the reading is 13.6V or higher, it is not required to
replenish electric quantity; however, if the reading is
lower than the stipulated value, it is required to
replenish electric quantity.
The following is the list stipulating terminal voltage
and charging mode
Terminal voltage Charging mode
Between 11.5 and 12.6V 0.9A x 5-10h
Lower than 11.5V 0.9Ax20h
Determine the battery status after replenish electric
quantity
After charging, hold the battery for 30min.. And then
determine the battery state according to the following table
through measuring the terminal voltage.
Standard Determination
12.6V or higher Excellent
12.0~lower than Insufficient charging →
12.6V Recharging
Lower than 12.0V Unavailable→ Replacement
Use a avometer of rechargeable battery being fully charged
state.
Install the fully charged battery after the engine heating. o @
Connect the voltmeter to the terminal of the rechargeable
battery c nic
e
p.t
Disassemble the main fuse. Connect Ammeter in series
among terminals. (General multimeter limit to 10A)
Start up the engine. Slowly rotate and measure the voltage
de
and current.
Restriction voltage/rotational speed: 15V (5.000rpm) s -
(DCV)
r tin
Ma
Limit voltage is out of the specified value range. Check the
voltage regulator.
Lighting system will restrain voltage check.
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 416
P
CO
Short circuit test
Dismantle the earth lead from rechargeable battery.
The voltmeter is to connect to the position between
battery cathelectrode and grounding wire. The
switch should be turned to OFF. Check whether it is
in short circuit.
*Attention
The positive pole of avometer is to be connected
to the battery cathelectrode.
In case of any anomaly, check whether there is any

short circuit on the master switch and main wiring.
Inspection of charging state
Use a avometer of rechargeable battery being fully
charged state.
Install the fully charged battery after the engine
heating.
Connect the voltmeter to the terminal of the rechargeable
battery
Disassemble the main fuse of connect Ammeter in series
among terminals.
Start up the engine. Slowly rotate and measure the
voltage and current.
Restriction voltage/rotational speed: 14-15V
(5.000rpm)
Limit voltage is out of the specified value range. Check o @
the voltage regulator.
c nic
Lighting system will restrain voltage check. e
Disassemble the seat cushion.
e p.t
*Attention
- d
Set the avometer at alternating voltage grade.
ins
r t
Restriction voltage: 13.1 (±) 0.5V/5.000rpm)
Limit voltage is out of the specified value range. Check Ma
the voltage electric current regulator.
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 417
P
CO
Magnetoelectric generator
*Attention
Check the charging coil of magnetoelectric
generator. It can operate on the engine.
Left cover of magnetoelectric generator
disassembly
Disassemble:
Power cord connector of magnetoelectric generator
Place a suitable container under the magnetoelectric
generator
Loosen the left cover retaining bolt ①. Remove the
left cover ② and magnetic coil.
Pull the magneto power cord between engine and
scaffold.
Disassemble stator coil

Magneto cover (See disassemble section of
magnetoelectric generator cover)
o @
nic
Support bracket bolts ④ and scaffold
Outgoing line gum cover ③ of magnetoelectric
ec
p.t
generator
Stator coil bolt
Stator coil ① de
s -
Loosen three retaining bolts of magnetic coil ②
r tin
Remove the magnetic coil.
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 418
P
CO
Flywheel disassembly
Magneto cover disassembly (See disassemble section
of disassemble magnetoelectric generator cover)
Disassemble the fixing bolts of flywheel with a

flywheel puller.
Remove the flywheel from the crankshaft with a
flywheel puller.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 419
P
CO
Remove the flywheel
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 420
P
CO
Charge coil of magnetoelectric generator
Charge coil of magnetoelectric generator

Magnetoelectric generator inspection
There are three types of failure of magnetoelectric generator: Short circuit, open circuit (wire burnout) or rotor
magnetic disappear. Short circuit or open circuit will cause low output or even no output. Disappearing of rotor
magnetism will lead to low output, which may be caused by AC electric generator or striving. Or it may be
because of aging.
Close the ignition switch

Disassemble magnetoelectric generator 3P connector.
Measure the resistance value among the three black terminal of magnetoelectric generator with a multimeter.
Standard value: 0.05~0.5Ω (Room temperature 20℃)
★ If the resistance is greater than the aforementioned resistance, or any multimeter of any two power cord
(infinite value), it is determined as stator line and shall be replaced. When it is far lower than the resistance, it
refers to stator short-circuit. It shall be replaced.
●Measure the resistance between every single black power cord and chassis grounding with a multimeter in the
highest resistance range.
o @
nic
★ Use tester coil to check whether the engine is through. If yes, it refers to short-circuit of coil and engine. And it
needs to check the charge coil.
★ If the resistance of stator coil is normal, but the voltage check shows that the magnetoelectric generator has
ec
failure, it means that the rotor magnetism has been weakened. At this moment, the rotor has to be replaced.
e p.t
Start up the engine
- d
○Run the revolutions per minute (rpm) according to Table 1
○Record the voltage readings (three measured values in total)
ins
Table 1 Output voltage of magnetoelectric generator r t
Range of tester
Wiring
Reading at 5000 rpm Ma
750 V AC
Connect tester (+) to
A black power cord
Connect tester (-) to
Another black power cord d
55V or higher re
★ If the output voltage indicated is within the range of the table, it means normal a n of the
operation
magnetoelectric generator.
le x
★ If the output voltage indicated is much lower than the value within the range of theA
of magnetoelectric generator. A - table, it means malfunction
a lS
r t ug
P o
t o r
M o
o to
u ltim
- M
PY 421
CO
Magnetoelectric generator assembly
Note:
Apply thread glue on each screw.
Tighten all the bolts to the following moment:
Moment 10N*m
*Attention
Clean the crankshaft and conical party of flywheel.
Align the groove on the flywheel to the solid key of axis.
Assemble the flywheel to the groove on the flywheel correctly.
There is magnetism existing on inner side of flywheel. Thus there should be no bolts on that surface.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 422
P
CO
Rectifier
Rectifier
Disassemble the rectifier
Disassemble the seat cushion component (See Chapter III Check and Regular Adjustment of "Air filter"
Disassemble the fuel tank (See Chapter III Check and Regular Adjustment of "Air filter"
Disassemble the left guard plate (See Chapter IV
Assembly machine covering part/ guard plate)
Screw off the bolt ②
Disassemble the relay scaffold ①
Screw off the bolt ④

Disassemble the relay ③
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
Screw off the bolt ⑥
Pull out the rectifier connector - d
Rectifier ⑤ ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 423
P
CO
Rectifier
Rectifier
Loop inspection of the main wiring end
terminal
Dismantle the vehicle guard plate
Disassemble the 3P connector of voltage & current
regulator. The following method can be used to check
the through status of the main wiring end terminal
Item (wiring color) Determination
Between rechargeable battery Rechargeable
(red) and vehicle body GND battery voltage
Ground existing
Between bond strap (black)
and vehicle body GND Wiring existing
Ground
Between charging coil
(white) and vehicle body No resistance
GND Ground
Inspection of rectifier
1. Multimeter selection: Diode grade;
2. The black probe is to connect the red line terminal
of voltage regulator. The red probe is to connect
the white line terminal of voltage regulator (white
1, white 2 and white 3). The pointer shows a
certain value (value range 0.1~0.5V) which
indicate that the voltage regulator has to be
replaced).
o @
nic
3、The red probe is to connect the red line terminal of
voltage regulator port. The black probe is to connect the white line terminal of voltage regulator (white 1, white
ec
p.t
2 and white 3). The pointer shows a certain value (value range 0.3~0.8V) which indicate that the voltage
regulator has to be replaced).
de
*Attention s -
●The metal part of multimeter can not be touched
r tin
by fingers.
Ma
●Check with a avometer. For different resistance
values of multimeter, the check shall not be d re
correct. a n
le x
In case of impedance value anomaly between terminals, the voltage regulator should be replaced.
- A
A
a lS
r t ug
P o
t o r
M o
o to
u ltim
- M
PY 424
CO
Ignition system
Ignition system
Trigger head
Power supply
Ignition system
Issues to be noted at operation
1. The ignition system shall be checked item by item as stipulated in the Troubleshooting Table.
2. Ignition system is electronic automatic timing angle device. In the cured ECU group, the ignition duration
shall not be adjusted.
3. The ignition system shall be checked item by item as stipulated in the Troubleshooting Table.
4. The most common ignition system failure is connector poor contact. Check whether the connector contact
is in good condition or not.
5. Check whether the heat value adopted by sparking plug is proper. Improper sparking plug is the primary
cause which will lead to unsmooth engine operation or sparking plug burnout.
6. The inspection of master switch shall be implemented according to the Switch Conduction Part. o @
(Attachment)
c nic
7. The disassembly of magnetoelectric generator and stator shall follow disassembly demonstration.
e
Warning e p.t
Ignition system will generate extremely high voltage. At engine - d
running, do not touch sparking plug or coil. Otherwise, you man be ins
r t
Ma
seriously shocked.
*Attention
d re
At ignition lock opening or engine running, do not disconnect the
battery cable or any other electrical connection. It is to prevent xan
damage to ECU. Do not install the battery in reverse. The negative A le
electrode shall be grounded. It is to prevent damage to ECU.
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 425
P
CO
Ignition coil
Ignition coil
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
Serial
Description & specification
Qty
r t
Ma
number
1 Bolt 1
2 Spring washer 1
d re
3 Ignition coil positioning clamp 1
xan
4 Ignition coil
A
2
le
5
6
Ignition coil set
O-shaped ring A - 2
2
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 426
P
CO
Ignition coil
Ignition coil
Disassemble ignition coil
Disassemble the left and right fuel tank guard plate
Disassemble fuel tank assemble
Disassemble the filter
Disassemble the bolt (1), spring washer (2) and
ignition coil positioning clamp (3) from the engine
Pull the ignition coil (4) from the engine
Remove the O-shaped ring (6), ignition coil set (5)
from ignition coil (5).
Warning
In case of removal the coil, do not prize up the

connector of the coil.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 427
P
CO
Ignition coil
Ignition coil
Operating principle of ignition coil
Ignition coil can provide energy to sparking plug which is installed in the combustion chamber. High-tension
cable is to connect sparking plug and ignition coil. Ignition coil is the part that can not be maintained.
Ignition coil appearance
●Input voltage: 9~14 VDC
●Output voltage: 25~35kV o @
●Normal operating temperature: -30~110°C
c nic
●Storage temperature: -40~155°C
e
e p.t
Check the coil one time
Coil terminal impedance measurement - d
Standard value: (0.6±0.1)Ω(20℃) ins
r t
Ma
When the resistance value within standard value
range shall be excellent.
Resistance value "∞" indicates coil wire
d re
disconnection". It is necessary to replace the
ignition coil. xan
A le
Secondary coil
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 428
P
CO
Ignition coil
Ignition coil
Ignition system inspection
*Attention
●When the sparking plug is free of spark, check
whether the wiring components are loosening,
access defect etc.. Check whether the voltage
value is normal.
●There are many brands of avometer. With
different internal resistance, the tests value will
be different as well.
Connect high voltage shunt on multimeter.

Or ammeter with an input impedance over 10MΩ10CV.
Primary voltage of ignition coil Multimeter
万用表
If dismantle the sparking plug, install another sparking
plug to realize GND to engine.
*Attention
Test the circuit wiring after correct wiring.
The normal circumstance of cylinder press
pressure refers that the sparking plug is installed
High voltage shunt
on the air cylinder. 高压分流器
Connect the ignition coil wire. A coil terminal
(black/red) is to be set on the current divider of body
iron.
Press the start-up motor or ignition coil rod o @
measurements to realize the Max. voltage.
c nic
Min. voltage: over 95V e
e p.t
*Attention
- d
Pay special attention that the metal part of
ins
multimeter can not be touched by fingers to avoid
r t
electric shock.
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 429
P
CO
Ignition coil
Ignition coil
Operation precaution Causes
DON'TS: Assemble low voltage installation connectors The behavior could lead to accident ignition of secondary
after power on. coil, and may cause personal injury.
DON'TS: Remove the secondary high pressure It may damage secondary high pressure connector, form
connectors with a screwdriver. The right tools shall be additional circuit, produce arc, cause fire or even bodily
removed. injury.
DON'TS: Use dropping or physical damaged parts The damaged parts can lead to premature failure of
visually inspected. components.
DON'TS: Scrap the secondary high pressure head or put The behavior may damage the sealing surface and cause high
any material on the surface of high pressure head. voltage leakage.
DON'TS: Use tools to impact ignition system It will lead to physical hazard, and will cause system fault or
components. failure.
Insulation spray may form high impedance or open circuit.
DON'TS: Spray paint or other mist spray to connector.
Conduction type spray may form short circuit.
The adapting piece of ignition system shall not bear the part
DON'TS: Mount the ignition system components with
weight which may lead to poor circuit connection or reduce
high-tension cable and ignition wire.
the performance.
It will form a loop outside the system and cause fire or even
DON'TS: Pierce or detect secondary high tension line
bodily injury caused by electric arc.
During the operation period, the technician will come into
contact with high voltage life damage; under the circumstance
DON'TS: Use without sparking plug being installed.
of not running, the material not burnt will cause a potentially
dangerous area.
Wiring harness is the only fault which can prevent
DON'TS: Ignition wire share with other components.
interference between electrical components.
DON'TS: In addition to the overall power, apply It may lead to performance reduction or fault of ignition
additional voltage on the ignition system. system electric appliance.
DON'TS: Use tools to connect the sparking plug to
It may cause damage to high pressure head and connectors
secondary high pressure head of ignition coil. Manual
surface.
installation of high-tension cable is the optimal.
The generated secondary voltage may cause ignition
DO'S: Assemble secondary guide line connecting
components damage, test equipment damage and even
primary line
personal injury.
DO'S: Be carefully while working around the ignition The high voltage generated by secondary high voltage coil
o @
nic
system. may cause bodily injury or damage to the test equipment.
DO'S: The appropriate operation and transportation
modes are conducive to reducing the impact, and
The damaged parts can lead to premature failure of
ec
p.t
components.
damages caused by moisture and contaminants.
DO'S: Avoid frequent connector plug electrical Connecting and disconnecting parts frequently may lead to
components. poor contact.
de
DO'S: Ensure that the low voltage socket is connected to
right position and is locked
This can cause ignition failure due to intermittent connection
of electric circuit. s -
DO'S: Use allowable junction box for test ignition
It may cause the damage of the connectors or parts.
r tin
Ma
system.
Liquid invasion end connection may lead to circuit short
DO'S: Ensure proper sealing at connection. circuit. Under external environment, it may lead to serious
corrosion.
d re
an
It is necessary to design another combustion system by using
DO'S: Use on the gasoline engine.
other fuel.
DO'S: Install insurance in power supply circuit.
le x
Protect the system in case of short circuit.
- A
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 430
P
CO
Ignition coil
Ignition coil
Operation precaution Causes
DO'S: In case of engine operation, take hot plate and guard plate High voltage and current may lead to failure or
as junction point. reducing the module performance.
This will reduce the potential grounding and improve
DO'S: Bind the guard plate and vehicle as far as possible.
the module heating.
DO'S: The ground wire of ignition system should be as short as
possible. If it is allowable, it can be common-grounded with the This will reduce unnecessary ground loop.
engine which will reduce unnecessary ground loop.
DO'S: The wiring harness of ignition system should be
It helps to prevent virtual circuit, open circuit and
reasonably arranged to prevent additional heat effect and
short circuit.
damage.
The peak voltage generated by secondary high
DO'S: Ignition secondary high voltage wire shall not connect
pressure wire may cause reducing or failure of
with primary ignition wires and other wiring harness connection.
adjacent component performance.
DO'S: Spark plug wire (secondary wire) and primary cable shall
not connect to cutting edge.
Spark plug wire will carry high voltage (30,000V). In
The fixed parts shall not be connected too tightly.
case of insulating layer failure, notch or scoring may
It shall be far away from the moving components (belt, fan etc.)
generate electric arc. This may lead to ignition system
Keep a distance at least 125 mm away from 400F heat source.
fire, fireless or premature failure.
Take protection measures (dirt, oil, water etc.) for environment
damages.
DO'S: Not all the clamp devices are designed as reusable.
If the clamp device is designed as not reusable, it can
Pay attention on specifications of the fastening devices. All
not get sufficient retention. The connector can not
wiring harness should get supporting within 6 inches away from
support the weight of wiring harness in design.
the connector.
DO'S: Replace the sparking plug according to the following To remove the sparking plug, it is necessary to cool
steps: down the engine first. After combustion, the engine
1-Before removing sparking plug, keep far away from oil and and sparking plug are under high temperature.
inflammable materials. Removal of sparking plug may lead to damage of
2-Pull out the cavity cap connecting to sparking plug. Hold the sparking plug screw thread.
sparking plug, rotate 90°. Use safety goggles to protect eyes from being
o @
nic
3-Use appropriate socket wrench to loose each spark plug or damaged by dust from compressed air at sparking
alternately. plug holes.
DO'S: Clean the sparking plug according to the following steps:
ec
1-Remove the residual oil, water and sewage on the sparking
plug surface.
-Cleaning sparking plug will reduce the voltage
generated between electrodes arc.
e p.t
2-If there is still oil contamination on sparking plug after
combustion, nonflammable and nontoxic solvent can be used to
-Cleaning and clearance adjustment can not recover
the spark plug to total new state. Through cleaning, to - d
clean the sparking plug. And then use compressed air to dry the substitute the used sparking plug for the new one is
ins
sparking plug. the most economic and effective method.
r t
Ma
3-Take propane flame to dry wet sparking plug head. Flames are -Do not use water or any liquid for cooling.
allowed to enter the center electrode of insulators. -Cleaning the thread is conducive to sparking plug
4-If there are any carbon depositions on sparking plug screw installation. In addition, sparking plug and cylinder
thread, wire brush can be used to clean the sparking plug. Pay
attention not to damage the electrode and the insulator.
re
cover shall be contact closely for heat dissipation.
d
DO'S: Adjust the spark plug gap according to the manufacturer's
xan
instructions to maintain the best fuel economy and good
performance of the engine; the scale can be used to accurately le
Too narrow gap may affect the stability of idling.
A
measure the spark plug gap; the side electrode of sparking plug
can be moved. However, the central electrode can not be moved. -
The used spark plug can not be measured and
identified accurately.
A
lS
Too wide gap may lead to fire (higher ignition voltage is
required)
g a
rt u
P o
to r
M o
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 431
P
CO
Ignition coil
Ignition coil
Operation precaution: Causes
Over heating of sparking plug may lead to ignition in

DO'S: When replacing spark plug, use the ones with
advance or piston ring damage. Over cooling of
same calorific value, thread and size.
sparking plug may cause pollution or emission
problems.
DO'S: Sparking plug installation shall abide by the

following steps:
1-Maintain the cylinder screw thread and sparking
If the screw thread is damaged, this will hinder the
plug screw thread clean. The sparking plug
optimal transfer heat to the cylinder head.
screw thread shall be free of burr. Use tools for
Do not use reverse phase size to match sparking plug.
tapping or threading if necessary.
This will reduce the friction spark plug, which will
2-Maintain the sparking plug gasket clean. The
rotate the spark plug and far away from the engine
screw thread gasket and gasket base shall be on
cylinder head which will enhance cylinder head
the contrary. No gasket is required for sparking
dropping.
plug with taper thread.
If the spark plug is too tight, it will cause spark plug
3-Screw the sparking plug in the cylinder end. And
lifting and spark plug too tightly. It is difficult to
then use torque wrench to tighten up according
remove.
to manufacturer's recommendation.
The twisting force differs depending on spark plug o @
types and cylinder head materials.
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 432
P
CO
Ignition coil
Ignition coil
Ignition coil installation

Install the O-shaped ring (6) and ignition coil set (5)
on ignition coil (4).
Install the ignition coil (4) to the engine.
Fix the ignition coil on the engine by utilizing the
bolt (1), spring washer (2) and ignition coil
positioning clamp (3).
Note:
Moment 10N*m
*Attention
Primary coil is for black/red line joint
installation.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 433
P
CO
Position sensor of crankshaft
Position sensor of crankshaft

Disassemble the position sensor of crankshaft
Bolt of crankshaft sensor [A]
Crankshaft sensor [B]
*Attention
Do not drop the sensor to the ground, especially
on hard ground. The sensor may be damaged
subjecting to such collision.
Use tester
*Attention
Check whether the trigger can work on the
engine.
Check the sensor of crankshaft position

Disassemble conductor joint of trigger
Measure the resistance value at point A and B of
engine.
Standard value: 550± 50 Ω(20℃)
If the measured resistance is higher than the
stipulated value, the coil circuit shall be disconnected
and shall be replaced.
If the measured resistance is lower than the stipulated
value, the coil circuit is under short circuit and shall
be replaced. o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 434
P
CO
ECU
ECU
ECU disassembly
Disassemble the screw (2). Take the ECU (1) out from
frame, as shown in Fig. A
Unplug the connector of ECU and cable
Check ECU
Dismantle ECU unit. Check the parts associated with
ignition system at wiring end. See details at:
"electro-jet system, ECU section".
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 435
P
CO
Sparking plug
Sparking plug
Sparking plug inspection
● Sparking plug disassembly (See the section of sparking plug disassembly)
● Visual inspection of sparking plug
● If the central electrode of sparking plug [A] and/or side electrode [A] being corroded or damaged, or the
insulated terminal [C] being damaged, replace the
sparking plug.
● If the spark plugs being contaminated or with
carbon deposition, replace the spark plug.
● Use a line feeler to measure the clearance [D].
● If the clearance is incorrect, replace the sparking
plug.
Sparking plug clearance: 0.6-0.7mm (0.024
-0.028 in.)
● Use standard sparking plug or the same level of
products
Sparking plug: CR8EIA-9
Ignition inspection
●Start up according to the following conditions
The first inspection
Conditions:
Transmission device → to grade I
Clutch handle → Hold
Kick stand → Upper
○ Open the ignition lock and press start button
○ If the circuit of start-up system is normal, the motor will not rotate.
●If the engine starts, check start power switch, single flameout switch, gear switch and relay box.
●If all unit status are normal, replace ECU. Start up the engine according to the following conditions
o @
The second inspection c nic
e
Conditions:
Gear → Neutral position e p.t
Clutch handle → Release - d
Kick stand → Lower
ins
○ Open the ignition lock and press start button r t
○ And then start up the engine. The precondition is that the circuit of start-up system should be normal.
Ma
★ If the engine failed to be started up, check the start switch, gear switch and relay box.
★ If all unit status are normal, replace ECU. d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 436
P
CO
Sparking plug
Sparking plug
The third inspection
●Perform the following operation. Check whether engine can be safely shut down.
●Run the engine according to the following conditions
Conditions:
Gear → Gear I
Clutch handle → Release
Kick stand → Holding
●Put the kick stand on the ground. The engine will shut down.
★ If there is no flameout, check the start switch, gear switch, kick stand flameout switch and relay box.
★ If all unit status are normal, replace ECU.
IC igniter inspection
○ Built-in igniter within ECU
● Refer to the following items
● Operation inspection related components of electric start safety circuit (See operation inspection related
components of electric start safety circuit)
● Troubleshooting of ignition system (See ignition system section)
● Voltage check of ECU (See detailed information at electronic fuel injection system (ECU)-ECU power
check)
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 437
P
CO
Ignition system troubleshooting

Error ignition (without no-spark)
Battery inspection No good Battery charging or battery

replacement
Good
Ignition system wiring and No good Repair or replace the damaged parts
connector inspection
Good
Sparking plug inspection No good Sparking plug replacement
Good
Peak voltage check of a lateral No good Ignition coil replacement
line circle
Good
Peak voltage check of a lateral No good The voltage is lower than the
line circle specified value
Good No good
Ignition coil failure. It The voltage is zero or Inspection: No

has to be replaced. close to zero. 1. Low voltage on multimeter good
2. Peak voltage of crankshaft sensor
3. Peak voltage of camshaft sensor
No good Inspection: Good Replace the failure parts or

o @
nic
1. Incorrect adapter connection or adapter perform inspection by
failure using a multimeter
ec
p.t
2. Ignition switch and engine stop switch
3. Peak voltage of crankshaft sensor
de
4. Peak voltage of camshaft sensor
s -
Good
r tin
Replace the failure parts ECU failure and to be replaced. Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 438
P
CO
Start-up system
Start-up system
Single flameout starting

on-off switch flameout switch starting battery relay motor
switch
Power
lock
main
relay
neutral position
switch Start-up schematic
diagram
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 439
P
CO
Motor start-up
Motor start-up
Disassemble motor start-up
*Attention
Before motor disassembly, it is necessary to turn the
master switch to "OFF". Dismantle the rechargeable
battery bond strap. Open the power supply to see
whether the motor is running to make sure it is safe.
Attention:
Do not flap the motor shaft or fuselage.
Otherwise, it will damage the motor body.
●Kettle decorative plate disassembly
●Kettle disassembly
●Disassemble terminal nuts of motor cable terminals
●Dismantle assembling bolts of starting motor

●Pull out electrical machine from the left
o @
Inspection start-up
Start up the engine according to the following c nic
e
conditions
Conditions: e p.t
Gear → Neutral position - d
Clutch handle → Release
ins
Kick stand → Lower r t
a) Open the ignition lock and press start button
Ma
d re
b) After exclusion of normal operation of start-up system normal circuit, the motor will not start up
c) Remove the starter motor and directly connect to positive and negative electrode of storage battery
directly. In case of normal operation, it is engine.
xan
le
d) Matching problem: If it failed to run, it means that the starter motor is damaged.
A
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 440
P
CO
Motor start-up
Motor start-up
Decompose starter motor
Dismantle shell screw, front cover, motor shell and
other parts.
Carbon brush inspection

●Measure the length [A] of each carbon brush [B]
★ If a carbon brush has reached the service limit,
carbon brush plate assembly has to be replaced.
Length of the carbon brush
Standard: 10mm
Service limit: 5.0 mm
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 441
P
CO
Motor start-up
Motor start-up
Cleaning and inspection of commutator
●Grind the commutator surface [A] with crocus cloth
[B] if necessary. Cleanup the groove at first.
●Diameter [A] of measuring commutator [B]

★ If the diameter of commutator is shorter than
operation limit, replace the new starter motor.
Diameter of commutator
Standard: 28 mm
Service limit: 27 mm
★ If the resistance between two commutators is high

or without reading, the coil has open circuit. The
starting motor must be replaced.
●Use multimeter to measure the distance between
commutator and axis [B] o @
★ If the reading is 0, it means short circuit of
c nic
armature and the starting motor has to be replaced.
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 442
P
CO
Motor start-up
Motor start-up
Carbon brush inspection
●Measure the resistance with a multimeter of x 1Ω as
shown in the Fig. below
Terminal bolt and positive carbon brush [A]
Right end cover and negative carbon brush [B]
★ If it is close to 0Ω. It means open circuit of carbon
brush. Carbon brush plate assembly has to be replaced.
Right end cover assembly inspection

●Measure the resistance with a multimeter as shown
in the Fig. below
Terminal and right end cover [A]
★ In case of any reading, short circuit of right end cover. Right end cover assembly inspection
Start motor assembly

Oil seal in front cover. Apply lubricating grease.
Install the electric brush on electric brush bracket
Apply lubricating grease at both sides of the electric brush shaft
Press the electric brush to the bracket
*Attention
●Pay special attention that the contact surface of
electric brush and armature shall be free of
damage.
●Pay attention that oil seal lip can not be
damaged at armature installation shaft. o @
Install motor back cover.
c nic
The screw hole and front cover at motor cover shall be e
aligned for installation.
e p.t
Lock the shell screw
- d
ins
*Attention
r t
Ma
At shell and front cover assembly, armature can
be easily pulled out by absorbing the front cover
with a magnet. Gently bet with hands to
d re
assemble.
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 443
P
CO
Motor start-up
Motor start-up
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 444
P
CO
Motor start-up
Motor start-up
Start motor assembly
Install the start-up motor. Make sure to install
dirt-proof boot properly.
Install the start-up motor
Fix the start-up motor (1) on the engine with fixing
bolts (2) as shown in Fig. A.
Note:
Tighten the two bolts to the following moment:
Moment 10N*m
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 445
P
CO
Relay start-up
Relay start-up
Disassemble:
*Attention
Before motor disassembly, it is necessary to turn the
master switch to "OFF". Dismantle the rechargeable
battery bond strap. Open the power supply to see whether
the motor is running to make sure it is safe.
Disassemble the left guard plate
Screw off the bolt ④
Disassemble the relay ③
Disassemble start-up motor wire connector
Disassemble start-up motor wire connector
Relay start-up inspection

When the master switch is turned to "ON", inspect after
hearing the sound "kada".
If any such sound observed, it is normal.
If there is no sound:
●Check the voltage of start-up relay.
●Actuation check of start-up relay
●Actuation check of start-up relay
o @
Relay start-up
c nic
Voltage check of start-up relay e
Perform stand up. Measure the voltage between start-up
e p.t
relay joint purple/yellow line and car body GND Ground.
- d
When the master switch is turned to "ON", turn on flameout
ins
switch. The gears shall be switched to neutral position. The Ω r t
Ma
rechargeable battery voltage shall comply with regulations.
Relay
In case of no voltage at start-up relay terminal, the flameout
switch can be cleaned. Whether it is neutral position.
start-up
d re
Perform wire inspection of secondary pipeline.
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 446
P
CO
Relay start-up
Relay start-up
Relay start-up inspection
Dismantle the start-up relay connector
Conduction checking of the black wire of wire connector terminals and vehicle GND Ground .
Start up the button. The green/yellow wire and vehicle GND Ground shall be connected properly.
Continuity and guide line inspection at start button while without conduction
Action check of start-up relay

●Connect to engine relay with a multimeter and 12V
battery, as shown in the Fig. below
●If the relay failed to work according to regulation,
the relay has failure and has to be replaced.
Test relay
Tester range: x 1Ω scope
Standard: At battery connection → 0Ω
At battery disconnection → ∞Ω
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 447
P
CO
Relay start-up
Relay start-up
Assembly
Install and start motor wire connector. Install the
battery wire connector
Tighten the bolts ④
Relay assembly ③
Note:
Moment 10N*m
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 448
P
CO
Instrument
Instrument
Instrument disassembly
Dismantle the retaining nuts at headlight head with a hex socket
Dismantle the instrument fixed bracket mounting plate with a sleeve (inside the hood)
Separate the instrument fixed bracket mounting plate with a sleeve
Dismantle the air guide sleeve with a screwdriver at the front of the instrument
Instrument and indicator light
When the ignition key turn to "ON", the instrument and indicator light are open.
After initial inspection, information is corresponding to the overall health status of the vehicle.
Indicator lights have the following indicator lights
o @
Status indicator lamp c nic
e
p.t
1A: Turn to indicator light (green)
When the indicator light flashes, it means that the light is on
1B: Neutral position indicator light (green) de
When the indicator light is on, it means that the whole machine is under neutral gear state.
s -
1C: High beam lamp (blue)
When the indicator light is on, it means that the light is on
r tin
Ma
1D: Oil pressure warning light (red)
After open the power supply, and the engine is not started up, the engine oil light is normally on; after
extinguished, perform shut down inspection; d re

starting up, if the engine oil pressure is normal, the engine oil indicator light is not off, if the oil lamp is not
to stop running for inspection. xan

At engine oil pressure oil inlet, engine oil pressure water inlet, the indicator light will be constant on. It needs
FI: “FI” refers to fault code diagnosis of electro-jet system (orange)

A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 449
P
CO
Instrument
Instrument
After the key and the electronic injection indicator light are on, oil pump will work for 3 seconds. Start the
motorcycle. After the motorcycle being started up, the indicator light will be off, which indicates that the vehicle
is normal without fault; otherwise, it means fault. At the same tine, if the indicator light is at extinguishing status,
the vehicle runs normally. If the indicator light is on, stop running for inspection. Contact Benelli & Qianjiang
Motorcycle stores takes dedicated vehicle to carry out fault diagnosis.
Function button (2)
Button function table
Item No. Function Power supply Indication Left button Right button Results
Functions
<3s TRIP
switching
Functions
TRIP <3s TOTAL
switching
Small mileage
TRIP >3s Small mileage reset
reset
Functions
km km/h <3s miles mph
switching
Functions
miles mph <3s km km/h
switching
Time setting TOTAL >3s Hour place flashing
TOTAL <3s Hour place +1（0-23）
TOTAL <3s Shift to decade place
TOTAL <3s decade place +1（0-5）
TOTAL <3s Shift to unit place and flash
TOTAL <3s Unit point +1（0-9）
TOTAL <3s Exit clock menu
Note Under clock adjustment state, if there is no pressing action in 5s, automatically exit the menu.
Revolution meter (4):
It indicates revolutions per minute of the engine.
Water temperature measuring o @
It indicates water temperature °F (Fahrenheit) or C° (degrees Celsius)
All/part of km counter (6) c nic
e
According to your needs, select relative odometer mileage (TRIP) or TOTAL mileage (TOTAL) function,
and can choose unit as MPH (miles) or km. Short press the function button (2) as well. e p.t
Relative odometer mileage (TRIP): It is a milometer that can be reset. Record the driving mileage within a
- d
certain time range. Under relative odometer mileage (TRIP) status, long press (6) function button A to
reset.
ins
Total distance (TOTAL): Record the total mileages. r t
Milometer records the total distance traveled.
Speedometer (7) Ma
Speedometer refers to driving speed. According to your requirements, short press the function button at the
d re
an
same time.
Choose unit as mph (miles/h) or km/h.
Digital clock (8) le x
Fuel gauge (9): - A
Display hour and minute. If the time has to be adjusted, serial number function button (2)
l SAto oneas level,

Refers to the residual oil in the fuel tank. In case of filling fuel and presenting
the fuel oil is insufficient, and the oil level is one level or insufficient
7 levels of oil level. When
fuel gage will flash
a
consecutively.
r t ug
P o
t o r
M o
o to
u ltim
- M
PY 450
CO
Instrument
Instrument
Assembly
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 451
P
CO
Master switch
Master switch
Master switch disassembly

Disassemble the air guide sleeve
Disassemble conductor joint of master switch
Check the master switch

Conduction checking on connector terminal
If do not tally with the conduction table, please replace
the main switch.
Schematic wiring diagram
Wire color
R R/W
Gear
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 452
P
CO
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
Disassemble:
Remove the loudspeaker wiring
Inspection
After the external loudspeaker being connected to
rechargeable battery, if there is any sound, it refers to
normal operation.
Resistance value: 3.2Ω
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 453
P
CO
Handlebar switch (sell on domestic market)
Handlebar switch
The switches can be divided as:

1. Dimmer switch
2. Change-over switch
3. Loudspeaker switch
4. Headlight switch
5. Flameout switch
6. Start-up switch

Loudspeaker switch
Dimmer switch Change-over switch
R/W BL R/Y LBL G/B O G/W R/W N
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
Headlight switch Flameout switch
Start-up switch
d re
N/Y n G/Y
R/W Y Y/R R N/Y
xa
A l e
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 454
P
CO
Handlebar switch (EURO-STANDARD state)
Handlebar switch
The switches can be divided as:

1. Dimmer switch
2. Change-over switch
3. Loudspeaker switch
4. Warning switch
5. Flameout switch
6. Start-up switch

Dimmer switch Change-over switch Loudspeaker switch
R/W BL R/Y LBL G/B O G/W R/W N
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
Warning switch Flameout switch Start-up switch r t
R/Y BL R N/Y N/Y G/Y
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 455
P
CO
Velocity sensor
Velocity sensor
Disassemble velocity sensor

Warning
Do not drop the sensor to the ground,
especially on hard ground. Impacting
vibration can damage the sensor.
●Loosen the bolts ② Disassemble velocity sensor
①
●Disconnect the connectors of velocity sensor
Check the velocity sensor

●Disassemble velocity sensor (See the velocity sensor
disassembly section)
●Connect the velocity sensor connector [A] and
battery [B], 10kΩ resistor [C] and handheld
multimeter [D] as shown in the Fig..
●Set the multimeter to DC 20V (digital multimeter)
●Slide the whole surface transverse voltage of
velocity sensor from storage battery voltage to 0-1V. o @
c nic
e
Velocity sensor assembly
e p.t
- d
ins
Note: r t
Tighten screws to the following moment: Ma
d re
Moment 10N*m
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 456
P
CO
Relay and fuse-base block
Relay
Relay
Disassemble the relay
Relay is directly installed on the wiring harness.
Pull out the upper cover at disassembly.
Pull out 2# and 5# relay.
Screw off the fixing screws with five large sized hex
Socket.
Take out the relay
*Attention
Relay diode is available at the relay. The diode
of relay box is not removable.
Warning
Do not drop the relay to the ground,
especially on hard ground. Such vibration on
relay may cause damage on it.
Circuit inspection for relay
●The electrical conductivity of the following terminals through connecting a handheld multimeter and 12V
battery to relay (See internal circuit of relay box).
★If the readings of multimeter are not conforming to the regulations, replace the relay box.
 Circuit inspection for relay (Disconnect the  Circuit inspection for relay (Installed with
battery) battery)
Multimeter Readings of Battery
Multimeter
Readings of
o @
nic
connection multimeter (Ω) connection multimeter
connection
3-4 ∞ (+) (-) (Ω)
Main relay Main
ec
p.t
1-2 Not ∞* 1-2 3-4 0
relay
7-8 ∞
Blower relay
5-6 Not ∞*
Blower
5-6 7-8 0
de
Oil pump relay
11-12 ∞
relay
Oil
s -
9-10 Not ∞* pump
relay
9-10 11-12 0
r tin
Ma
Main ECU 15-16 ∞
relay 13-14 Not ∞* Main
13-14 15-16 0
ECU relay
Light relay
19-20
17-18
∞
NOT ∞*
Light
17-18 d
19-20re 0
 *: Actual readings may differ according to
relay
(+): Connect to positive wire xan
different handheld multimeter adopted. le
(-): Connect to negative wire
A
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 457
P
CO
Relay
Relay (EURO-STANDARD state)
11
10
12
20
19
17
18
9
13
15
14
16
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
LR/BL
BL/G
Gr/G
R/W
G/BL
BL/B
R/B
Y/W
LG
G/N
Y/R
Y/W
B/Y
Y/B
R/W
R/W
R/W
O/G
2Electric fan 3 pump

3油泵 relay 4ECU relay 5Light relay o @
nic
1主继电器
1main relay 2风扇继电器 4ECU继电器 5灯光继电器
relay fuel pump
继电器
ec
p.t
relay
de
Relay (sell on domestic market)
s -
Relays for selling on domestic market do not contain
r tin
Ma
#5 relay for export sales. Others are not different with
the aforementioned export inspection methods.
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 458
P
CO
Fuse-base block
Fuse-base block
Fuse disassembly
●Seat cushion disassembly (See Chapter Frame, Seat
cushion disassembly)
●Open the snap joints and lift the cover

●Straightly pull out the fuse from the fuse-base block
with a nipper pliers.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 459
P
CO
Electro-jet system
Electro-jet system
Introduction
BJ300GS adopts small sized engine electro-jet system manufactured by Delphi Corporation. The system conducts
closed-loop control through two oxygen sensors. Two independent oil cylinder and ignition control. Three-way
catalyst is adopted to process engine combustion gas to transform to innocuous gas and discharge to the air. The
system adopts closed-loop control self learning system. It can effectively eliminate the manufacturing difference
on the system and related mechanical parts manufacturing thus to improve the comprehensive consistency of the
whole machine. It can eliminate the error caused by abrasion, and other causes.
idle speed contr

position sensor ol valve
of throttle valve optional
crankshaft position
burglar alarm
crankshaft sensor
restrictor valve
position ta optional
rget wheel
heated exhaust gas

oxygen sensor
ignition coil
heated exhaust gas

oxygen sensor
ECM
engine temperature
sensing unit
intake air temperat Nozzle
ure
neutral position sw
itch
dumping switch Fault diagnosis switch

o @
nic
serial communication interface
MAP
ec
ignition switch
e p.t
- d
storage battery fault indicating engine rotation
ins
lamp al speed signal
Metal carrier catalytic c
r t
Ma
onverter
=
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 460
P
CO
Electro-jet system/ECU
ECU
Engine control unit (MT05 ECU)
Engine controller is to detect real-time engine running state through various kinds of sensors. Through reasonable
calculation and self-learning control output device, it has optimized the driveability of vehicles under various
working conditions, and ensured the original vehicle emissions and fuel economy as well. Additionally, in case of
system failure, ECU can perform self diagnosis.
ECU appearance
The upper part of MT05 ECU shell adopts plastic, while the bottom part adopts aluminum alloy. Fig. 2 are front
and reverse side photos of MT05 controller.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 461
P
CO
ECU
Overall dimensions
The Max. overall dimension of the controller is 103*92.6*27.1mm. The size of mounting holes, which are used
for fixing the controller, have been included, however, not including connectors and wiring harness of the
controller. Please refer to the following outline dimension drawing
Assembly
Assemble ECU(1) on the frame with screw (2) as o @
shown in Fig. A
c nic
e
Note: e p.t
Tighten the two bolts to the following moment: - d
ins
r t
Moment 3.9 N*m ±10%
Ma
d re
Warning:
x an
A lemay lead to controller
Mounting surface must be flat to prevent generating exterior stress on the controller which
circuit board bending.
A -
a lS
r t ug
P o
t o r
M o
o to
u ltim
- M
PY 462
CO
ECU
Tag and identification label
Each controller has a product identification label for traceability. Label information shall cover Delphi and
customer part number, customer vehicle model, controller type description and production date. The label shall
not be damaged or contaminated since it is an important basis for Delphi to confirm controller information. If the
label is damaged or contaminated, Delphi will not provide after-sales services for the controller. Please refer to the
diagram below.
● CUSTOMER PART NUMBER: Product identification number stipulated by the manufacturer;
● DELPHI E&S END MODEL NUMBER: Product serial number identification number of DELPHI;
● CUSTOMER VEHICLE PLATFORM NUMBER: Vehicle information number stipulated by the
manufacturer;
● MODEL DESCRIPTION: Product model identification number of DELPHI;
● PRODUCT MANUFACTURING COUNTRY: Manufacturing site of ECM; identification labels should be
in English.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 463
P
CO
ECU
Definition of ECU pin
J1-1 Idle speed stepper motor high A pin J2-1 Driving pin of 1-cylinder ignition coil
J1-2 ECP pin J2-2 System ground pin
J1-3 Fault indicating light pin J2-3 K line communication pin
J1-4 Heating pin of 2-cylinder oxygen sensor J2-4 High potential pin of crank signal
J1-5 Signal pin of 2-cylinder oxygen sensor J2-5 Driving pin of 1-cylinder fuel injector
J1-6 Revolution meter J2-6 Driving pin of 2-cylinder fuel injector
J1-7 Low CAN line signal J2-7 Heating pin of 1-cylinder oxygen sensor
J1-8 High CAN line signal J2-8 Signal pin of intake air temperature sensor
J1-9 System ground pin J2-9 Pin of oil pump control signal
5V Reference voltage ground pin of the

J1-10 Driving pin of 2-cylinder ignition coil J2-10
system
J1-11 Idle speed stepper motor low A pin J2-11 Signal pin of MAP
Signal pin of position sensor of throttle

J1-12 Idle speed stepper motor high B pin J2-12
body
J1-13 Idle speed stepper motor low B pin J2-13 Low potential pin of crank signal
Dumping switch (being effective at low

J1-14 J2-14 Signal pin of water temperature sensor
position)
Priming supply (12V positive voltage after o @
J1-15 Pin of vehicle speed sensor J2-15
key)
c nic
e
p.t
J1-16 J2-16 5V reference voltage
J1-17 J2-17 Signal pin of 1-cylinder oxygen sensor de

Rechargeable battery (rechargeable battery s -
J1-18 Pin of neutral clutch switch J2-18
12V positive power supply)
r tin
Viewing from rear side of the engine, the left one is cylinder #1 and the right one is cylinder #2.
Ma
the grey connector of ECU. d re
Note: J1 refers to the grey connector of ECU; J1 refers to the black connector of ECU; J1-1 refers to #1 pin on
n
theawiring harness
The Fig. below presented the definition of the pin of MT05 ECU interface as well as x
connecting diagram of the engine.
A le
A -
a lS
rt ug
P o
t o r
M o
o to
u ltim
- M
PY 464
CO
ECU
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 465
P
CO
ECU
Attention:
Attention: Causes
High temperature may reduce the service life of the
DON'TS: Place the ECU close to an exhaust pipe or
controller and even cause damage to the controller
engine
directly.
DON'TS: Place the ECU close to any place with drop
Controller may be damaged by the liquid.
of water, oil or any other liquid
DON'TS: The controller surface is to be covered by Clay or other pollutants which may affect the heat
clay or other pollutants dissipation performance of the controller.
It may cause controller performance failure or even
DON'TS: Load additional voltage to the controller
controller damage.
DON'TS: Clean the controller with liquid with
May damage the controller shell.
dissolution or corrosion action
DO'S: Ensure that water or a large number of moisture
The connectors may be short circuit and further lead to
shall not drip or attach on the connectors of the
controller damage.
controller
DO'S: Clean the controller with wet cloth and wipe dry Can prevent controller damage.
Power supply requirements

 Power supply: If the battery voltage is greater than 6.3V, the power supply module can start control chip
of the controller which is automatically controlled by controller.
 Scope of supply: Enable the controller to work normally within the battery and ignition voltage of 9 to
16v.
 Shutdown: In case of the ignition voltage being lower than 6.2V, the controller will shutdown.
 Controller will enter shutdown procedure and store the important information in the memory of the
o @
nic
controller.
 Restart: In the process of restart, all the output will be set to a predefined state. Controller will be under
ec
p.t
real-time monitoring. In case of any internal error being detected, it will automatically enter the restart
status. After restart, the controller will execute according to normal program.
de
 Overvoltage: Under the circumstance of working for one minute at a DC voltage not exceeding 26V, the
controller will not be subject to permanent damage. s -
 Backward voltage: Under the circumstance of working for one minute at a DC backward voltage not
r tin
exceeding 13V, the controller will not be subject to permanent damage.
Temperature requirements
Ma
d re
Operating temperature: The control can run normally between ambient temperature from -20℃ to 85℃.
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 466
P
CO
Electro-jet system/water temperature sensor of engine
Water temperature sensor of engine
Operating principle of water temperature sensor of engine
The sensor is to be used on water cooling engines to measure the temperature of engine water channel. It is
assembled on the engine cylinder. Within the sensor temperature range, the resistance will be varied along with
different engine temperature. It is characterized of negative temperature coefficient resister. It is a part that can not
be maintained.
Appearance of engine water temperature sensor
The appearance of water temperature sensor is as shown below
Wrong picture of water

temperature sensor. Ask
665382 for another one.
Installation requirements of water temperature sensor of the engine
 Dynamic torque requirements: Should take manual assembly first to correctly mount the screw threads.
Tighten them to stipulated moment of torque manually with a wrench. The recommended assembly
torsion is as below:
Moment 20~25N*m
●Static torque requirements: The moment of torque adopted to disassemble the sensor from engine shall not
exceed 200% of that used for assembly.
o @
nic
Working environment of water temperature sensor of engine
●The sensor is mainly used on water cooling engine
●Normal operating temperature: －40~135 ℃ (consecutive running) ec
●Relative humidity of working environment: 0~100%
e p.t
●Typical working pressure: Under the minimum installation torque, the sensor can realize engine coolant sealing
under the condition that the actual pressure is up to 206.8kPa (30psi) and the temperature is 135℃. - d
●Limit working environment: Only can work for one hour at the Max. temperature of 150°C.
ins
Electrical environment of water temperature sensor of engine r t
●Typical working voltage: reference voltage: 5 ± 0.1VDC
Cleaning method of water temperature sensor of engine
Ma
d re
The sensor can be cleaned with isopropyl alcohol and then subject to air drying if necessary. Immerse with
invading to internal of the sensor. xan

isopropyl alcohol for not more than 1 minute. Install necessary sealing connector to prevent cleaning solution
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 467
P
CO
Electro-jet system/intake air temperature sensor
Intake air temperature sensor
Operating principle of intake air temperature sensor
Within the sensor temperature range, the resistance will be varied along with different engine temperature. It is
characterized of negative temperature coefficient resister. It is a part that can not be maintained.
Appearance of intake air temperature sensor
The appearance of intake air temperature sensor is as shown below
Sensor head
Connector assembly
I. Technical parameters
●Working voltage: 5VDC
●Response time: <15s
●Operating temperature: -40 ~ 150°C
●Relative humidity: 0 to~100% RH.
Resistance measurement value and temperature curve:
进气温度与电阻曲线
Air intake temperature and resistance curve
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
d
电阻
Resistance
s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 468
P
CO
Electro-jet system/intake air temperature sensor
Intake air temperature sensor

Pin definition and functional diagram
5V ECM
R pull-up
Sensor A/D
Converter
GND
Measure the resistance between two pins with a multimeter. The corresponding lists of specific temperature and
resistance are as shown below:
Measured temperature (℃) Resistance value (Ω)
0 9,399
5 7,263
10 5,658
15 4,441
20 3,511 o @
25 2,795
c nic
e
30 2,240
e p.t
Intake air temperature sensor is located at the air filter. It can be pulled out wearing gloves. - d
Cleaning
ins
The sensor can be cleaned with isopropyl alcohol and then subject to air drying if necessary. Immerse with r t
isopropyl alcohol for not more than 1 minute. Install necessary sealing connector to prevent cleaning solution Ma
invading to internal of the sensor.
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 469
P
CO
Electro-jet system/Intake manifold pressure
MAP
Operating principle of MAP
The sensor is to measure the absolute pressure of inlet elbow. It reflects the size of inlet pressure which can be
converted to air intaking volume entering the combustion chamber of the engine. It is a part that can not be
maintained as well.
Appearance of MAP
Working environment
● Working pressure range: 20~102kPa
● Operating temperature range: -40~105°C
● Relative humidity: 0 to~100% RH.
● Limit working environment: Only can work for two hours at the Max. temperature of 125°C.
Storage environment
Storage temperature: -50°C~150°C
Electrical environment o @
Typical voltage: DC reference working voltage of sensor is 5 ± 0.1V.
c nic
Characteristic curve
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 470
P
CO
Electro-jet system/Intake manifold pressure
MAP
Definition of foot position
Position
MAP is integrated on throttle valve.
Cleaning
The sensor can be cleaned with isopropyl alcohol and then subject to air drying if necessary. Immerse with
isopropyl alcohol for not more than 1 minute. Install necessary sealing connector to prevent cleaning solution
invading to internal of the sensor.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 471
P
CO
Electro-jet system/oxygen sensor
Oxygen sensor
Operating principle of oxygen sensor
Oxygen sensor can be used to detect the oxygen content in flue gas discharged from engine exhaust pipe, to
control internal fuel closed-loop of ECU, and to maintain engine combustion at the most reasonable air and gas
ratio (14.7).
Appearance of oxygen sensor
●Threshold value of air-fuel ratio: ＞750 mVDC
●Dilute threshold of air-fuel ratio: ＜120 mVDC
●Heating power of oxygen sensor: 7.0W
(The aforementioned parameters can be measured on engine pedestal. Working conditions: 450°C exhausted gas
temperature, 70% duty ratio, 10Hz, 13.5V voltage).
●Heater resistance: 9.6±1.5Ω (measured at 21°C)
●Operating temperature range: 260-850°C
Installation requirements o @
●Installation angle (included angle with the horizontal plane): ≥10
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
 Tightening torque: 40-60 Nm
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 472
P
CO
Electro-jet system/oxygen sensor
Oxygen sensor
Definition of foot position
Characteristic curve
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
Oxygen sensor is located on the exhaust manifold. Please pull out the oxygen sensor connector first. Dismantle ins
r t
Ma
the oxygen sensor with a 13 open spanner. Do not tie off or twist the wiring harness at disassembly.
Fuel quality requirements
●Pb≤0.005g/L
d re
●P≤0.0002g/L
●S≤0.04% (weight proportion) xan
●MMT≤0.0085g/L
A le
●Si≤4ppm
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 473
P
CO
Electro-jet system/idle speed stepper motor
Idle speed stepper motor
Air;
1. Air; 2. valve block; 3.intake manifold ;4.Idle speed stepper motor;

5. by-pass port
Operating principle of idle speed stepper motor

Idle speed control valve is to control the flow area of bypass bronchial thus to regulate the air amount of engine to
realize engine idle speed control.
Definition of pin
dirt-proof boot
Adjusting head （Adjusting
head corresponding to the
contact pin
o @
nic
Max. stretching position. Can
move between 0.44-2.00mm）
ec
e p.t
- d
ins
connector
r t
Ma
d re
Total retracted
position
xan
working position
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 474
P
CO
Electro-jet system/idle speed stepper motor
Idle speed stepper motor

Characteristic parameters:
Rated voltage: 12Vdc
Max./Min. working voltage 7.5Vdc/14Vdc
Each volume resistance (@27°C): 53±5.3
Minimum resistance (@-40°C): 35
Each coil inductance (@25°C): 33.5mH±6(1kHz)
Stepping distance (stride) 0.04167mm
Maximum stroke: 8.5mm (204 steps)
Operating temperature range: -40°C to 125°C (150°C peak value)
Minimum storage temperature -40°C
Weight 110g
The stepping motor is always integrated on the throttle valve. For cleaning, disassembly the stepping motor first,
and then clean up with clean duster cloth.
Appearance of idle speed stepper motor
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 475
P
CO
Electro-jet system/ECP
Canister solenoid valve

Operating principle description
ECP controls the fuel vapor in canister to enter the engine air intake system to realize combustion in the engine.
Thus the fuel evaporative emission can be reduced.
Appearance
The appearance of ECP is as shown below:
ECP solenoid valve pin can not be distinguished from positive and negative electrode. The connection
method is as shown in the schematic diagram.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
Activated - d
carbon tank
ins
interface
r t
intake
manifold
Ma
electrical interface
d re
interface
Electromagnetic xan
switch under
A le
constantly
closed state A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 476
P
CO
Electro-jet system/ECP
Canister solenoid valve

●Normal working voltage: 8~16V VDC
●Operating temperature: -40~120°C
●Working frequency: 16 Hz
●Maximum flow rate: 25-35L/min
Flow curve is as shown in the Fig. below:
Flow (standard l/min)
duty ratio
o @
Installation requirements
c nic
●ECP shall be horizontally installed on motorcycle.
e
●ECP shall be installed close to the position of the center of rotation axis of the crankshaft thus to reduce
e p.t
vibration.
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 477
P
CO
Chapter IX Faults and Troubleshooting
Difficulty in starting or starting failure ............................................................................................... 479
Poor rotation (Especial at low speed) ................................................................................................. 480
Poor rotation (High speed).................................................................................................................. 481
Charging defect (Over discharging or over charging of battery voltage) ........................................... 482
Spark plug jump.................................................................................................................................. 483
Diagnosis breakdown maintenance of electro-jet system ................................................................... 484
Directly use the fault indicating light flashing diagnosis (FI) on the instrument ........................485
Use diagnostic apparatus on fault diagnosing ............................................................................. 488
Check the faults with diagnostic software PCHUD .................................................................... 489
Common trouble shooting methods of electro-jet system .................................................................. 497
Repair kit .................................................................................................................................... 497
Engine working data flow indicated on the diagnostic apparatus ............................................... 498
Simple troubleshooting methods ................................................................................................ 498
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 478
P
CO
Difficulty in starting or starting failure
Fault diagnosis Check adjustment Failure cause

Check whether the
petrol pump is
working properly No gasoline in the gasoline tank
Tubing blocking of petrol tank

fuel injector
Sufficient No gasoline
supply of fuel supply for Gasoline pump tubing
injector fuel fuel injector Disassemble the obstruction
flow spark plug. Install
the spark plug to Pipeline jam fuel evaporation
control system
spark plug seal,
GND Ground with Fuel filter blocking
engine, check whether
Weak or no spark the spark plug has spark Insufficient oil pressure in the
at spark plug jump petrol pump
Spark plug defect

Spark jump
at spark plug Spark plug contamination
ECU unit defect

Compression Trigger defect
pressure
measurement
Open circuit or short circuit

Normal Low or no
compression compression ignition coil wire
pressure pressure Open circuit or short circuit
ignition coil wire
Re-start Master switch defect
Charging coil defect
Clutch starting defect

Free of Engine outburst
ignition and But not started
o @
nic
spark jump
Cylinder piston, piston ring
ec
p.t
defect
Cylinder cushion discharging
Remove the spark plug
for inspection
de
s -
r tin
Ma
Air inhalation at intake manifold
Dry spark Humid spark
plug plug
d re
Incorrect ignition timing
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 479
P
CO
Poor rotation (Especial at low speed)
ignition timing
ECU defect
normal abnormal
Trigger defect
Throttle adjustment
screw
Gas mixture thinning（Loosen

Excellent Mis-adjustm the screw）
adjustment
ent
Gas mixture concentrated
Air inhalation at
intake manifold (locking the screw)
Heat insulation block

No air Air inhalation Loosen screw nut of throttle
inhalation
valve
Insulation gasket rupture
Disassemble the spark plug.
Install the spark plug to spark
plug seal, GND Ground with engine,
check whether the spark plug has spark jump Spark plug defect or
contamination
Good spark Spark plug jump ECU defect
o @
nic
plug jump defect Ignition coil defect
open circuit or short circuit of
spark plug
ec
p.t
Master switch
de
Throttle valve s -
r tin
Ma
Good Defect
re
through air hole blocking
d
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 480
P
CO
Poor rotation (High speed)
Ignition time
adjustment
ECU defect
Normal Abnormal
Trigger defect
fuel supply circuit
Insufficient gasoline in the

gasoline tank
Normal Abnormal
Petrol filter blocking
Fuel tank evaporation control
Fuel injector block system pipe blocking
ing
No Blocking Removal
blocking
throttle valve
inspection
o @
Good Spring fracture
c nic
e
p.t
and elastic fa Spring defect
tigue
de
s -
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 481
P
CO
Charging defect (Over discharging or over charging of battery
voltage)
Measure the voltage
at both ends of the
engine Reached the full service life of
storage battery
Battery voltage Battery voltage
rising rising to normal
value. Restore to Battery voltage defect
original voltage
after flameout
Check whether the voltage

regulator plug is loosening
Plug contact undesirable defect

Normal Abnormal
Red line open circuit of wiring
Check the voltage of multimeter n

egative red line socket
voltage regulator
Voltage No voltage
White line break
Coil impedance value

determination of AC
Coil defect
Normal Abnormal
poor contact o @
White line break of AC
c nic
generator
e
p.t
Bad charging or
Start the engine. Connect the red line of Storage battery defect
overcharging voltage regulator socket to avometer of
the positive and negative electrode de
connecting to vehicle body,
s -
r tin
Ma
Voltage is Normal voltage
higher than
normal value
Check whether the voltage regulator
wiring is poor contact d re
Normal Poor loose co
xan
Poor contact grounding wiring
ntact Unit testing impedance of
voltage adjuster
A defect le
A -
a lS voltage regulator defect
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 482
P
CO
Spark plug jump
Replace the new spark
plug and recheck
Weak or no Strong spark

spark at spark Original spark plug defect
plug
Check the spark

plug and re-check
Not loosened
Loosened
Spark plug cover loosened
Check whether the ignition
coil plug is loosened
Normal Abnormal
Poor plug contact
Check the ignition coil plug

conduction between terminals
and determine the resistance
value.
Charging coil defect
Normal Abnormal
Trigger adverse
Ignition coil defect
Related parts inspection
(cable, etc.)
Normal Abnormal
Main wiring broken
o @
nic
Use ECU diagnosis instrument
to check ECU group Connector socket poor contact
ec
e p.t
Nor Abnor ECU defect - d
mal mal
ins
r t
Use an ammeter
To check the cable Ma
Abnormal
d re
an
Cable defect
le x
- A
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 483
P
CO
Diagnosis breakdown maintenance of electro-jet system
Fault indicating light of electro-jet system

Fault indicating light (FI) is located on instrument panel, made with a FI. Under normal circumstances, open the
key and the fault indicating light will be constantly on. It indicates that the electro-jet system is under power
supply state and it can work normally. When the fault indicating light is off, it indicates that the electro-jet system
has no power and it will not work. It is necessary to check the fuse and positive and negative electrode connection
status of rechargeable battery. After starting up the engine, the fault indicating light will be off which means that it
is free of fault; on the contrary, if the fault indicating light is still constantly on, it indicates that the electro-jet
system is not normal, and requires troubleshooting due to the malfunction.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 484
P
CO
Malfunction detection methods
Directly use the fault indicating light flashing diagnosis (FI) on the
instrument
Under the circumstance of fault, operate through three on/off operations, namely key on---key off---key on---key
off---key on. The fault indicating light will flash the corresponding failure flash code. Find out the corresponding
fault through fault code.
For reading the fault through fault indicating light, flash codes rules are as shown below: For example, for the
fault of MAP disconnection or signal side pin or short circuit to negative electrode of rechargeable battery, after
three on/off operations of the key, the fault indicating light will quickly flash for 10 times presenting 0. After an
interval of 1.2s, it will quickly flash for one time presenting 1; after an interval of 1.2s, it will quickly flash for 10
time presenting 0; after an interval of 1.2s, it will quickly flash for 7 time presenting 7, namely P0107. It can be
seen that except for 0 being presented by flashing for 10 times, the number from 1 to 9 is presented by the actual
times of flashing. For other fault codes, such as P0.01, 1 means fuel injector failure. After flashing P0107, pending
for 3.2s, flash P0201 fault code. If there is no other fault, it will flash P0107, P0201. And then correlative
malfunction can be detected from the fault codes.
While using PCHUD software, the software will report the fault code by means of decimal numeral system. The
decimal numeral system and the former hexadecimal are one-to-one correspondence. Corresponding fault can be
detected according to the corresponding relation. For example, in the software MULFCURR (current
malfunction)=263, is corresponding to P0107 in the fault codes list, namely MAP failure.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 485
P
CO
Methods to detect fault

MT05 fault codes list
DTC Number
System or HEX(Diagnostic DEC(Software
DTC Description DTC Description in Chinese
Component instrument display
display) )
Manifold MAP Circuit Low
107 263 进气压力传感器电压低或开路
Absolute Voltage or Open
Pressure Sensor MAP Circuit High
108 264 进气压力传感器电压高
(MAP) Voltage
Intake Air IAT Circuit Low Voltage 112 274 进气温度传感器电压低
Temperature IAT Circuit High
Sensor (IAT) 113 275 进气温度传感器电压高或开路
Voltage or Open
Coolant/Oil
Temperature Sensor 117 279 水温传感器电压低
Circuit Low Voltage
Coolant/Oil
Coolant/Oil
Sensor
Temperature Sensor
118 280 水温传感器电压高或开路
Circuit High Voltage or
Open
TPS Circuit Low 节气门位置传感器电压低或开
122 290
Throttle Position Voltage or Open 路
Sensor (TPS) TPS Circuit High
123 291 节气门位置传感器电压高
Voltage
O2S 1 Circuit Low
131 305 1 缸氧传感器电压低
Voltage
Oxygen Sensor
O2S 1 Circuit High
132 306 1 缸氧传感器电压高
Voltage
O2S Heater Circuit
31 49 1 缸氧传感器加热线圈电压高
Oxygen Sensor High Voltage
Heater O2S Heater Circuit Low
32 50 1 缸氧传感器加热线圈电压低 o @
nic
Voltage
Fuel Injector A Injector A Fault 201 513 1 缸喷油器线圈故障
ec
p.t
Fuel Injector B Injector B Fault 202 514 2 缸喷油器线圈故障
FPR Coil Circuit Low
Fuel Pump Relay Voltage or Open
230 560 油泵继电器线圈电压低或开路
de
(FPR) FPR Coil Circuit High
Voltage
232 562 油泵继电器线圈电压高
s -
CKP Sensor Noisy
336 822
触发器（曲轴相位传感器）信
r tin
Ma
Crankshaft Signal 号混乱
Position Sensor
触发器（曲轴相位传感器）无
(CKP) CKP Sensor No Signal 337 823
信号
d re
Ignition Coil A
Cylinder A Ignition Coil
fault
351 849
xan
1 缸点火线圈故障
Ignition Coil B
Cylinder B Ignition Coil
fault
352 850 le
2 缸点火线圈故障
A
-
l SA
a
rt ug
P o
t o r
M o
oto
lt im
M u
Y - 486
P
CO
Methods to detect fault

Continued
DTC Number
System or HEX(Diagnostic DTC Description in
DTC Description DEC(Software
Component instrument Chinese
display )
display)
Idle Control
Idle Speed Control Error 505 1285 怠速控制错误
System
System Voltage Low 562 1378 电池电压低
System Voltage
System Voltage High 563 1379 电池电压高
MIL MIL Circuit Malfunction 650 1616 故障指示灯故障
Tachometer Circuit Low
1693 5779 转速输出电压低
Voltage
Tachometer
Tachometer Circuit High
1694 5780 转速输出电压高
Voltage
O2S 2 Circuit Low Voltage 137 311 2 缸氧传感器电压低

Oxygen Sensor 2
O2S 2 Circuit High Voltage 138 312 2 缸氧传感器电压高
O2S Heater 2 Circuit High 2 缸氧传感器加热线圈电

38 56
Oxygen Sensor Voltage 压高
Heater 2 O2S Heater 2 Circuit Low 2 缸氧传感器加热线圈电
37 55
Voltage 压低
Vehicle Speed
VSS No Signal 500 1280 车速传感器无信号
Sensor
Park Neutral
Switch Diag
Park Neutral Switch Error 850 2128 空档、离合器开关故障
o @
CCP short to high 445 1093 碳罐电磁阀输出电压高
c nic
e
p.t
CCP
CCP short to low/open 444 1092 碳罐电磁阀输出电压低
de
Rollover Sensor Rollover Sensor
1500 5376 倾倒传感器故障 s -
Diagnostic malfunction/Triggered
r tin
Ma
Several BLM value hit
BLM_MaxAdapt 171 369 燃油长效学习值偏高
maximum
BLM_MinAdapt
Several BLM value hit
minimum
172 370
d re
燃油长效学习值偏低
PESystLean
PE mode burned AFR keeps
174 372
xan
功率加浓模式持续偏稀
lean
A le
-
l SA
a
rt ug
P o
t o r
M o
oto
lt im
M u
Y - 487
P
CO
Use diagnostic apparatus on fault diagnosing
Operation methods:
a) a)6-hole diagnose interface on motorcycle
b) Connect the cable and diagnostic instrument interface
c) Perform diagnosis after turn on the key
Warning
● XCM－PT100X diagnostic apparatus is highly sophisticated instrument which should be away from impact o @
and vibration;
c nic
● At the first time of starting up, the instrument doesn't work normally nor show stably. Please disconnect the
e
power cord and retry;
e p.t
● Please make sure that connectors are always tightened in the diagnosis interface;
● It is strictly prohibited to use electrical signal exceeding the limiting value; - d
● It is strictly prohibited for drivers to use the instrument during driving process; ins
r t
Ma
● Use and storage conditions:
Ambient temperature: 0~50℃
Relative humidity: lower than 90%
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 488
P
CO

Check the faults with diagnostic software PCHUD
PCHUD software is used to detect and record the engine operating data. Before using the software, connect the
laptop to 6-hole diagnostic hole of motorcycle through K wire. The diagnostic hole is located below the rear
cushion. Please note that PCHUD system only supports 16Bit software Windows operating system or very few
32bit Windows operating system. It doesn't support 64bit Win7, Win8 or iOS. Install K wire driver software at the
notebook.
PCHUD software instruction:

(1) Connect the laptop to 6-hole diagnostic hole of motorcycle through K wire and turn on the key.
(2) Double click "HUD.EXE" icon and start up PCHUD software.
(3) Select "File" at the software interface. Click "Open" to select “PCHUD.HAD”. Select OK to confirm.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
re
(4) Select “Parameter File” under "Setup". Click MT05common.par. Select “Comm protocol” under "Setup".
d
Select “Keyword2000” and then click OK. Select 17 for Device Code.
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 489
P
CO
(5)
If the software interface can't display real-time traffic data in the case of electricity, need to continue to conduct
the following work. Check COM port to connect setup to find if there is any problem. Generally set COM Port: 4.
Baud Rate: 10400. Do not select DTR High at startup.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 490
P
CO

Perform normal communication. Display current fault code at MALFCURR. Display the historical fault codes at
MALFHIST.
o @
c nic
Check corresponding fault through fault codes list
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 491
P
CO
Parameters interpretation of PCHUD software:

Attention: Viewing from rear side of the engine, the left one is cylinder #1 and the right one is
cylinder #2.
VRPM 发动机转速 engine speed
VTHROT 节气门开度 throtle position
VBARO 大气压力 BARO
VMAP 进气歧管压力 manifold air pressure
VMAPEXP 进气歧管压力估计值 expect manifold air pressure
VIGN 蓄电池电压 ignition key voltage
VCLTS 发动机缸温或者冷却水温 cylinder temperature or coolant temperature
VIAT 进气温度 intake air temperature
STATUSBYTE5 状态标志 5 STATUSBYTE5
VAFCMET 空气流量学习条件满足 airflow correction met
VBAROCMET 大气压力更新条件满足 Baro update met
VCSINSYNSPRK 顺序点火标志 sequential spark enable
tip-in 点火角修正条件满
SATITRIG tip-in Spark Advance retard trigger
足
CATLOENB 触媒工作逻辑使能 catlyst light-off logic enable
IF ENGSTATE=3 发动机正常工作标志位 engine work in run state
NISTBLIDLE 暖机怠速条件满足 stable warm idle
2 缸氧传感器加热完成标志
FO2REDY2 O2 ready
位
FCNO 进气效率长效学习单元 block learn memory cell
FBLMCOR1 1 缸长效学习值 cylinder 1 block learn memory
o @
FCLCINT1
FCLCMUL1
闭环学习 I 项
闭环学习修正量
intergral of close loop correction
close loop correction c nic
e
IARDRPM
IARPMERR
目标怠速转速 desired idle rpm
idle rpm error e p.t
FPWVC1
怠速偏差
1 缸喷油脉宽 base pulse width of cylinder 1 - d
VO2 氧传感器信号 Oxygen sensor signal
ins
r t
Ma
FO2STAT1 1 缸氧传感器浓稀标志位 cylinder 1 oxygen sensor signal rich lean state
FCLREST1 1 缸闭环修正重置标志位 re
cylinder 1 close loop correction reset
d
FOSHTREN 氧传感器加热使能 Oxygen sensor heater enable
a n
FO2REDY1
1 缸氧传感器加热完成标志
le
cylinder 1 Oxygen sensor ready x
位
怠速步进电机闭环学习使
A
- close loop correction
idle airflow control valve
IF IACV MODE=0 A
IAMTRLOST
能
怠速步进电机丢步标志位
enable
IACVa lS
lost
IACMVIHB 怠速步进电机禁止移动标 u
t g
IACV move disable
o r
r P
o t o
o M
o t
lt im
M u
Y - 492
P
CO
志位
VIGNS 点火状态标志位 ignition state
FVE1 1 缸充气效率 cylinder 1 Volumetric efficiency
VMAPRANG 进气压力读取角度 MAP read angle
AFFNLAFR 目标空燃比 target air fuel ratio
SAESTA 1 缸点火提前角 cylinder 1 Spark Advance
SAIDLDYN 怠速动态点火角 idle dynamic Spark Advance
SPDWELL 充磁时间 dwell time
IAINTEGOFST 怠速步进电机气量学习值 airflow integral of idle air control valve
IACVDSMP 怠速步进电机目标步数 desired position of idld air control valve
FCLCEN1 1 缸闭环修正使能 cylinder 1 close loop correction enable
PPDSEBL 预喷禁止标志位 prime pulse disable
FPENABL 油泵使能标志位 fuel pump enable
FTRNSAES 加速加浓使能 acceleration enrich enter
FTRNSDES 减速减稀使能 deceleration enlean enter
FTRNSAEDCLOAD 加速加浓退出 acceleration enrich exit
FTRNSDEINLOAD 减速减稀退出 deceleration enlean exit
FCLCEN2 2 缸闭环修正使能 cylinder 2 close loop correction enable
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 493
P
CO

Diagnostic process:
1.Insert the key on vehicle and do not start the motorcycle, please check:
Check and
Parameter Min Max Description Units
Record
□Norm
VIGN 11.5 13 battery voltage volt
□Abnormal
□Norm
VTHROT 0 1 fully closed throttle position percent
□Abnormal
□Norm
VTHROT 98 100 fully open throttle position percent
□Abnormal
□Norm
VTHROTRAW 4000 9000 Absolutely throttle body voltage AD None
□Abnormal
□Norm
VBARO 98 103 atmospheric pressure kpa
□Abnormal
□Norm
VIAT -15 40 intake air temperature degC
□Abnormal
□Norm cylinder temperature or coolant

VCLTS -15 40 degC
□Abnormal temperature
2.Starting:
Check and
Record
o @
nic
□Norm
Start - - - -
□Abnormal
ec
TERRCNT
□Norm
□Abnormal
0 0 Fly wheel tooth error counter count
e p.t
- d
FUELCOFF
□Norm
0 0
fuel cut-off enable, the normal flag is
None
ins
□Abnormal white, if not blue
r t
VRLVENBL
□Norm
0 0
Rollover sensor enable, normal is
None Ma
□Abnormal white, if not blue
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 494
P
CO

3. Idle The parameters can be checked 1 min for idle speed after vehicle starting. And then
check the stability of EFI parameterafter 3 minutes of long idle.
Check and
Record
□Norm
VRPM 1300 1700 engine speed rpm
□Abnormal
□Norm
VTHROT 0 1 fully closed throttle position percent
□Abnormal
□Norm
MALFCURR 0 0 current MALF code None
□Abnormal
□Norm
VBARO 98 103 atmospheric pressure kpa
□Abnormal
□Norm
VMAP 47 53 intake pressure measured value kpa
□Abnormal
□Norm
VIGN 12 16 battery voltage volt
□Abnormal
□Norm Neutral and Clutch switch enable flag,
PNSWTCH 0 0 None
□Abnormal blue is working
□Norm
IACVDSMP 10 60 stepping motor target value step
□Abnormal
□Norm
vehicle speed 0 0 vehicle speed Km/h
□Abnormal
□Norm
FBLMCOR1 0.75 1.15 cylinder 1 block learn memory factor
□Abnormal
□Norm
□Abnormal
FCLCINT1
□Norm
-15 15
cylinder 1 integral of lose loop
count o @
nic
□Abnormal correction
FCLCINT2
□Norm
-15 15
cylinder 2 integral of close loop
count
ec
p.t
FPWVC1
□Norm
□Abnormal
1.5 2.6 base pulse width of cylinder 1 ms
de
□Norm s -
FPWVC2
□Abnormal
1.5 2.6 base pulse width of cylinder 2 ms
r tin
VO2
□Norm
□Abnormal
45 850 cylinder 1 oxygen sensor voltage mv
Ma
VO2B
□Norm
45 850 cylinder 2 oxygen sensor voltage d re
mv
□Abnormal
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 495
P
CO

4. Run with stable speed
Check and
Record
□Norm
MALFCURR 0 0 current MALF code None
□Abnormal
□Norm cylinder temperature or coolant
VCLTS 40 105 degC
□Abnormal temperature
□Norm
VIGN 12 16 battery voltage volt
□Abnormal
□Norm
vehicle speed 0 220 vehicle speed Km/h
□Abnormal
□Norm
□Abnormal
□Norm
□Abnormal
□Norm cylinder 1 integral of lose loop
FCLCINT1 -15 15 count
□Norm cylinder 2 integral of close loop
FCLCINT2 -15 15 count
□Norm
VO2 45 850 cylinder 1 oxygen sensor voltage mv
□Abnormal
□Norm
VO2B 45 850 cylinder 2 oxygen sensor voltage mv
□Abnormal
5. Top speed with full throttle(PE mode, power enrich)
PE mode: 70% < VTHROT < 100%, in this situation，the value of oxygen sensor(VO2
VO2B) is around 800mv. o @
Parameter
Check and
Record
Min Max Description Units
c nic
e
VCLTS
□Norm
□Abnormal
80 105
cylinder temperature or coolant
temperature
degC
e p.t
- d
VIGN
□Norm
□Abnormal
12 16 battery voltage volt
ins
r t
Ma
□Norm
VO2 750 950 cylinder 1 oxygen sensor voltage mv
□Abnormal
VO2B
□Norm
750 950 cylinder 2 oxygen sensor voltage d re
mv
an
□Abnormal
le x
- A
A
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 496
P
CO
Common trouble shooting methods of electro-jet system
Common failures
Repair kit
a) Disassembly and assembly of electric control system components-Dismantlement tool of commonly used
automobile mechanical parts
b) Electronic control system circuit and system electrical signal - digital multimeter (with buzz)
c) Fault diagnosis of electronic control system as well as engine working condition detection
●Electronic control system fault diagnosis instrument (recommended)
●Fault diagnosis software (PCHUD) and interface wiring (can be used when the condition is allowed)
b) Electronic control system fault codes (emergency application)
c) Fuel pressure gauge, measuring range 0~300kPa
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 497
P
CO
Common failures
Engine working data flow indicated on the diagnostic apparatus
Analyze and determine engine failure according to the engine working data flow displayed by the diagnostic
apparatus.
Step I
a) Engine wiring harness and vacuum pipeline-May affect system control air flow and oil supply
b) Whether oxygen sensor assembly is in place-Could affect the judgment of the system on the air-fuel ratio.
c) Engine failure indicator light-Affect warning of the system on the fault
d) Rechargeable battery voltage-Determine whether a battery power is sufficient
e) Determine whether the displayed values of coolant temperature sensor, intake air temperature sensor, inlet
manifold absolute pressure sensor and oxygen sensor are normal according to the experience.
f) Working range of position sensor of throttle valve-Can not be fully open or closed. It may affect the engine
power performance and partial system function.
Step II
Whether ECU power supply is closed off-Cut off the diagnostic instrument and system
communication after turning off the key.
Step III
a) Coolant temperature and coolant temperature cycle-indicate whether the thermostat is working correctly.
b) Rechargeable battery voltage (14V)-Display whether the electric generator is working correctly.
Excessive high: Possible voltage regulator fault
Excessive low: Possible improper electric generator wiring or electric generator fault
c) Manifold absolute pressure-It can indicate that intake of air leakage and valve clearance.
Too low valve clearance: The value is too high. It can affect the dynamic property of engine due to exhaust
valve, high temperature rising to greatly shorten the service life of oxygen sensor and three-way catalyst;
The valve clearance is too high: It will cause too low of intake manifold pressure, affect the judgment on
diagnosing of the working state of engine and cause idling.
In addition, if the exhaust system is blocked, such as: foreign body existing in the exhaust passage, too high o @
of oil consumption and blocking of ternary catalysts, as well as three-way catalyst internal broken; the value
c nic
will be too high. e
d) Cycle index of oxygen sensor-Cycle number is too low which indicates oxygen sensor failure.
e p.t
Simple troubleshooting methods - d
When fix the electro-jet system, please complete the following steps in order. If the failure can be fixed in the next
ins
step, suspend the subsequent steps. Use the diagnostic instrument. Perform inspection acceptance and clear the r t
fault codes according to "Engine working data flow displayed by the diagnostic apparatus".
Ma
When use the diagnostic apparatus, the rechargeable battery voltage shall not be lower than 8.5V.
Daily use and maintenance d re
● Use #93 or #97 premium unleaded gasoline.
x an
● Gasoline filter shall not be replaced once per every 18000km. A le
● ECU has moistureproof function. However, high pressure gun can not be used to wash the shell.
A -
● Under the condition of normal use, clean the throttle valve once per every 10,000km or one year.
a lS
r t ug
P o
t o r
M o
o to
u ltim
- M
PY 498
CO
Common failures
Fault phenomenon—Can not be started up
a) Turn the ignition switch to "ON" to check whether the fault indicating light is on.
If not:  Check the fuse and grounding line
 Check whether the ECU plug is fixed or not
 Check whether the light and wire line is normal by using executing agency of diagnostic
apparatus
 Check and repair the light bulb and wiring
If the light  Connect the diagnostic apparatus to system diagnosis interface
is on:
b) Check whether the diagnostic apparatus connects to system connection communication
If not:  Check the fuse and grounding line
 Check whether the ECU plug is fixed or not
 Check whether the diagnostic apparatus works normally on the normal vehicle.
If yes:  Exclude the failures indicated by the diagnostic apparatus
c) Check the ignition system fault-Check whether the spark plug can perform normal ignition
If not:  Check whether the high-tension cable and sparking plug are firmly or damaged.
 Determine by using another ignition coil assemble
 Determine by using ECU
If yes:  Check whether the high-tension cable is correctly connected to ignition coil and sparking
plug.
d) Check oil supply system failure
Check whether the fuel pump is working-When the engine starts up, the sound of oil pump working can be
heard around the fuel tank.
Not  Check whether the fuel pump relay is working correctly.
working:  Check whether the position sensor of crankshaft is connected properly.
 Determine by using ECU
 Check oil pump wiring
If it 1)Whether the fuel supply pressure is greater than 220Kpa
works: 2)Insufficient  Check whether the fuel tank has sufficient oil.
pressure:  Check whether the fuel filter should be replaced (Note: Special gasoline
filter for electronic injection shall be replaced once per every 18,000km).
o @
nic
 Check whether the fuel feed pipe and oil return pipe are damaged
 Check whether the nozzle control circuit is normal.
3)Normal
ec
p.t
pressure:  Check whether the nozzle should be cleaned or not
a) Determine whether the cylinder is submerged
If yes:  Fully open the accelerator. Connect the starting motor. The engineer shall show work signs
de
of the engine after a few seconds.
s -
f)Check whether the clearance of position sensor crankshaft is big
r tin
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 499
P
CO
Common failures
Fault phenomenon—Can not be started up, accompanying with tempering
a) Check whether the ignition coil is loosening
b) Check whether the timing ring is loosening
Fault phenomenon—Unstable idle speed
Idle speed control Check whether the idle by-pass bolt is over screwed or under screwed. Generally two
system: rings.
Oil supply system: If there is oil leakage in oil pipeline.
Fault phenomenon-Idle speed too high or too low (obvious idling and nonconforming to target idle
speed)
Idle speed  When the water temperature is lower than 68°, the system will improve the idling speed
is too high to accelerate machine heating up process. In addition, check according to the following
steps.
 Check whether the idle by-pass is over screwed
 Valve clearance, especially whether the exhaust valve clearance is too large.
Idle speed  Check the fuel tank oil, fuel filter, oil pressure and nozzle
is too high:  Check whether the idle by-pass is under screwed
 Check whether the valve clearance is too small.
Fault phenomenon—Unsteady idle speed accompanying with slowing down.
a) Check the valve clearance
b) Check whether the idle by-pass port and throttle body is too dirty
Fault phenomenon - Insufficient acceleration
a) Whether the parameters of idle speed and high idle speed are normal;
b) Check the fuel tank oil and fuel filter;
c) Check whether the exhaust system is blocked, for example: whether the three-way catalyst is blocked due to
engine oil burnout or breaking;
d) Check oil pressure and nozzle.
e) Check whether the fault indicating light is bright, and whether it is due to normal ignition of air cylinder.
Fault phenomenon-Slight fire phenomenon
Check whether the spark plug gap is in accordance with the specification 0.6~0.7mm o @
Fault phenomenon-Fault indicating light is on. The fault code is nonconforming to the fault.
c nic
It may be because of unclear system ground wire. Re-connect the grounding wire. Disconnect the
e
rechargeable battery power line. Connect and re-start the engine three minutes later.
Fault phenomenon—The fuel consumption is too high. e p.t
a) Check whether the oxygen sensor of two cylinders are installed properly. If it is under the loose state, oxygen - d
sensor will wrongly determined as combustion thinning. Increase the fuel oil which will lead to extremely
ins
high fuel consumption.
r t
Ma
b) After confirming the engine mechanical components and oxygen sensor are normal, run the engine to
observe the readings of oxygen sensor. Under normal water temperature, if the reading is always greater than
500mV, check whether the fuel spray nozzle is subject to oil leakage.
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 500
P
CO
Common failures
Attention:
● Most of the electronic injection parts are unrepairable. After confirming the part is damaged, perform
replacement processing.
● When start the engine, do not operate any mechanism on the engine (including accelerator. Do not pull the
throttle).
● If the engine fault indicating light is lightened up in the process of engine operation, make sure to find out the
cause and perform troubleshooting as soon as possible.
● Do not use leaded petrol. Lead will damage oxygen sensor and three-way catalyst.
● In case of abnormal oil consumption, settle the problem as soon as possible, some material in the engine oil
will damage the oxygen sensor and 3-d catalysts.
● The valve clearance should not be too small. If the exhaust temperature is too high, it will shorten the service
life of three-way catalyst.
● When the air temperature is lower than 10C, and the whole vehicle and engine is running at low speed. The
exhaust pipe may have carbon deposit and black oxide coating which belong to normal phenomenon. After
running for a period of time at high speed, take appropriate means to keep the engine coolant temperature
within specified temperature range.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 501
P
CO
Chapter X Appendices
Wire wrapping method of cables, wires and hoses .................................................................................- 503

BJ300GS circuit diagram (sale in domestic market) ..............................................................................- 525
BJ300GS circuit diagram (EURO-STANDARD)...................................................................................- 526
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 502
P
CO
Wire wrapping method of cables, wires and hoses
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 503
P
CO
Clutch wire and front

hydraulic brake pipe is go
through the head wire and
rear side of front cap lamp
installation plate. Pay
attention no crossing
between the two.
The main cable goes

through the hydraulic
brake wire. Enters from the
rear side of the head wire,
and access from the left
side triangular notch.
One cable clamp increased at the

throttle cable. Clamp the two cable
clamps together. Pay attention to the
sleeve is changed to be clamped at
the rear wire.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 504
P
CO
Throttle cable and front hydraulic brake

wire go through the rear side of mount
plate of the front hood downlight. The
throttle cable goes through the rear
side of the front hydraulic brake wire.
Pay attention that the throttle cable is
on the clutch wire.
Throttle cable and the clutch

wire access to the vehicle frame
from the rear side of head wire
and right side of frame.
The sleeve of front hydraulic

brake wire is pressed to the
corresponding clamp to the lower
joint plate.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
The left switch wire unit is clamped
with wire clamp. The connector part Ale
is placed to the front hood downlight
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 505
P
CO
The left switch wire unit, headlight line

and electric door lock line are clamped
together with a clamp. The component
part is placed to the headlight and cable.
Pay attention that the electric door lock
shall not be filled.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
Ale
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 506
P
CO
For lower part of front

hydraulic brake wire
layout, pay attention
that it shall not contact
with the front fender to
avoid abrasion of the
front hydraulic brake
wire.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 507
P
CO
The main cable wire goes through

the lower side of the throttle cable.
Pay attention that the crossing
part shall go through the air filter
air inlet port.
Bind 200mm main

cable, throttle cable Remove the binding
into the vehicle band at this location
frame: the main
cable is clamped to
the stand. The
throttle cable goes
through the external
side.
The wire of oxygen sensor,

ignition coil wire and o @
oil pressure sensor component
are pulled to the rear side of c nic
e
p.t
water tank. After connecting
to triangle hole, put the
component cable into this de
place: bind the cable,
s -
component and sleeve with
250mm binding band to
r tin
Ma
frame. The position is as
shown below.
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 508
P
CO
Bind the cable

with 200mm
binding band to
frame. The
position is as
shown below.
Bind the cable

and oil level
sensor with
200mm binding
band to frame.
Clamp the oxygen sensor wire

and fuel oil pressure sensor
with iron wire clip at the
position as shown in the figure.
Pay attention that

the oxygen Clamp the oxygen
sensor wire shall
not be pulled too
sensor wire and
fuel oil pressure
o @
nic
sensor with iron
tightly. wire clip on the
engine with the
ec
p.t
direction as shown
Rubber binding in the figure.
band will bind
the oxygen
Bind the oxygen
de
sensor wire and
fuel oil pressure
sensor wire and
fuel oil pressure
s -
sensor wire to the
rear side of the
sensor wire tightly
with rubber binding
r tin
Ma
water tank. band.
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 509
P
CO
Bind the oxygen sensor wire,

component sleeve end and high
voltage component cable
together with fine binding
band. Pay attention to place the
component and sleeve to the
triangle hole. The high voltage
component cable is in rubber.
The oxygen sensor goes

through from this location.
After the horn wire going
through this clamp (as shown
in imaginary line)
The oxygen sensor wire is to

be clamped with rubber band.
Avoid contacting with oxygen
sensor wire and the engine.
Bind the rubber band to the

water pipe. Pay attention to
avoid oxidation.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 510
P
CO
The right bond strap goes towards

to right back; the right ignition coil
wire points to right back; the two shall
Wiring of right ignition coil not shall not contact water tank fan.
wire etc. is at the rear side of
the rubber to avoid the cables
being agitated to water tank
fan.
Wiring of left ignition coil wire

etc. is at the rear side of the
rubber to avoid the cables
being agitated to water tank
fan. The left bond strap goes
towards to left back; the right
ignition coil wire points to left
back; the two shall not shall
not contact water tank fan.
o @
Connect the throttle cable to
c nic
the engine. Attention: Connect e
the upper front side throttle
cable to the upper side. The e p.t
rear throttle cable connect to
- d
this place.
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 511
P
CO
The main cable is wired to

backside along with the upper
left side of the frame. Pay
attention to the rectifier.
Motor wire goes to inner side of

the main cable. Attention: Not
intertwine with other cable
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A - .
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 512
P
CO
The cables at this point are

bonded together. Attention: The
wiring shall be in neat.
The cables at this point are bonded Kick stand flow out switch and crankshaft
together by rubber band. Attention: The signal wire etc. are clamped with iron wire
wiring shall be in neat. clamp, the installation position of which is
on the mounting screw of power cover
towards the upper side of the vehicle.
The cables and pipelines are Kick stand flow out
clamped with iron wire clamp, switch wire goes
the installation position of through the inner side
which is on the mounting
at the position as shown
screw of power cover towards
the front side of the vehicle. in the figure.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
in s
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 513
P
CO
The positive pole wire of the

battery, frame bond strap, Kick
stand flow out switch wire and
other component are bonded
together tightly with 150mm
binding band at the end.
The main cable are bonded

together with 250mm binding
band. Pay attention on the main
cable shall be at rectifier and
component upper side.
o @
The installation position of
c nic
bond strap is as shown in the
e
figure. The position is above
the main cable. e p.t
- d
ins
The positive pole wire of
r t
the battery is at inner side
of the frame. Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 514
P
CO
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 515
P
CO
The positive pole wire of the

battery goes inside the
frame, below the welding
components.
The main cable is

clamped with wire
clamp.
o @
The main cable is
c nic
tightly clamped with
e
p.t
wire clamp. The tail
cable goes inside the
frame passing the
de
frame as shown in the
figure.
s -
r tin
Ma
d re
The main cable is
tightly clamped with
xan
wire clamp. The tail
cable goes inside the
A le frame passing the

frame as shown in the
figure.
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 516
P
CO
The positive pole

wire of the battery
goes inside the
frame passing the
frame below the
welding components
The seat cushion wire is clamped

by iron wire clamp (do not use the
tail cable at this position to clamp
the wire). The wire clamp is as
shown in the figure toward to the
vehicle.

the battery is clamped by
iron wire clamp. The wire
clamp is as shown in the
figure toward to the
vehicle.
Attention: The water

pipeline goes through
the triangle hole from
o @
nic
the frame.
ec
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
.
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 517
P
CO
The cable at right side

of the vehicle goes to
backward along the
right upper side of the
frame
o @
nic
The binding band at
this place is removed.
ec
e p.t
The clutch changes to - d
go to upper side of the ins
r t
Ma
mounting bracket of
resonance pot.
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 518
P
CO
Bind the velocity

transducer and brake
light wire with 200mm
binding band.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 519
P
CO
The rear hydraulic brake

tube and velocity
transducer cable are
bonded together with
rubber binding band.
The velocity transducer
cable is located at
The velocity
transducer cable
goes through the
wire clamp. The
wire clamp position o @
is changed.
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 520
P
CO
Velocity transducer
cable and brake light
wire are below the
frame.
o @
c nic
e
The oil cup , oil tube, e p.t
velocity transducer - d
cable and brake light
ins
wire are clamped r t
together by fine Ma
binding band. Pay
attention not to d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 521
P
CO
The drain pipe of

resonance pot is
arranged beside the
engine and front of
the real wheel fork.
The drain
pipe of fuel
oil tank is
arranged
beside the
engine and
front of the
real wheel
fork.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
a lS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt im
M u
Y - 522
P
CO

The fine binding the battery is clamped with
band is removed at iron wire clamp. The
excessive part of the cable
this position. shall be pressed to.
The positive,
negative pole wire of The ECU component
the battery, and bond cable and relay cable
strap are bonded are bonded together
together with fine with rubber band.
binding band.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
d re
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lt i m
M u
Y - 523
P
CO
The cable bond strap of

cable is changed to frame
left side of the mounting
screw of the battery
bracket. Pay attention that
arrange the bond strap
first and than the battery
bracket. Do not touch the
frame.
o @
c nic
e
e p.t
- d
ins
r t
Ma
The bond strap angle is as
d re
shown in the figure.
xan
A le
A -
alS
ug
o rt
r P
o to
M
o to
lti m
M u
Y - 524
P
CO
CO
P Y - M
怠速控制阀
u
启动二极管
黄/红灰
主继电器黄/紫紫/棕
lt
红/白黄/红白/黄
灰/黄1
选配
i
红/白黑/黄1 A
保险盒启动继电器右把手开关边撑熄火

左把手开关后刹车开关仪表档位指示
前刹车开关燃油泵风扇 ECU 电源锁
保险丝电瓶
电门锁
15A 15A 15A 10A 40A 闪光器蓝/黄
正极黑/白1
m
1左 1右 2右 2左
仪表 2右
黑/蓝
1左 1右 2左
粉
马达浅粉绿绿红橙绿绿
蓝黄棕粉绿紫粉红紫黑浅绿A 紫黑黄橙
红粉绿红红浅绿 / / / / 黄红黑
红1 / / 红1
红/ 红 / 绿红淡蓝红灰黑棕棕红 / / 红/白 3 / /
红 / 黄1A
紫
黑黑灰 / / / 蓝 / 白 / 红节气门传感器
黄 / 黄 / 白黄黑1白1 白白3 2 2
o
白白 3 紫蓝
蓝白 3
红/白
灰白
粉红/棕5 粉红/绿3
棕/橙1
紫/白6 红/白
粉红/白4 白2
棕黄灰绿灰
/
红/蓝橙3 绿1 灰/红黑红/白
白/
橙/白3 蓝
to
机油开关棕/白灰黑/棕棕/黑橙/黑
黄/白
红/浅蓝1 碳罐电磁阀
浅绿/白
启动二极管绿/黄2
灰棕/白3 右转向灯
绿/白1 绿/红2
M
右转向灯棕/白3 灰黄3 左转向灯
o
淡蓝黑
前照灯黄黄后尾灯
蓝紫
绿/黑1 黄
to
左转向灯灰黄3 牌照灯
黑
r
黑
离合器开关
浅绿/白
P
黑
o
喇叭
棕/紫
rt
红/白
u
绿/棕
风扇继电器黄/黑
橙/绿
g a
绿/蓝
黄/白
ECU油泵继电器蓝/黑
红/黑
lS
525
黑
电喷控制继电器1 绿
A
棕
黄/白
BJ300GS circuit diagram (sale in domestic market)
-
黑/棕
绿/紫
棕/红
诊断仪粉红
绿1
棕
A
黑/白1
选配
蓝/
电瓶正极粉红1
粉红/棕5 粉红/绿3 棕/橙1
黄/紫
灰/黄1 棕/黑黄/蓝1 粉红黑紫/棕粉红/黑白/红黑/紫黑/蓝白/棕蓝/黄棕粉红/白4 白2 灰
le
红/浅蓝1 黄/棕橙/黑灰/红浅绿/白白/黑黑蓝/白白/绿浅绿红/棕
棕/红黑/红白/黄绿/紫白/紫黄/绿紫/白6
،‫م‬،‫ء‬،‫م‬،‫ ء‬،‫م‬،‫ء‬
،‫م‬،‫ء‬،‫م‬،‫ ء‬،‫م‬،‫??ء‬ 蓝蓝黑黑红黄黄白蓝黑黑
绿黄黄黑黄
黑
红黑粉红黑白黄黑黑黄黑白黄白黄白黑灰黄
x
橙黑黑/棕红 / / / / / / / / / / /
/ 黑 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
红/黑
/ / /
/ / 黄粉蓝蓝棕绿1白绿白紫蓝
棕白蓝黑蓝棕白红白黑白红1 白紫1 白棕蓝蓝1 棕红灰
绿蓝红1
电瓶负极
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
103℃
水温开关风扇油位传感器防侧翻传感器 2缸氧传感器燃油泵 1缸氧传感器进气温度 1#Gr ECU J1 1#BLACK ECU J2 μμ? ?
an
水温传感器点火线圈速度传感器进气压力传感器触发头
喷油器
d re
Ma
r tin s - d e
p.t
e c nic
o @
CO
P Y - M
idling control valve
u
Y/R GR
starter diode
Y/P P/N
lt
W/Y BL
i
Fuse box
Starter relay rear brake switch side stand swtich Flasher
Caution light
Fuel Ignition left hand right hand headlight controller
Battery positiveIgnition switch diode
front brake switch Light pump Fan ECU1 lock
Fuse IN5408
15A 15A 15A 15A 10A 40A BL/Y
B/W1
m
speedometer 1LH 1 RH 2 RH 2 LH
2 RH
B/BL
motor 1 LH 1RH 2LH
O N R G G O R O G Y
BL Y P LG O P B O GA BL O B Y
Gr N LR Y LR GR-Y3 / / P
/ LR R / / / / G /
/ B /
/ R/W / / / 3 / / Y R B
R1 / R1 / / R1 G R R Gr B N N
R W1A BL W3 W
LR LBL BL Y G B R throttle position
P
G B B Gr Y W / / BL
/ Y W / / B1 W1 W W3 2 2
R/W
o
/BL W 3
Gr W 3 P W sensor
Y Gr G Gr
N/W
/ R/BL O3 Dg Gr/R B R/W
BL
to
Oil N/W Gr O/W3 R/P1 N/B O/B Carbon canister
switch Y/W
Neutral GR LR/BL magnetic valve
LG/W
Starter G/Y2 right turning
diode Gr N/W3 light
G/W1 G/R2
M
right turning left turning
light N/W3 GY3
light
o
BL B
Headlight Y Y Tail light
BL
P
left turning G/B1 Y
to
light GR/Y3 license light
B
r
B
Clutch switch
LG/W
P
B
o
Horn
N/P
rt
R/W
u
Fan relay G/N
Y/B
O/G
R/W
g
Headlight BL/G
Gr/G
relay
LR/BL
a
G/BL
ECU fuel pump Y/W

BL/B
R/B
R/W
Main relay Y/R
lS
R/W
526
BJ300GS circuit diagram (EURO-STANDARD)
O/W1
B Color Codes:
EFI control
G
A
relay1 N
B: Black
Y/W BL: Blue
N: Brown
-
R/P1
R/P DG: Dark Green
N/R
Diagnose tool 1# N/BL G: Green
Dg
R/BL Gr: Gray
A
LBL: Light Blue Blue
battery positive
LG: Light Green
P/N Y/P BL/ O: Orange
LR1
BL N/B Y/BL1 N/BL B W/N BL/Y N
le
W/Y LR/B W/B B BL/W W/R B/P B/BL
BL/G Y/N O/B N/R B/R B/O1 W/G G R/N
O/R R/P W/P Y/G P: Purple
W W W
battery negative
R: Red
BL BL B
B
B R Y Y
x
G W W W B R1 R B LR B W Y B B Y B W Y W Y W Y Y B Y Gr Y W BL B B
O B DG / / / / / / /
/ B DG R / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / LR: Light Red
R/B
/ / / / Y LR1 BL
N W BL B BL N W R W B W R1 W P1 W N BL BL1 BL N G1 W G W P BL
G BL R Gr
Rectifier 1st cylinder O2sensor W: White
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Y: Yellow
103،‫و‬ 1#2 1#1 1#2 1#1 1#2 1# 1#1 1#
1#Gr ECU J1 1#BLACK ECU J2
Water temperature Fan Oil position sensor fuel pump intake temperature
roll over sensor 2nd cylinder O2sensor speed sensor intake pressure 1st cylinder O2sensor pick-up coil
switch sensor sensor
an
water temperature
sensor
ignition coil
Injector
d re
Ma
r tin s - d e p.t
e c nic
o @

BN 302 ABS - Workshop Manual (En)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BN 302 ABS - Workshop Manual (En)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BN 302 ABS - Workshop Manual (En)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BN302/TNT300 Service Manual

procedures are in sequence, one step for each time.

is included on the top of each page.

2. In order to better identify parts and make different processes clearer,

4. Parts that need to be lubricated and changed should be symbolized. Please

refer to the section “Symbol”.

operating sequence, parts name, precaution for work, etc. @

c) Add parts or accessories to make motorcycles exceed standards. le x

Check and Regular

New parts to use

General Information Chapter I

Check and Regular

Cooling System Chapter VI

Fuel System Chapter VII

General safety .................................................................................................................................................... 15

Thermal energy section le x

Model complying with European Regulations

Button Function Table

Coolant temperature measurement (5):

It indicates the coolant temperature in °F (Fahrenheit) or ℃ (Centigrade).

Different assembling units and backplates have

The end of rubber hose (fuel pipe, vacuum tube or

Lock washer/locking plate, bolt

Degrease the both sides of bolts or nuts with solvents

Loose cables are the hidden danger of electrical

Sprocket locking tools

Piston pin removers are

Gearshift lever drum

Flywheel extractors are

Engine adjusting tools

Oil filter tools are used

Valve removal adapters

Gauges are used for

Gauges are used for

Vernier calipers are used

Flywheel locking tools

Locking tools for lock

Locking tools for o @

Valve, valve seat and valve guide

Exhaust 1.75 ~ 1.95 mm

Exhaust 1.75 ~ 1.95 mm

Type of piston ring Drum type

Clearance between oil scraping ring and ring trough 0.04-0.14mm

Gear control mechanism

Front hydraulic brake Limit

Rear hydraulic brake

Fuel oil pump

Maximum amperage 1.8A

Fuel oil sensor

Air temperature sensor

Outlet water temperature switch

Basic fastening torque

Crankcase bolt (M6, L = 40 mm) 10 1 89 in·lb S

Check operation/ adjust the

Single stay Check operation I I I I I

Connecting Check operation I I I I I I I

Fuel oil Check / replace I I I I I I I

8 Charcoal canister combination 1 17 Rubber bushing II

Replacement of air filter